GUIDA Get On Board PDF [PDF]

Zitiervorschau

Giuseppina Abis Sally Davies

TEACHER’S BOOK

GET ON BOARD 2nd Edition Fully revised and updated

Realizzazione editoriale: ART Servizi Editoriali S.r.l. – Bologna Progetto editoriale: Massimo Manzoni Coordinamento editoriale: Cinzia Bisognin Redazione: Silvia Magi Impaginazione: Pietro Genna

Incisione lastre mediante CTP: Fotoincisa Effegi, Savigliano (CN) Stampa: Edizioni Il Capitello, Torino

PROPRIETÀ LETTERARIA RISERVATA L’Editore, nell’ambito delle leggi internazionali sul copyright, è a disposizione degli aventi diritto non potuti rintracciare. I diritti di traduzione, di riproduzione e di adattamento, totale o parziale, con qualsiasi mezzo, compresi microfilm e copie fotostatiche, sono riservati per tutti i paesi. 1ª edizione: settembre 2013 Ristampa: 5 4 2018 2017

3 2016

2 2015

1 2014

L’Editore e gli Autori hanno rispettato le indicazioni di Progetto Polite, “Pari opportunità e libri di testo”.

© Edizioni il Capitello Via Sansovino, 243/22/R 10151 Torino tel. 011-4513611

2

TEACHER’S BOOK

Struttura del corso Questo testo di inglese tecnico è rivolto agli studenti degli istituti tecnici dell’indirizzo “Trasporti e Logistica”. L’obiettivo principale è quello di far acquisire agli studenti conoscenze e competenze nell’uso della lingua inglese mirate al loro specifico ambito professionale: struttura, contenuti ed esercizi proposti sono quindi funzionali alla consultazione e comprensione di testi specialistici, come manuali e istruzioni d’uso di macchinari, così come alla ricezione e trasmissione di messaggi radio, e all’introduzione alle problematiche della logistica dei trasporti. Nell’organizzazione e nello sviluppo delle unità si è cercato di rispondere alle seguenti esigenze didattiche: significatività dei contenuti: gli argomenti delle unità didattiche sono stati scelti mantenendo come linee guida i temi che gli studenti affrontano nelle discipline d’indirizzo del corso di studi; utilità delle attività proposte: l’elaborazione didattica dei testi e l’insieme degli esercizi proposti per sviluppare le quattro abilità sono strettamente finalizzati al raggiungimento dell’obiettivo legato alla microlingua; flessibilità didattica: le singole unità didattiche sono autonome tra loro e consentono all’insegnante la massima libertà di scelta nel tracciare un eventuale percorso modulare adatto alle esigenze delle proprie classi; questa organizzazione permette altresì di trovare, all’interno dell’ampia offerta di argomenti sviluppati nelle diverse unità didattiche, agevoli spunti per percorsi interdisciplinari. Si è cercato di rendere le attività proposte in ciascuna unità didattica il più possibile varie e motivanti. Esse includono tipologie diverse di esercizi, finalizzate sia all’acquisizione delle quattro abilità, sia all’acquisizione di abilità di studio come la capacità di riassumere e sintetizzare. All’interno delle unità didattiche si trovano quindi: esercizi rivolti a facilitare la comprensione del testo – come answer the questions; esercizi rivolti a facilitare l’acquisizione del lessico – come gli esercizi di matching tra termini italiani e inglesi che hanno lo stesso significato; esercizi di listening per completare un paragrafo, intesi sia a motivare l’attività di ascolto, sia a esercitare la comprensione e il riconoscimento di singoli termini chiave; esercizi di guided summary intesi a facilitare la sintesi dei contenuti. Non mancano attività di speaking – realizzate spesso come pair-work – e momenti di riflessione grammaticale su strutture tipiche della lingua tecnica, per esempio l’uso delle forme passive. Oltre agli esercizi di ascolto finalizzati al completamento di un breve testo, sono stati selezionati diversi paragrafi per un’attività di listen and read. Ciascuna unità didattica si conclude con un project work. Questi consistono in attività varie di ricerca guidata su Internet, per le quali vengono indicate le pagine specifiche e i relativi link. Tali attività potranno offrire l’occasione per lavorare nel laboratorio informatico e approfondire, attraverso il web, i contenuti appresi.

3

TEACHER’S BOOK

In appendice al testo si trovano la sezione di grammatica e il glossario. La sezione di grammatica (Grammar notes) è costituita da spiegazioni ed esercizi, utili a superare le principali difficoltà concrete che gli studenti incontrano nello studio della lingua tecnica; questa sezione è completata da una tavola dei verbi irregolari inglesi. Il glossario (Glossary) riporta la traduzione dei termini tecnici più frequenti nei brani proposti. Il testo è corredato da un CD audio che contiene la registrazione di tutti i brani finalizzati all’ascolto. I brani contraddistinti dal simbolo sono invece disponibili nel sito dell’editore.

Guida per l’insegnante Nella guida, l’insegnante trova i seguenti supporti didattici: keys: la soluzione di tutti gli esercizi proposti nelle unità didattiche e nella sezione di grammatica; tapescripts: la trascrizione di tutti i brani d’ascolto che lo studente deve completare; 32 tests: i test per la verifica scritta alla conclusione di ciascuna unità didattica, con le relative soluzioni per agevolare la correzione. I test sono impostati su varie tipologie di esercizi, sia di produzione sia di riconoscimento. All’interno dei test è assegnato un punteggio per ogni risposta corretta nei vari esercizi; la somma dei punteggi di ciascun test è di 30 punti. L’insegnante potrà ricavare il voto in decimi dividendo per 3 il punteggio totale ottenuto da ciascuno studente.

4

key to unit exercises

Key to unit exercises UNIT 1 The main parts of a ship Ex 1 Listen to the names that refer to the main parts of the hull and repeat them after the recording. amidships, bottom, bow, upper works, starboard amidships, main deck, port, sides, starboard, stern, port bow, waterline Ex 2 Listen to the recording and complete the text with the missing words, as in the example 4 . 1 The main body of a ship is the hull. This is the area between the 1 main deck, the 2 sides and the 3 bottom. The main deck is the upper deck, which completely covers the hull. 2 The hull is divided into three parts: the 4 bow, the 5 stern and the 6 amidships. The bow is the fore end of the ship, the stern is the after end. The amidships is the part in the middle. 3 The sides of the hull are divided by the 7 waterline, which is a line parallel to the surface of the water. The part above the surface of the water is called the upper works, the part under the water is called the 8 bottom. 4 An imaginary vertical plane called the central line divides the hull into two halves: the right side of the hull is called the 9 starboard side, the left side is called the 10 port side. 5 We can distinguish three areas on each side of the hull and divide it into six sections. On the starboard side there is the starboard bow, the 11 starboard amidships and the starboard quarter. On the port side there is the 12 port bow, the port amidships, and the port quarter. 6 When you go towards the bow you go forward, when you go towards the stern you go aft. From side to side across the ship is known as abeam or athwartships. Ex 3 Use a bilingual dictionary and complete the table with the Italian meanings. Above = al di sopra Below = al di sotto

Under = sotto Towards = verso, in direzione di Fore end = estremità anteriore After end = estremità posteriore Upper deck = ponte superiore Rearmost part = parte posteriore Foremost part = parte anteriore Ex 5 Match the terms you have learned so far with their definitions. 1d, 2h, 3j, 4g, 5l, 6i, 7e, 8f, 9b, 10c, 11a, 12k Ex 6 Study the picture and choose the correct option. 1 amidships 2 after end 3 forward 4 aft 5 abeam Ex 7 Study the diagram and use the terms to complete the text, then listen to the recording and check. Decks and bulkheads divide the hull into a number of watertight compartments. Decks divide the hull horizontally. 1 Bulkheads are vertical steel walls going across and along the ship. The hull contains the Engine Room, cargo space, and a number of tanks. In dry cargo ships the cargo space is divided into 2 holds; in liquid cargo ships it is divided into tanks. In the multi-deck vessel, a particular type of dry-cargo ship, the holds are divided up by 3 ’tween decks. At the fore end of the hull are the fore 4 peak tanks, at the after end are the 5 after peak tanks. They are used for freshwater and water ballast. The space between the holds and the bottom of the hull contains double 6 bottom tanks. These are used for ballast water and fuel. Ex 8 See what you can remember and answer the questions. 1 It is the permanent housing above the main deck. 2 It consists of three parts: the forecastle, the bridge and the poop. 3 The forecastle is situated forward, above the bow. 4 The poop is located aft, above the stern.

5

02_KeysExercises.indd 5

25-03-2013 14:49:16

Teacher’s book

5 It contains the Engine Room, cargo space and a number of tanks. 6 It is divided into a number of watertight compartments. 7 The hull is divided by decks and bulkheads. 8 In a dry-cargo ship, the cargo space is divided into holds. 9 In a liquid cargo ship the cargo space is divided into tanks. 10 ’Tween decks are horizontal divisions of the holds. 11 Fore and after peak tanks are used for fresh water and water ballast. 12 Double bottom tanks are used for water ballast or fuel. Ex 9 Listen to the recording and complete the first passage. Then read and complete the second passage. Passage 1 The diagram shows the layout of a modern dry cargo ship. The hull is divided up into a number of watertight 1 compartments by decks and steel 2 bulkheads. At the fore and after ends of the hull are the 3 fore peak tanks and the 4 after peak tanks. The 5 Engine Room is situated at the after end of the ship to leave more room for cargo. The cargo space is divided up into 6 watertight compartments. These also have 7 ’tween decks. Above the main deck is the 8 superstructure. At the fore end is the 9 forecastle. At the after end the bridge superstructure and the 10 poop are combined. Passage 2 The diagram 1 shows the layout of an oil tanker. The hull is 2 divided into a number of 3 watertight compartments by decks and bulkheads. At the fore and after ends of the hull are the forepeak tanks and the afterpeak tanks. The Engine Room is 4 situated at the after end of the ship, to leave more 5 room for cargo. Between the forepeak tank and the cargo space is a coffer dam (CD). The 6 cargo space is divided up into a 7 number of tanks. Above the 8 main deck is the superstructure. At the 9 fore end is the forecastle. At the after end, the bridge superstructure and the poop are 10 combined.

Ex 10 Match each English term with its Italian equivalent and copy the pairs into your exercise book. 1k, 2m, 3e, 4g, 5h, 6n, 7b, 8d, 9i, 10a, 11l, 12c, 13f, 14j, 15o

UNIT 2 Ships’ measurements and specifications Ex 4 Match each measurement with its definition. 1e, 2d, 3g, 4c, 5f, 6b, 7a Ex 5 Complete the description of “Lucky 3” with the missing information from the chart. Lucky 3 was built by 1 Landers & Sons. She has an overall length of 2 203.92 m and a 3 breadth of 37.3 m. Her draft is 4 16.34 m and she has a 5 deadweight of 21,441 t. Her gross tonnage is 6 30,457. She has a diesel engine which develops a power of 7 21,000 kW. She can sail at a 8 service speed of 25 knots. Project Work AMERIGO VESPUCCI – SPECIFICATIONS Name Building shipyard Type of ship Launched Number of masts Number of sails Length overall LBP (length between perpendiculars) Extreme breadth Draft Total height Full load displacement Gross tonnage Net tonnage Number and type of engines Main engine output Service speed (sails and engines) Crew

AMERIGO VESPUCCI Castellammare di Stabia (Naples) Sailing vessel (with auxiliary engine propulsion)

22nd February 1931 3 26 101 m 82.38 m 15.50 m 7m 54.0 m 4,150 t 3,410.36 1,202.57 Two 4-stroke FIAT diesel engines 1471 KW (1972.64 Horse Power) Sails 10 knots, engines 12 knots 240

UNIT 3 Ship classification Ex 1 Answer the questions. 1 Boats are small open vessels, while ships can be of a considerable size. 2 Boats can sail for distances of not more than six nautical miles from the coast. 3 Boats are used for coastal fishing, water sports and as lifeboats on board ship. 4 No, they don’t. For example, rowing boats and canoes do not have engines but oars.

6

02_KeysExercises.indd 6

25-03-2013 14:49:16

key to unit exercises

5 Ships are moved or propelled by an engine. 6 Ships can carry goods, vehicles or passengers on the open sea. 7 Ships can sail variable distances from the coast, depending on the kind of navigation for which they are authorized. Ex 2 Choose the correct option. 1a, 2b, 3a, 4a, 5c Ex 3 Complete with the missing words. The authority which classifies and registers ships in Italy: the RINA. The authority which classifies and registers ships in Great Britain: the Lloyd’s Register of Shipping (LR). Classification notations: class symbol

construction mark type class notation navigation notation

Unrestricted navigation indicates that the ship can sail on the high seas and in any period of the year. Fishing boats are used for commercial fishing. If we need to drag the sea bottom, we use a dredger. Pupils can learn about sailing on board a schoolship. Canoeing, rowing and other water sports are done with pleasure crafts. Ex 4 Study the above certificate and answer the questions. 1 This certificate was issued by the RINA. 2 It is a certificate of class. 3 The ship has been classified as an oil tanker. 4 She has been assigned to unrestricted navigation. 5 She will carry crude oil or chemical products in bulk. 6 ESP means Enhanced Survey Programme. 7 The ship has a double hull which extends for the entire length of the cargo area. 8 The Load Line Certificate, which indicates the ship’s safe. Ex 5 Which types of ship are these? 1 Cruise ships. 2 Ferries. 3 Dry bulk carriers. 4 Oil tankers. 5 Chemical tankers. 6 LNG carriers.

7 Container ships. 8 Refrigerated ships. Ex 6 On which kind of ship would the following people or goods travel? Insert them into the table. Ferries the Jones’ family and



their car on their way to France / you and your scooter LNG carriers methane gas Refrigerated ships meat from Argentina / kiwis from New Zealand Chemical carriers paint from Singapore Dry bulk carriers grain / sugar Oil tankers petroleum from the Middle East / petrol from the SARAS refinery Container ships antique furniture from China / tinned food Ex 7 Complete the diagram about the different types of merchant ships. Merchant ships

Passenger ships

Cargo ships

Cruise ships

Dry cargo ships

Liquid cargo ships

Ferries

Dry bulk carriers

Crude oil tankers

Refrigerated ships

Chemical tankers

Container ships

LNG carriers

Liquid and Dry cargo

OBO carriers

Project Work For the Certificate of Registry,

Bahamas SUN

For the International Tonnage Certificate,

Length 74.57 m Breadth 11.30 m Depth 6.40 m Gross tonnage 1527 Net tonnage 840

For the International Loadline Certificate,

SUNNY LADY

7

02_KeysExercises.indd 7

25-03-2013 14:49:16

Teacher’s book

NASSAU 1265 In the Document of Safe Manning,

PRINS FILIP 50

For the International Oil Pollution Prevention Certificate,

LADY 30th April 1999

UNIT 4 Shipbuilding Ex 1 Answer the questions. 1 Ships are built in shipyards. 2 The USA, Japan and some European countries like Great Britain, France and Italy build most of the world’s merchant ships. 3 To allow vessels to be launched from the building ways. 4 They are built in slipways or in dry docks. 5 When they are two-thirds completed. 6 The rest of the work is finished at the outfitting pier.

4 When are the side framing and bulkheads erected? 5 What is installed last? Ex 6 Reorder the following statements. The first one has been done to help you. 1d, 2l, 3a, 4e, 5h, 6f, 7j, 8b, 9i, 10c, 11k, 12g Ex 7 Now rewrite the sentences in the passive form and make up a paragraph. Begin like this: After the classification society has approved the working plans, the shipyard starts to build the ship. First the keel is built, next the bottom with

its plating is laid out. Then the side framing and bulkheads are erected. Spaces like double bottom tanks are tested for tightness. Finally the superstructure is installed. Shortly before launching, the propeller shafting and propulsion machinery are installed. As the ship is launched, she is christened by breaking a bottle of champagne on her hull. Then the ship is towed to the outfitting pier, where the outfitting work is carried out. Next the ship is taken for a trial trip, then she is finally delivered to the owner.

Ex 2 Ask questions using the question word who. 1 Who designs ships? 2 Who approves the basic designs? 3 Who draws up the working plans? 4 Who registers ships?

Ex 8 Match each term with its definition. 1e, 2g, 3f, 4d, 5a, 6c, 7b

Ex 3 Complete the table by writing the past participle of the verbs. to install (r) / installed to erect (r) / erected to build (ir) / built to lay out (ir) / laid out

The hull framing The main centreline structural part of the hull is the 1 keel, which runs from the stem at the bow to the stern post at the stern. The keel is the backbone of the ship. To the keel are fastened the 2 frames, which run athwartship. These are the ribs of the ship and give shape and strength to the hull. Deck 3 beams and bulkheads support the decks and they give added strength to resist the pressure of the water on the sides of the hull.

Ex 4 Write sentences using the passive form of the present simple. 1 The keel is built first. 2 Then the bottom with its plating is laid out. 3 Next, the side framing and bulkheads are erected. 4 Finally, the superstructure or deckhouse is installed. Ex 5 Now ask questions for the given answers using the passive. 1 Where are ships built? 2 What is built first? 3 What is laid out next?

Ex 9 Study the picture that shows in detail the framework of the hull. Read the text that describes the picture and insert the missing words.

The plating The skin, or shell plating, provides watertightness. The 4 plates, the principal strength members of a ship, have various thicknesses. The heaviest plates are put on amidships. Using plates of various thickness reduces the weight of the metal used and gives the vessel additional 5 strength at its

8

02_KeysExercises.indd 8

25-03-2013 14:49:16

key to unit exercises

broadest part. The plates, put on in rows from bow to stern, are called 6 strakes. They are lettered consecutively, beginning at the keel and going upward. Strake names The bottom row of strakes on either side of the keel is called 7 garboard strakes. The strakes at the turn of the hull, running in the bilge, are 8 bilge strakes. The strakes running between the garboard and bilge strakes are called bottom strakes and the topmost strakes of the hull are 9 sheer strakes. The upper edge of the sheer strake is the gunwale. Ex 10 Listen and complete the text with the missing words given in scrambled order. How not to build a ship The construction of the Titanic began in March 1909 in Belfast in the Harland and Wolff 1 shipyard. Her owners, the White Star Line, designed the Titanic to be the largest ship to ever take to the seas and spared no expense in her 2 construction. It took more than 3,000 men, 3 years to build the Titanic at a cost of $7.5 million. The marketing materials published before her 3 maiden voyage claimed that the ship was “designed to be 4 unsinkable”. The construction included sixteen 5 compartments that were reported to be 6 watertight. The builders of the Titanic had included 7 steel doors that could be closed in 25 seconds or less, enclosing any water that might have seeped in to threaten the safety of the ship and her occupants. Of course, we now know that many of the nearly 3 million rivets used to hold the ship’s 8 hull plates together popped loose when the 9 vessel struck a massive iceberg. Without the rivets to hold the 10 plating together, water seeped into the ship. New theories have also suggested that the 11 iron used in the Titanic construction although standard for the first part of the 20th century contained high degrees of sulphur, which made the 12 hull plates particularly susceptible to the icy cold waters of the Atlantic Ocean. We will probably never know the exact cause of the Titanic’s destruction, but her history and the fate of her passengers will always remain.

Project Work Fill in the tables.

Student A Length Width Clear width between walls Max. ship’s draft at 0 tide Lifting capacity



Dock 2

252 m 53 m 44 m 9m 33,000 tons

Student B Length Width Clear width between walls Max. ship’s draft at 0 tide Lifting capacity

Dock 3

227 m 49 m 40 m 8,7 m 30,000 tons

UNIT 5 Visual & sound signals and communication codes Ex 1 Answer the questions. 1 They need to be able to communicate easily and safely. 2 It became particularly relevant at the beginning of the 19th century, when there was a huge increase in maritime transport. 3 It was published in 1857. 4 An International Committee. 5 It was published in seven different languages. 6 It allows seamen to communicate with other people who do not speak the same language. 7 IMO is the International Maritime Organization. 8 It gives information on different ways of signalling and it also has tables with the Morse Code, flags and phonetic tables. Ex 2 Answer the following questions about paragraphs 2 and 3. 1 The ship’s siren, a whistle or a bell. 2 Each letter or number is indicated by the number of blasts of the siren. 3 They are rarely used nowadays, but they could still be useful in emergency situations, for example to transmit distress signals if the radio fails to work. 4 The Morse Code. 5 It is made up of a series of dots and dashes representing each letter and number. 6 It was radiotelegraphy.

9

02_KeysExercises.indd 9

25-03-2013 14:49:16

Teacher’s book

7 There are three different types of flags: letter flags, number flags, and triangularshaped flags. 8 A substitute flag.

2 They mostly use English. 3 When they transmit messages. 4 When there is a need for extreme clarity and in cases of language difficulties.

Ex 3 Try to decipher the message in Morse Code using the table with the Morse symbols. The message reads: “If you can read this you have understood how Morse works”.

Ex 11 Match each unit of measurement with its symbol. 1d, 2h, 3g, 4i, 5a, 6c, 7j, 8b, 9f, 10e

Ex 4 Match each picture with its description. 5, 4, 6, 1, 2, 3, 8, 7 Ex 5 Look at the flag table and complete the following descriptions of the alphabetic flags. 1 The “I” flag has a blue circle on a yellow background. 2 The “X” flag is a blue cross on a white background. 3 The “F” flag has a red diamond on a white background. 4 The “E” flag has two red and blue bands. 5 The “C” flag has narrow red, white and blue horizontal stripes. 6 The “Q” flag is yellow. 7 The “P” flag has a small white rectangle on a blue background. 8 The “V” flag has a red diagonal cross on a white background. Ex 6 Which alphabet flag is being described? If you guess correctly, the letters will spell a sentence! The sentence is: “Now you try”. Ex 7 If you understood the message, you now have to describe the flags in a similar way. Let’s try to describe the following national flags. 1 The Italian flag has three green, white and red vertical bands. 2 The Union Jack is red, white and blue. It has two red crosses and a white diagonal cross on a blue background. 3 The Stars and Stripes has a small blue rectangle in the top left-hand corner with a lot of white stars. Then it has a lot of red and white narrow horizontal stripes. 4 The French flag has three blue, white and red vertical bands. Ex 8 Answer the questions. 1 VHF radio has replaced radiotelegraphy nowadays.

Ex 13 Now try to complete the missing figures in the following parts of the radio messages. 1 Calling on Channel 1 16. 2 My draught is 2 8.35 metres. 3 Position; bearing 3 zero-nine-five degrees west, distance 4 two-two miles from Charter Point. 4 ETA (Estimated Time of Arrival) at Eurobuoy 5 18.00 GMT, December 6 15. 5 Speed: 7 one five decimal three knots. 6 My cargo is crude oil, 8 three two three five six five metric tonnes. Project Work Find out which flag is used to signal: 1 C (Charlie) 2 N (November) 3 H (Hotel) 4 W (Whiskey) 5 Z (Zulu) 6 P (Papa) signals that all persons should report on board (sailors should get on board quickly because the ship is going to sail and leave port).

UNIT 6 The IALA Buoyage System & ship navigation lights Ex 1 Answer the questions. 1 Buoys are floating aids to navigation and they are found near the coast. 2 They are anchored to the bottom. 3 To ensure the safety of ships navigating near the coast. 4 Sandbanks, rocks and wrecks. 5 The IALA. 6 International Association of Lighthouse Authorities. 7 To allow them to be easily identified from a distance. 8 In 1976.

10

02_KeysExercises.indd 10

25-03-2013 14:49:17

key to unit exercises

Ex 2 Use the table and label the photos with the shape and colour pattern of each buoy. 1 This buoy is pillar-shaped. It has red and white vertical stripes. 2 This buoy is spar-shaped. It has red and black horizontal bands. 3 This buoy is conical. It is green. 4 This buoy is cylindrical. It has a red colour. 5 This buoy is spherical. It has a yellow colour. Ex 3 Try to describe lateral buoys to your partner, using the notes in the diagrams. Use sentences like these. Port-hand buoys can be shaped like a can, a pillar or a spar. They are coloured in red. Their topmark is a red can. At night they have a red light.

3 Two black cones with their bases together. 4 Two black cones with their points together. The North cardinal buoy has two black cones pointing upwards as its topmark. The topmark of the East cardinal buoy is two black cones with their bases together. The South cardinal buoy has two black cones pointing downwards as its topmark. The topmark of the West cardinal buoy is two black cones with their points together. 1 North

2 East

3 South

4 West

Students should now draw the topmark belonging to each cardinal mark in ex 5 pictures. This is the result:

Starboard-hand buoys can be shaped like a cone, a pillar or a spar. They have a green colour. Their topmark is a green cone. At night they have a green light. Ex 4 Look at the world map and answer the questions. 1 System Region A. 2 System Region B. 3 Australia uses System Region A and Japan uses System Region B. Ex 5 What does each Cardinal Mark look like? Listen and colour the spars. Get your black and yellow pencils ready! Number 1 is black over yellow. Number 2 has two black bands with a yellow band in the middle. Number 3 is yellow over black. Number 4 has two yellow bands with a black band in the middle. Ex 6 Now listen and write the name of each Cardinal Mark. A North cardinal mark is black over yellow. The East cardinal mark has two black bands with a yellow band in the middle. A South cardinal mark is yellow over black. The West cardinal mark has two yellow bands with a black band in the middle. 1 North

2 East

3 South

4 West

Ex 7 Now listen to how each topmark is described; then continue listening and write the name of each cardinal buoy. 1 Two black cones pointing upwards. 2 Two black cones pointing downwards.

N

E Black

S

W

Yellow

Ex 8 Complete the description of cardinal marks. A North cardinal buoy is 1 black over 2 yellow; its topmark is two black cones pointing 3 upwards. An East cardinal buoy has two 4 black bands with a 5 yellow band in the middle; as a topmark it has two black cones with their 6 bases together. A South cardinal buoy is 7 yellow over 8 black; its topmark is two black cones pointing 9 downwards. A West cardinal buoy has two 10 yellow bands with a 11 black band in the middle; as a topmark it has two black cones with their 12 points together. At night they flash a 13 white light. Their light consists of a sequence of quick or very quick white flashes (Q. or V.Q. Flashes) whose 14 number gives the clock-face position of the cardinal mark. So the East mark has 15 three white flashes every 10 seconds, the South mark has 16 six and the West mark has 17 nine. The North mark has a 18 continuous quick white flash.

11

02_KeysExercises.indd 11

25-03-2013 14:49:17

Teacher’s book

Ex 9 Look at the diagrams of the isolated danger marks and try to complete the text with the missing words. They are either 1 pillar or spar-shaped. They are 2 black in colour with one or more horizontal 3 red bands. Their topmark is two 4 black spheres. At night they flash a white 5 light, in groups of two flashes (Gp Fl 2) with intervals of 5 seconds. Ex 10 Write the meaning of these abbreviations and indicate the type of buoy flashing this light. 1 Q (3) – Three quick flashes – East mark 2 VQ (9) – Nine very quick flashes – West

mark

3 Gp Fl 2 5s – Groups of 2 flashes every 5 seconds – Danger 4 LFl 10s – A long flash every ten seconds –

Safe water

Ex 11 Do you remember the purpose of each mark? Write the name of each mark. 1 Isolated danger marks. 2 Special marks. 3 Safe water marks. 4 Cardinal marks. 5 Lateral marks. Ex 12 Mark the following statements as True or False and correct the false ones. 1T–2F–3T–4F–5T–6T–7F–8T 2 They have a cone as their topmark. 4 North and South America are in the IALA System Region B. 7 They are red and white. Ex 13 Mark the following statements as True or False and correct the false ones. 1T–2T–3F–4T–5F–6F–7F–8F 3 They are white. 5 They are coloured lights. 6 They must be visible for at least three miles. 7 The starboard light is green while the portside light is red. 8 Only ships of over 50 metres in length must show two masthead lights. Ex 14 Complete the text with the missing colours and names of lights. Vessels which navigate at night must show 1 navigation lights, so that other vessels can see if there is a danger of collision and take action to avoid it. All vessels show a

2 green light at starboard and a 3 red light at their portside. They must show a 4 white stern light (behind or astern). The red and green lights mentioned are called 5 sidelights. Ships must also show at least one masthead light on the high mast. Ships which are more than 50 metres long must have two 6 masthead lights. All lights have well defined angles through which they must be visible. Outside of these angles, the lights cannot be seen.

UNIT 7 Geographical coordinates Ex 1 Answer the questions. 1 A year is the time taken for a planet to go around the Sun. 2 An imaginary line passing through the centre of the Earth. 3 The poles are the ends of the Earth’s axis. 4 The Equator divides the Earth into two hemispheres. 5 They are called the Northern and Southern Hemispheres. 6 The Earth is 42 kilometres longer across the Equator than across the poles. Ex 2 Answer the questions. 1 Parallels are imaginary lines of latitude running from east to west. 2 Meridians are imaginary lines of longitude running from north to south. 3 The Prime Meridian is the Greenwich meridian. 4 The Equator is the Prime Parallel. 5 Parallels have different length: they become smaller as they get nearer to the poles. 6 Meridians are all the same length. All of them run from the North to the South Pole. Ex 3 Revise what you know about the Equator by trying to complete the sentences. 1 The Equator is an imaginary circle around the Earth. 2 The Equator is located halfway between the poles. 3 The Equator represents the maximum circumference of the Earth. 4 The Equator divides the Earth into two hemispheres.

12

02_KeysExercises.indd 12

25-03-2013 14:49:17

key to unit exercises

5 Places north of the Equator are in the Northern Hemisphere. 6 Places south of the Equator are in the Southern Hemisphere. 7 Europe is in the Northern Hemisphere. 8 The Equator is the reference or Prime Parallel. Ex 4 Choose the correct option. 1c, 2a, 3b, 4b, 5a, 6c Ex 5 Complete the text with the missing words. To calculate geographical coordinates we consider the Earth as a 1 sphere. When we draw latitude and longitude we start from the 2 centre of the Earth, which is the Earth’s axis. Latitude and longitude are indicated in 3 degrees because they are 4 angles formed at the centre of the Earth. Latitude is the angle formed at the centre of the Earth by the arc of the 5 meridian that joins a point A to the Equator. Longitude is the angle formed at the centre of the Earth by the arc of the 6 Equator that links a point A to Greenwich meridian.

3 No, it becomes longer as we move from the Equator to the poles. 4 It changes as the curvature of the meridians varies on the Earth’s surface. 5 It is 1,843 metres. 6 It is 1,862 metres. 7 The speed of a ship is measured in knots. 8 A knot is equal to a speed of 1 nautical mile per hour. 9 The speed of a ship can be measured by using a log. 10 At a speed of 14 knots we will cover 28 nautical miles in 2 hours. Project Work b. Now, let’s travel around the world and find the coordinates of cities. b1. Greenwich latitude is: Lat 52°N b2. The geographical coordinates of Rome are: Lat 41°N Long 12°E. Can you find the coordinates of the following towns?

Ex 8 Answer the questions. 1 It is 1,853 metres long. 2 It is equal to the length of 1’ of the maximum circumference of the Earth.

48°N 59°N 35°N 40°N 34°S 34°S

Paris Oslo Tokyo New York Buenos Aires Sydney

Ex 6 Match each item on the right with an item on the left. 1f, 2e, 3h, 4j, 5i, 6a, 7b, 8g, 9c, 10d Ex 7 Answer the questions. 1 There are 24 time zones. 2 There are 15 degrees of longitude in each of them. 3 Dividing 360 by 24. The degrees of the Earth considered as a perfect sphere are 360, while 24 is the number of hours the Earth takes to rotate on its own axis. 4 They are numbered starting from Greenwich and going to the east. 5 You set your watch one hour back, because Italy is west of Greenwich. 6 It is the time of each time zone. For example, all countries in central Europe (Norway, Denmark, Germany, France and Italy) have the same standard time because they are in the same time zone, +1 hour from Greenwich.

Latitude

Longitude 2°E 10°E 139°E 73°W 58°W 151°E

b3. Which of these six cities is nearest to the Anti-meridian? It is: Sydney, of course.

Unit 8 Navigational aids and instruments Ex 1 Match the two parts of each definition. 1h, 2f, 3e, 4c, 5g, 6b, 7a, 8d Ex 2 Now your teacher will give you a photocopy; use it to dictate the deviations in your table to your partner. STUDENT A Magnetic Compass Table Ship: Caribbean – Bermuda Compass – PLATH 3521 in Pilot House



Compass bearing O° 30° 60° 90° 120° 150°

Deviations –1°1 + 0°.4 +1°.7 +2°.0 +1°.0 +0°.6

13

02_KeysExercises.indd 13

25-03-2013 14:49:17

Teacher’s book

1F–2F–3T–4T–5F–6T

STUDENT B Magnetic Compass Table Ship: Caribbean – Bermuda Compass – PLATH 3521 in Pilot House



Compass bearing 180° 210° 240° 270° 300° 330°

Deviations +0°.5 + 0°.9 +1°.0 +0°.2 –1°.0 –1°.7

Ex 3 Complete the text with the missing words. A gyroscopic compass has two main advantages over a magnetic compass. Firstly, the gyrocompass is not subject to magnetic 1 variation like a magnetic compass because it does not point to the 2 magnetic north, but to Earth’s 3 true north. In fact, the gyrocompass’ spinning axis is aligned with the Earth’s rotational axis. Then, once the gyroscope is set spinning, it continues to point in the same direction – the true north – regardless of the ship’s heaving motion or direction. Secondly, the magnetic field of the 4 iron body of the ship itself affects the reading on the magnetic compass. This phenomenon, called magnetic 5 deviation (see paragraph 2), does not affect the gyrocompass which always remains aligned with the Earth’s 6 axis.

1 They emit sound waves. 2 They travel in the water at a speed of 1,500 metres per second. 5 The echo sounder indicates the presence of shoals of fish. Ex 7 Insert the correct number for each statement. 1 Satellites needed to fix your ship’s position: 3 2 Time taken to orbit the Earth: 12 hours 3 Current number of satellites: 31 4 Speed of light: 300,000 km/sec 5 Orbiting height: about 20,000 kilometres

above the Earth

6 Position error margin: 20 metres Ex 8 Find the best navigational aid for each situation. 1 radar, 2 compass, 3 echo sounder, 4 log, 5 sextant, 6 sonar

Project Work

Ex 5 Answer the questions. 1 Radar was first used by the allied troops during the Second World War. 2 Radar stands for RAdio Detection And Ranging. 3 The system emits radio microwaves. 4 Radio waves travel at the speed of light – 300,000 kilometres per second. 5 They are reflected by the solid surface; they “bounce back”. 6 By calculating the time elapsed between the emission and the return of the pulse signal. 7 The operator sees the tracked objects on the radar screen called a PPI. 8 COLREG requires that ships maintain a constant radar watch on board to prevent any danger of collision with other ships.

1. Today we are surfing the internet to watch a video. Watch & listen, then fill in the missing words. We see everything because of reflected light. 1 Radar is a beam not of visible light but of a related form of energy: 2 microwave radiation. When an invisible 3 beam of microwaves is directed outwards and if something crosses its path, a little of the microwave energy is 4 bounced back to its source. The time it takes a 5 pulse of microwave energy to travel out and be reflected back gives a 6 distance away from the object being tracked. The 7 angle of the returning energy coming back to the radar gives the 8 altitude of the object. Watson Watt’s invention became the first working radar system able to detect a plane in flight. A chain whole network could detect approaching aircraft at a distance of up to 9 seventy miles and up to an altitude of 10 twenty thousand feet. Was this enough warning to scramble Britain’s fighters? This question would soon be answered.

Ex 6 Mark the following statements as True or False and correct the false ones.

2. Do you know why the nautical speed unit is called knot, or why we measure the

Ex 4 Match each term with its definition. 1d, 2c, 3f, 4h, 5b, 6g, 7a, 8e

14

02_KeysExercises.indd 14

25-03-2013 14:49:17

key to unit exercises

ship’s speed with a log? Read and find out the following information, then write a short summary. Dutch sailors probably invented the “Chip Log” in 1500-1600s. A half-minute sand glass was the device used to measure time. The nautical speed unit got its name by the method of counting the number of rope knots that went overboard in a given time interval. Sample summary

The “Chip Log” method to measure ship speed was probably invented by Dutch sailors in 1500-1600s. (Read: in fifteen or sixteen hundred). The Chip Log consisted of a small wood panel attached to a reel of rope. To measure time they used a halfminute sand glass. The rope had knots tied at equal distances along the reel. Sailors would throw the wood panel into the sea, behind the ship, and the rope would start unwinding from the reel. The faster the ship was moving forward the faster the rope would unwind. By counting the

number of knots that went overboard in a given time interval, measured by the sand

glass, they could tell the ship’s speed. In fact, that is the origin of the nautical speed unit: the knot.

Unit 9 The Deck Department Ex 1 Answer the questions. 1 The ship’s crew is organized in departments. 2 The Deck and Engine Departments. 3 The Deck Department deals with navigation, loading and unloading cargo and communications. 4 The First Officer. 5 Able and Ordinary Seamen. 6 The Captain is responsible for the ship, her cargo and crew. Ex 2 Listen to paragraph 2 and fill in the gaps with the missing words. The Master is the person chosen by the shipowner to 1 command the ship. He is the maximum authority 2 on board, and he represents the shipowner in all circumstances. His job includes both

3 technical and administrative functions. His technical functions concern the safe navigation of the ship from 4 port to port, and the safety of the ship’s 5 crew and cargo. Before leaving port, he must make sure that the ship is seaworthy, that it is properly 6 equipped and that the cargo is 7 stowed safely and securely. He is also responsible for manoeuvring the ship in and out of port. As regards his administrative responsibilities, he must make 8 sure that the ship carries all the necessary documentation before leaving port. A ship must carry the following 9 papers: the Certificate of Registry, which is the ship’s 10 identity document and indicates the ship’s name, call sign and flag state. It also gives thorough information about the ship, such as dimensions, tonnage and type of service; the Bill of Entry or the Bill of Export. The former is a 11 list of the carried goods, the latter lists the goods which are to be 12 loaded on board; the International Tonnage Certificate, which indicates the cargo-carrying 13 capacity of the ship, and which is used to calculate port and canal dues; the International Load Line Certificate, which indicates the maximum draft to which a ship can be loaded, to ensure that she always has sufficient 14 freeboard to stay afloat; the Intact Stability Booklet, which gives the Master accurate guidance in maintaining the ship’s 15 stability under varying conditions of loading; the Crew List, which gives details on the 16 members of the crew, their qualifications and their pay.

Ex 3 Match each term with its definition. 1f, 2e, 3d, 4a, 5b, 6c Ex 4 Which Officer does this? Chose between: Captain, First Mate, Second or Third Mate. 1 The Captain 2 The Second Mate 3 The First Mate 4 First, Second and Third Mates 5 The Captain 6 The First Mate

15

02_KeysExercises.indd 15

25-03-2013 14:49:17

Teacher’s book

7 8 9 10

The The The The

Second Mate Third Mate Captain First Mate

Ex 5 Complete the sentences and re-write the Officers’ responsibilities taken from Ex. 4 by using the gerund. 1 Commanding the ship is the responsibility of the Captain. 2 The Captain is responsible for commanding the ship. 3 The First Mate is responsible for directing the loading and unloading of cargo. 4 Maintaining the vessel’s navigational instruments and equipment is the responsibility of the Second Mate. 5 The Third Officer is responsible for checking that lifeboats and life-saving equipment are in good working order. 6 Planning a safe navigational passage is the responsibility of the Captain. 7 The First Mate is responsible for supervising/coordinating the activities of deck crews. 8 Deck Officers are responsible for standing watch on the bridge. Ex 6 Match the two parts of the definitions. 1d, 2e, 3g, 4f, 5a, 6b, 7c Ex 7 Listen to the list of words, then insert them in the correct place while listening to the passage: anchor windlass – hawser – quay – pier – winch – ropes – bollard – cables – mooring lines – capstan A 1 winch is a mechanical device that is used to pull in (wind up) or let out (wind out) a rope. Ships use either synthetic ropes, which are strong, elastic and resistant to the action of water, or wire 2 ropes which are made of steel, which is usually galvanized to stop it from rusting. Wire ropes are also called 3 cables or wire cables. A ship’s 4 capstan is a drum shaped device used for winding the ship’s anchor cable. In the days of wooden ships, capstans were made of wood and were manually operated by means of wooden bars. Nowadays they are made of iron and steel but are only used on pleasure crafts. On large ships, capstans are replaced by the hydraulically or pneumatically operated windlass, which makes the anchorage process smoother and easier.

The 5 anchor windlass winds the anchor chain up and out, allowing the anchor to be raised and lowered. 6 Hawser is a nautical term for a thick cable or rope used in mooring a ship. A vessel is said to be moored when it is tied up to a quay. Mooring is accomplished using thick ropes called 7 mooring lines or hawsers. The lines are fixed to deck fittings on the vessel at one end, and fittings on the shore, such as bollards, at the other end. A 8 bollard is a short vertical post on a quay, principally used for mooring. A 9 quay is a structure on the shore in a harbour where ships can dock to load and unload cargo or passengers. Such a structure includes berths, which are mooring locations. When this structure is built out into the sea it can also be called a 10 pier. Ex 8 Match each English term with its Italian equivalent. 1d, 2c, 3i, 4f, 5g, 6a, 7b, 8j, 9e, 10h Ex 9 Mark the following statements as True or False and correct the false ones. 1F–2T–3F–4F–5T–6F 1 Cargo handling is carried out both by the ship’s cargo gear and shore cranes. 3 A conveyor belt is used to transfer dry goods. 4 Tankers usually have their own installed pumps or cargo hose. 6 RO/RO ships load their cargo over ramps in the port, stern or port bow. Ex 10 Label the picture with the names of mooring lines. 1 Head lines 2 Forward breast line 3 Forward spring 4 Aft spring 5 Aft breast line 6 Stern lines Ex 11 Try to put the Captain’s orders and the teams’ replies in a logical sequence. 1 Futura Forward Station, single up forward to spring! 2 Futura Aft station, single up aft to breast line. 3 Let go forward! Let go aft! Is the propeller clear?

16

02_KeysExercises.indd 16

25-03-2013 14:49:18

key to unit exercises

4 Futura Bridge. Futura Aft Station. Yes, propeller is clear. All clear aft! 5 Futura Bridge. Futura Forward Station. All clear forward! 6 Futura. Finished with maneuvering stations! Ex 12 Match each order with its meaning. 1e, 2d, 3a, 4b, 5c Project Work Complete the missing information as you watch. A professional mooring operation is a kind of 1 missing link in the overall nautical chain. The video has been produced because there is little information on or international regulations for: 2 mooring lines 3 winches 4 bollards. This is strange because a lot of incidents happen 5 mooring. Movements of a badly moored ship can result in 6 expensive damage to cranes, manifolds or other 7 vessels. A ship breaking loose of its moorings is a nightmare to all 8 ports. A professional mooring process cannot only reduce 9 incidents; it can also save 10 time, 11 money and cut down on 12 emissions. This video focuses on the main cause of mooring accidents. 95% of the incidents with personal injury is caused by 13 ropes and 14 wires, being hit by a rope. Just 5% is due to 15 equipment failure. 60% of all those rope incidents happen during 16 mooring operations. So improving mooring operations reduces accidents and personal injuries. Now complete the information about the MOORING PLAN. Safe mooring starts at 17 sea with a good preparation and precise calculation of the forces on winches, bollards and lines. All components come together in the 18 mooring plan sometimes made up by the Terminal, but in all cases the 19 Captain is responsible for safe mooring. A professional plan is based on 20 four rules. First, all the lines should not exceed a 21 vertical angle of 30°. [therefore…] Second, the 22 spring lines should be placed as parallel to the vessel as possible. Third, 23 breast lines are most effective when connected square to the vessel. [if…]

The last rule, lines should work 24 together; to ensure that the forces are spread over the lines, they should have the same 25 characteristics; so 1 and 2 and 3 and 4 – same functions, same specs. The 26 Terminal Operator can file such a mooring plan as per 27 IMO number for the next visit of the ship or a sister ship. In all mooring operations it is very important that the hook or 28 bollard ashore isn’t the weakest link, like probably in this situation.

Unit 10 The Engine Department Ex 1 Here is the Italian meaning of some difficult terms from paragraph 1. Try to match each English term with its Italian equivalent. 1f, 2g, 3h, 4d, 5c, 6a, 7b, 8e, 9i, 10j Ex 2 Who is responsible for...? Indicate which person(s) is/are responsible for the following duties. 1 The Chief Engineer 2 The Second Engineer 3 Greasers 4 The Third Engineer 5 The Engineer Officers 6 The Chief Engineer 7 Firemen 8 The Chief Engineer Ex 3 Which is the correct definition of “auxiliary machinery”? b Auxiliary machinery includes all machinery on board except for the main engines and boilers. Ex 4 Listen to paragraph 3 and fill in the gaps with the missing words. Functions of auxiliary machinery Every 1 service on board ship has to come from the Engine Room: electric light, heat, running 2 water and refrigeration. All these services are provided by auxiliary 3 machinery. The 4 functions carried out by auxiliary machinery on board can be summarised as follows: 1 Supply the needs of the main 5 engines and boilers. Air compressors supply compressed air for starting 6 diesel engines; coolers are used to cool

17

02_KeysExercises.indd 17

25-03-2013 14:49:18

Teacher’s book

either oil or water; feed-water heaters, also called economisers, supply pre-heated water that 7 goes into the boilers to increase the boilers’ efficiency. 2 Keep the ship 8 dry. This is done through the bilge and ballast pumping systems. The former 9 removes water which has collected in machinery and 10 cargo spaces; the latter pumps water in and out of ballast 11 tanks. 3 Supply domestic needs. 12 Fresh water is supplied by evaporators through distillation of seawater; sewage plants provide for sanitation; 13 heating and ventilation are provided by heaters and air conditioners. 4 Supply the ship with electrical 14 power and lighting. These are provided by electricity generators. 5 Apply the main power of the engines for 15 propulsion and manoeuvring. A line of engine shafts transmits the engine power to the 16 propeller; steering gear operates the rudder for manoeuvring; anti-rolling tanks and fin stabilisers reduce the ship’s 17 rolling. 6 Provide remote control and automatic action. Self-regulating apparatus like the 18 automatic pilot, which automatically control the rudder, and steering mechanisms supply these functions. 7 Provide safety. Fire detection, fire 19 fighting equipment, lifeboats and their engines are parts of the auxiliary machinery which 20 provide safety.

Ex 6 What items of machinery are these? a The ballast pumping system. b A cooler. c A feed-water heater. d The bilge pumping system. e The air-compressor. f The electricity generator. g The/An evaporator. h Steel shafts.

Ex 5 Write the names of the different equipment under their function. a They supply the needs of main engines and boilers. air-compressors coolers economisers b They provide safety. life-boats and their engines fire-detection and fire-fighting equipment c They supply the ship with electrical power and lighting. electricity generators d They keep the ship dry. bilge and ballast pumping systems e It provides remote control of the rudder. automatic pilot

What is the function of electrical generators?/What are electrical generators used for?

Ex 7 In dictionaries you find the abbreviations sb/s.o. and sth. What do they mean? Sb and s.o. mean someboby and someone. Sth means something. Ex 8 Match each verb with its meaning and check your choice in a monolingual dictionary. 1c, 2d, 3b, 4a Ex 9 Use the information in Ex. 6 to ask questions and answer about the function of the different equipment. What is the function of air-compressors?/ What are air-compressors used for?

Air compressors are used to supply compressed air for starting the engines.

What is the function of feed-water heaters?/ What are feed-water heaters used for?

Feed-water heaters are used to heat the boiler feed water. What is the function of coolers?/What are coolers used for?

Coolers are used to cool either oil or water.

Electricity generators are used to supply the ship with electrical power and lighting. What is the function of an evaporator?/ What is an evaporator used for?

An evaporator supplies fresh water by distillation of seawater.

What is the function of steel shafts?/What are steel shafts used for?

Steel shafts transmit engine power to the propeller.

Ex 10 Answer the questions and see what you remember. 1 Auxiliary machinery is all machinery on board apart from the main engines and boilers.

18

02_KeysExercises.indd 18

25-03-2013 14:49:18

key to unit exercises

2 The Engineer Officers. 3 The main functions are to supply the needs of the main engines and boilers, to keep the ship dry, to supply domestic needs, to apply the main power of the ship for propulsion and manoeuvring, to provide remote control and automatic action and to provide safety. 4 & 5 EXAMPLES: The ballast pumping system pumps water in and out of the ballast tanks. Coolers are used to cool either oil or water. Feed-water heaters are used to heat the boiler feed-water. The bilge pumping system removes water which has gathered in machinery, cargo rooms and other spaces. The air compressor supplies compressed air for starting the engines. Etc. Ex 11 Mark the following statements as True or False and correct the false ones. 1F–2T–3F–4T–5F–6F 1 Engineer Officers regularly update the Engine Room Logbook. 3 The Chief Officer compiles the Engine Room Logbook. 5 In case of a performance failure, the engineers note down any corrective measures taken and their results. 6 The Chief Engineer is responsible for checking that the logbook is compiled and he always consults the Captain. Ex 12 Use the above information to complete the table about the ECR equipment. Generator panel It shows 1 electrical parameters such as voltage and 2 load. Engineers can decide on number of 3 generators to keep in operation. Electrical switchboard It controls 4 power supply to machinery. Engineers can stop machinery in an 5 emergency.

It allows Engineers to take action when an 10 alarm sounds. Main engine controls They indicate fuel control, 11 speed, emergency 12 stops, direction, etc. They are only operated by 13 Senior Engineers. Project Work Use this link to take a look at the Engine Control Room on the M/S “Emma Jensen” and use your powers of observation to answer the following questions about the photos! http://global-mariner.com/ index111EmmaJebsenEngineRoom.html 1 3 switchboards and 3 generator panels 27 3 Li Chau / Chinese 4 A pair of shoes 5 November 16th / The Engine Room Log 63 7 The auxiliary machinery room 8 To the main Engine Room 9 To the workshop 10 Lubricating oil / A lamp 11 Water / A lathe 12 A red star / 2 13 2 / 2 14 In the back, to the right 15 The air condition compressor / The fresh water generator 16 Yellow and red / Fire extinguisher 17 6 18 3 19 Working on the cylinder head Last photo: Starting air bottles

Unit 11 Describing technical diagrams Ex 1 Study the examples and complete the texts with words from the diagrams. Then listen to the recording and check.

They allow engineers to detect any 8 faults.

1 The diagram shows a lubricating oil pump. It is a type of gear-wheel pump and consists of interlocking gear-wheels that rotate inside a casing. The two gears are fitted closely inside the casing.

Alarm panel It monitors tank levels, 9 temperature and pressure of machinery.

2 The diagram represents a fuel induction system. This system includes/comprises the fuel tank and pipe-line, the fuel pump and

Voltmeter/ammeter They show 6 voltage and current 7 flow for major equipment.

19

02_KeysExercises.indd 19

25-03-2013 14:49:18

Teacher’s book

the fuel filter. As fuel is explosive, the fuel tank is placed away from the engine. 3 The hull is divided into a number of watertight compartments by decks and bulkheads. The hull contains the Engine Room, cargo space and a number of tanks. 4 The double-acting piston pump consists of a piston moving up and down inside a cylinder casing. The pump is fitted with non-return suction and discharge valves at the top. 5 There are three basic parts to an electric circuit: a source of electricity, an output device, and a connection between the two. A torch is an example of a simple electrical circuit and is illustrated in the picture. A battery provides the electricity, while a lamp is the output device. They are connected by two lengths of copper wire and a switch is also included to the circuit.

3 a) Used oil drains to the crankcase. b) It passes through the centrifuge to be purified. c) It is returned to the drain tank at a point next to the suction strainer. Ex 7 Translate these sentences about the lubricating oil system into English. 1 Lubricating oil drains into the crankcase and then into the drain tank. 2 A pump draws the oil from the drain tank and sends it into a heater. 3 The oil then passes through a centrifuge for purification. 4 After purification, the oil is returned to the drain tank at a point next to the suction strainer. Ex 8 What difference is there between the past participle of regular and irregular verbs? Complete the table and find out.

Simple past

Past participle

Italian meaning

6 The main part of a turbine engine is the rotor. It is made up of several rows of blades mounted on a shaft.



drained

drained

colare, drenare



returned

returned

rimandare



drew

drawn

prelevare



discharged

discharged

scaricare

Ex 3 Study the two following diagrams. They represent the auxiliary services of a marine diesel engine: a fuel oil system and a lubricating oil system. What elements do they have in common? a Tanks b Pumps c Centrifuge d Heater e Cooler f Filters g Pressure control valve/alarm



sent

sent

inviare



operated

operated

azionare



pumped

pumped

pompare



passed

passed

passare (attraverso)



stored

stored

immagazzinare



fitted

fitted

munire di, collocare



purified

purified

purificare



cooled

cooled

raffreddare

Ex 4 Now label the diagrams. Diagram 1: This is a lubricating oil system. Diagram 2: This is a fuel oil system. Ex 5 The passage describes the working cycle in a lubricating oil system. Look at diagram 2 and decide what is the correct sequence of paragraphs. 1b – 2a – 3c Ex 6 Answer the questions with the verbs given below in scrambled order. 1 It drains/filters the oil. 2 a) The purifier suction pump draws the oil from the drain tank. b) Pumps discharge the oil under pressure into the cooler.



heated

heated

riscaldare



included

included

includere

Ex 9 Go back to the diagram of the fuel oil system and try to answer the questions. 1 There are three tanks: one contains diesel oil and two contain heavy oil. 2 Because the engine may be operated either by diesel oil or by heavy oil, by operating the change-over valve. 3 A viscosity regulator controls the oil temperature to maintain the oil viscosity within close limits. Ex 10 Insert the missing participles and complete the description of the fuel oil system of a marine diesel engine. The oil is drawn from the service HO tank in use by pumps and is 1 discharged at low pressure to the fuel oil heater, where the heavy oil is 2 heated. A viscosity regulator is 3 fitted at the heater discharge, which

20

02_KeysExercises.indd 20

25-03-2013 14:49:18

key to unit exercises

controls the temperature of the fuel oil to maintain its viscosity within close limits. Then the oil is 4 sent to the engine fuel pump suctions through a fine strainer. A pressure control valve, fitted on the fuel pump suctions, returns any excess oil either to the heavy oil service tanks or to a balancing tank. A diesel fuel tank is 5 included in the system with its discharge to the primary pump suctions through a change-over valve. By operating this valve the engine may be 6 operated on diesel oil. The diesel oil is 7 pumped from the DO storage tanks, where it is 8 stored, and is sent to a centrifuge for purification. Then it enters the diesel oil service tank. Ex 11 Complete the summary about the fuel oil system. Insert one word in each gap. The oil is 1 drawn 2 from the service tanks by 3 pumps and is discharged into the oil 4 heater. At the heater discharge a 5 viscosity regulator is fitted. This automatically controls the oil 6 temperature to maintain its viscosity within close limits. The oil finally passes through a fine 7 strainer before entering the engine. A 8 pressure 9 control valve is fitted at the engine fuel pump suctions and it returns 10 excess oil to the service oil tanks. Ex 12 Match each valve with its function. a viscosity regulator b pressure control valve c change - over valve Ex 13 Complete the sentences with the missing past participle. 1 The oil is stored in the DO tanks. 2 The oil is heated in the heater. 3 The oil is purified in the centrifuge. 4 The oil is cooled in the cooler. 5 The oil is discharged to the engine fuel pump suctions through a fine strainer. 6 Diesel oil is drawn by pumps from the storage tanks into the diesel oil service tank. Ex 14 Four different operations are described in the last few lines. Can you put them in order? Use the sequence words at first, then, finally. At first, the oil is stored in the DO tanks. Then it is pumped from the DO tanks and it is sent into a centrifuge for purification. Finally, the oil enters the diesel oil service tank.

Project Work First of all, complete the table with the missing information. April 30th, 1907 Spring 1909 Maiden voyage April 10th, 1912 Vessel type Schooner rigged vessel Weight 66,000 tonnes Cost $7.5 million Length 882’ 8” Breadth 92’ 0” Draft 59.5 feet Main engine Parson’s Turbine driving central propeller running at 165 rpm generating 16,000 horse power Reciprocating engines 2 triple* expansion reciprocating engines driving port and starboard propellers running at 75 rpm generating 30,000 horse power Boiler 29 Furnaces 159 Order date Hull laid

* Note there is a spelling mistake in the text.

Now use this information to complete the technical description of Titanic’s Engine Room. You can also take a look at the technical diagram. Titanic’s Engine Room The diagram shows Titanic’s 1 Engine Room. The ship was fitted with a 2 Parson’s LP Turbine engine to drive the 3 central propeller and 2 triple expansion 4 reciprocating engines. 159 coal 5 furnaces heated water to generate steam in the 29 6 boilers. The 7 steam was then funneled to the expansion engines creating the power to turn the two 8 port and starboard wing propellers. If the 9 turbine engine was not being used, for example, when the ship was entering or leaving 10 port, steam was condensed in the two main 11 condensers and then returned to the 12 boilers.

Unit 12 Pumps Ex 1 Read through paragraph 1 and answer the questions. 1 Pumps are hydraulic machines, used to move a liquid or to give it pressure and kinetic energy. 2 Pumps are driven/powered by an engine. 3 We measure the operation of a pump by using two hydraulic measures. One is the pressure head, which indicates the differential pressure or height that the

21

02_KeysExercises.indd 21

25-03-2013 14:49:19

Teacher’s book

pump can give to the liquid. The other is quantity of liquid by litres per second (l/s) that the pump can move. 4 We consider a number of factors (listed below) which concern the type of liquid and the pressure we want to give to the liquid. Ex 2 Take notes while reading the texts in paragraph 2. We shall consider four factors: 1 the liquid’s quantity and pressure; 2 the liquid’s viscosity; 3 if the liquid is corrosive; 4 if it contains solid particles in suspension. Reciprocating pumps: small quantity of liquid high differential pressure low flow rate slow speed high heads uneven delivery

Centrifugal pumps: large volumes of water high flow rate high speed low and medium heads even delivery quiet in operation

Delivery tube Delivery valve Cylinder casing

Suction valve

Ex 4 Read while you listen to the recording and complete the texts with items taken from the diagrams above.

Gear-wheel pump Gear-tooth

Delivery outlet

Interlocking gear-wheels

Suction pipe

Suction tube

Ex 3 Label the pictures with the main parts for each type.

Casing

Casing

Piston

suspension

tube

Vanes

Reciprocating pump

Gear-wheel pumps: viscous liquids low flow of liquid even delivery low differential pressures unsuitable for liquids with solid particles in

Suction

Centrifugal pump Delivery pipe Impeller

Working process of the three types of pump There are three main types of pump currently in use, namely the gear-wheel pump, the centrifugal pump and the reciprocating pump. Gear-wheel pumps consist of interlocking 1 gear-wheels that rotate inside a 2 casing. The liquid enters the 3 suction tube, it becomes entrapped between the gear-teeth and is made to circulate, before being discharged through the delivery outlet. Centrifugal pumps consist of an 4 impeller which rotates at high speed inside a casing. The liquid enters the pump through the central suction pipe and is forced to circulate by the 5 vanes of the impeller. The centrifugal force of the impeller gives the liquid a high velocity. Finally, the liquid

22

02_KeysExercises.indd 22

25-03-2013 14:49:20

key to unit exercises

is expelled through the 6 delivery pipe. Reciprocating pumps consist of a 7 piston moving up and down inside a chamber. When the piston is up, the volume of the pump chamber is increased and a vacuum is formed. The liquid is drawn into this vacuum from the suction tube. Then the piston moves down and the volume of the pump chamber decreases. As the piston moves down, it creates a pressure on the liquid that is forced out through the 8 delivery tube. Reciprocating pumps have non-return 9 suction and delivery valves, and they can be either single-acting or double-acting. The former are fitted with a single pair of valves and the liquid is drawn and discharged by two piston strokes. Double-acting pumps have a double set of valves, and every piston stroke causes the liquid to be moved. Ex 5 Guess! Look at the pictures below. Which of them shows the double acting piston pump? The left one. Ex 6 Find the English synonym for the following expressions in paragraph 4, then note down their Italian meaning. The up or down movement of the piston: a piston stroke (corsa del pistone). To become larger/smaller: to increase/ decrease (aumentare/diminuire). To move up and down in a straight line: to reciprocate (muoversi con moto alternativo). Ex 7 Study the opposites. suitable for unsuitable for slow speed high speed non-return valves return valves even delivery uneven delivery high rates of flow low rates of flow viscous liquid non-viscous liquid to increase to decrease quiet noisy Ex 8 Find the English for the following verbs and expressions. They have all been used in the texts of this unit. Pompare, spostare to pump, to move to drive Azionare Aspirare to draw Trasportare in circolo to carry round, force to circulate è intrappolato it is entrapped suitable for Adatto, indicato per Alte/basse prevalenze high/low heads

Flusso costante/continuo Mandata costante Operazioni silenziose Abbastanza, piuttosto Applicazioni

even flow a steady delivery quiet operations rather, quite

applications

Ex 9 The above passage describe four types of pump, because the screw pump has been added to the list. Write the names of each pump. 1 Centrifugal pump 2 Screw pump 3 Reciprocating/piston pump 4 Gear-wheel pump Ex 10 Now cover the texts and try to answer the following questions. 1 A centrifugal pump 2 A gear-wheel pump 3 A reciprocating pump 4 A screw pump Ex 11 Go back to the texts and use all the information about the different pumps to complete the table.

Centrifugal pumps Type of liquid

They are suitable for water or low viscous liquids and for liquids with solid particles in suspension.

Quantity and pressure of liquid

High rates of flow; high speeds; low or medium heads. They consist of an impeller which rotates at high speed inside a casing.



Description



Working process



The liquid enters through the suction pipes, it is carried round by the vanes of the impeller, which give the liquid kinetic energy, then it is discharged through the delivery outlet.

Advantages/ disadvantages

Small and easy to maintain; quiet in operation; even and fast delivery.

Rotary pumps

Piston pumps

They are suitable for viscous liquids, such as lubricating and fuel oils.

They are suitable for water and low viscous liquids.

Low flow rates; constant delivery; Medium flow rates but high heads. low heads. They consist of interlocking gear wheels that rotate inside a casing.

They consist of a piston moving up and down inside a cylinder casing.

The liquid enters the suction tube and it is made to circulate by the gear wheels. Then it is discharged through the delivery outlet.

When the piston goes up, a vacuum is formed and the liquid is drawn into the pump chamber from the suction tube. As the piston moves down, it creates a pressure on the liquid that is forced out through the delivery tube.



Even and constant delivery; not suitable for liquids with solid particles in suspension.

They provide an uneven delivery and they can be rather noisy, but they also provide high pressures and high heads.

23

02_KeysExercises.indd 23

25-03-2013 14:49:20

Teacher’s book

Project Work 1. On the following web page http://www.marineinsight.com/tech/ auxiliary-machinery/general-overview-oftypes-of-pumps-on-ship/ the writer has classified pumps using a different method from the one indicated in the first paragraph of this unit. Take notes to complete the table and see whether using a different classification method means that the operational characteristics of the various pump types are classified differently. 1 Fluids circulate in ship’s machinery for these purposes: cooling, heating, lubrication, and as fuels. 2 These liquids are circulated by different types of pumps. 3 There are two types of pump used on board: positive displacement pumps and dynamic pressure pumps. 4 Reciprocating, screw and gear pumps are positive displacement pumps. 5 Centrifugal pumps are dynamic pressure pumps. 6 The selection of a type of pump depends on the characteristics of the fluid to be pumped and the characteristics of the system in which this liquid circulates. 7 These (3) characteristics of the fluid are viscosity, density, compressibility. 8 The (4) characteristics of the system are

required rate of fluid, head to which the fluid is to be pumped, temperature and pressure of

the fluid in the system. 9 Positive displacement pumps are used where the discharge rate is small to medium, and the viscosity of the fluid is high. 10 Positive displacement pumps are used to produce high pressure in the pumping system. 11 Dynamic pressure pumps are used for moderate to high discharge rate. 12 Dynamic pumps are used in a system where low viscosity fluids are used.

Unit 13 Boilers Ex 1 Find the four wrong words in paragraph one; then rewrite the text using the correct words which are in scrambled

order. (Here below are the wrong words in the text and the correct ones) 1 secondary auxiliary 2 growing distilling 3 gallery galley 4 cars machinery Ex 2 Answer the questions by reading the text and observing the picture above. 1 Steam is contained in the steam drum. 2 The steam drum is located at the top of the boiler. 3 Water is contained in the water drums. 4 The water drums are located lower down in the boiler. 5 The furnace is placed at the bottom. This allows hot gases to rise. 6 Downcomer tubes are external to the boiler. 7 They provide a supply of relatively cool water. Ex 3 Complete the sentences to describe a boiler and its main parts. a A boiler consists of a fireproof casing which contains a furnace at the bottom, a steam drum at the top, and water drums in the middle part. b The water drums and the steam drum are connected by banks of tubes. c Downcomer tubes are placed outside the gas system. d For this reason they feed the water drums with cool water. Ex 4 Here is another picture and text about boilers. Listen and fill in the gaps. The picture 1 shows a water tube boiler. It has a steam-drum at 2 the top and a water drum below, 3 connected by banks of generating tubes. Other banks of tubes welded together form the 4 waterwalls. The tubes are 5 placed in the main flow of hot gases from the 6 furnace, so their heat is transferred to the water in the tubes. The steam drum provides the space for the separation of steam from the water mixture. The difference in density allows the dry steam to 7 rise and leave from the top of the drum. Returning water enters the water drums through 8 downcomer tubes which are unheated and placed 9 outside the gas stream. They

24

02_KeysExercises.indd 24

25-03-2013 14:49:20

key to unit exercises

provide a reservoir of relatively 10 cool water, so that 11 convection currents are set up which cause the water to 12 circulate round the system. The economisers heat the feed-water 13 before it enters the boiler. Superheaters, located 14 between the banks of tubes, reheat the saturated steam to make it 15 drier and more efficient. Ex 5 There is a “logical” mistake in each of the following sentences. Find the mistakes and correct them. (Here below are the wrong words in the text and the correct ones) 1 The cool hot gases generated in the furnace tend to rise. 2 The gases from the furnace flow around the water drums and tubes so that the water they contain becomes very cold hot. 3 Steam rises along the tubes and to the top of the steam drum because it is heavier lighter than water. 4 Downcomer tubes are placed in the middle of outside the stream of hot gases so that the water they contain keeps cool. 5 Convection currents are caused by cool water which moves up goes down and hot water which goes down moves up. 6 The water is made to circulate round the system by a constant supply of hot cool/ cold returning water which enters the system through the downcomer tubes. 7 Economisers heat the feed-water after before it enters the boiler. 8 Superheaters are used to make steam cooler drier. Ex 6 Describe the working process in a water tube boiler. Follow the sentences below. 1 When a fuel is burned in the furnace, hot gases are produced. 2 The hot gases rise from the bottom of the boiler and transfer their heat to the water in the drums and tubes. 3 As the water gets very hot, it produces steam. 4 The steam generated collects at the top of the boiler in the steam drum. 5 Convection currents make the water move around the system. 6 These are caused by a constant supply of cool water which enters the drums through the downcomer tubes.

7 Steam finally leaves the boiler through the steam outlet. Ex 7 Now cover the texts and check what you remember by answering the following questions. 1 Boilers are used for producing steam, either for driving steam turbines or for driving auxiliary machinery. Steam is also used for auxiliary services like the galley and laundry. 2 The furnace is located at the bottom since the hot gases tend to rise. 3 In a water-tube boiler, water is contained in the water drums and in the banks of tubes. 4 The hot gases flow around the water drums and the water-filled tubes. 5 Downcomer tubes are located outside the main stream of hot gases from the furnace. 6 They supply the system with a constant flow of cooler water. As this cooler water continuously enters the drums, it makes the hot water in the tubes rise. In this way, convection currents are generated making the water move around the system. 7 The economiser pre-heats the feed-water before it enters the boiler. 8 Superheaters are used for making the steam drier and more efficient. Ex 8 Match each valve with its function. 1e, 2c, 3f, 4g, 5b, 6h, 7a, 8d Ex 9 Identify the valves and gauges in the diagram. A Safety valves B Main stop valve C Auxiliary stop valve D Donkey feed check valve E Main feed check valve F Pressure gauge G Water-level indicator H Surface blow-off I Bottom blow-off L Salinometer Ex 11 Which is correct, a or b? Choose the correct option. 1a, 2b, 3a, 4a, 5b, 6b, 7a, 8b Ex 12 The table indicates the main working characteristics of a water tube boiler with a steam-superheater and pre-heated air. If you want to dictate the table data yourself, tell the Ss to use the blank table in each student’s book. If you want your students to ask each other questions to complete their tables, photocopy the tables for Student A & B.

25

02_KeysExercises.indd 25

25-03-2013 14:49:20

Teacher’s book

34,000 450°C 41 bar 115°C 154°C

STUDENT B 1 Steam generated (kg/h)

Heating surface

10 Air pre-heater

3.2% 27% 38% 7% 24.8%

11 Furnace volume

40 m3

12 Radiant surface

46.5 m2

1 Steam generated (kg/h) 2 Steam temperature 3 Steam pressure 4 Feed-water temperature 5 Exhaust gas temperature Heating surface 6 Waterwalls 7 Generating tubes 8 Economiser 9 Superheater

Questions: a How much steam is generated? b What is the steam temperature? c What is the steam pressure? d What is the feed-water temperature? e What is the exhaust gas temperature? f What is the percentage of heat provided by the waterwalls? g What is the percentage of heat provided by the generating tubes? h What percentage of heat is provided by the economiser? i What percentage of heat is provided by the superheater? j What percentage of heat is provided by the air pre-heater? Tables for Ss working in pairs. STUDENT A 1 Steam generated (kg/h)

...................

2 Steam temperature

...................

3 Steam pressure

...................

4 Feed-water temperature

...................

5 Exhaust gas temperature

...................

Heating surface

10 Air pre-heater

3.2% 27% 38% 7% 24.8%

11 Furnace volume

40 m3

12 Radiant surface

46.5 m2

6 Waterwalls 7 Generating tubes 8 Economiser 9 Superheater

2 Steam temperature 3 Steam pressure 4 Feed-water temperature 5 Exhaust gas temperature

34,000 450°C 41 bar 115°C 154°C

6 Waterwalls

...................

7 Generating tubes

...................

8 Economiser

...................

9 Superheater

...................

10 Air pre-heater

...................

11 Furnace volume

40 m3

12 Radiant surface

46.5 m2

Project Work a. Answer the questions. 1 Audible and visual alarms indicate that there is a problem. 2 The boiler is in the low water level condition. b. See what you should do in case the boiler blows steam, but no water is shown in the water gauges. 1 First, you should immediately stop the burners and isolate the boiler from the steam supply system. 2 Next, you should switch off the feed pumps. 3 Then, you should turn off the feed water valve. 4 Next, you should turn off the fuel supply valve. 5 Then/Now, you should wait for the slow cool down. 6 When the boiler has cooled down, you should check if there is any damage to furnace, internal structure and other parts of the boiler. 7 Check for any eventual malfunctioning (tripping) of fuel supply valve as it should cut

the supply of fuel oil when water level reaches low level.

8 After the problem is fixed, boiler could be put back to service. c. Translate the passage “How to start up the boiler?”. Come avviare la caldaia? Prima controllare che le valvole di sicurezza, sfiato aria, tombino, valvola di vapore, pompa dell’acqua di alimentazione, termometro e

26

02_KeysExercises.indd 26

25-03-2013 14:49:21

key to unit exercises

manometro, indicatore di livello dell’acqua siano in buone condizioni. Se sono tutti in ordine, aprire la valvola di sfiato. Poi controllare il sistema di olio combustibile e far circolare l’olio combustibile con il riscaldatore per riscaldarlo alla temperatura e viscosità richieste. Quindi azionare il soffiatore per eliminare dall’area di combustione qualsiasi accumulo di gas esplosivo. Mettere l’uscita di fiamma in posizione bassa e aprire la valvola del carburante all’ugello dello spruzzatore. Quindi premere gli interruttori di accensione. Se il combustibile non si accende, chiudere la valvola del carburante e ripetere la procedura. Per evitare lo stress termico, la temperatura deve essere sollevata lentamente. Inoltre, in modo da consentire la fuoriuscita dell’aria dal sistema, la presa d’aria deve essere tenuta aperta. Quando la pressione cresce, si dovrebbe chiudere la presa d’aria e girare l’uscita di fiamma in posizione alta. Una volta che la pressione di servizio è raggiunta, la valvola del vapore deve essere aperta lentamente. Se necessario, aprire con attenzione la valvola del vapore al serbatoio dell’olio, per evitare colpi d’ariete.

Unit 14 Condensers & evaporators Ex 1 Read the paragraph and label the condensers parts. 1 Bank of tubes 2 Front tube sheet 3 Rear tube sheet 4 Front water end 5 Rear water end 6 Steam inlet 7 Hot well 8 Air ejector 9 Condensate pump 10 Circulating water inlet 11 Circulating pump 12 Circulating water outlet Ex 2 Answer the questions. 1 It is made up of closely spaced thin tubes. 2 A tube sheet. 3 The front water end and the rear water end. 4 The steam inlet is located at the top of the condenser. 5 The hot well is at the bottom of the condenser. 6 The air ejector removes any air from the condenser.

7 The condensate pump removes the condensate from the hot well and sends it into the boiler. 8 It is fitted at the water inlet. It draws water from the sea. Ex 3 What happens in a condenser? Complete the description with words taken from the labelled diagram. Seawater is drawn into the condenser by a 1 circulating pump and is sent into the front water end through the 2 circulating water inlet. The cooling seawater passes through the 3 bank of tubes and reaches the rear water end. From the rear water end, the seawater is directed to the top half of the front water end. Here the cooling water is discharged overboard through the 4 circulating water outlet. Exhaust steam enters the condenser through the 5 steam inlet and comes into contact with the surface of the 6 bank of tubes, where the cooling water is flowing. Steam condenses and drops down into the 7 hot well. A 8 condensate pump removes the condensate and sends it into the boiler as feed-water. Ex 4 Listen to the recording and complete the passage. How condensers operate Condensers contain thousands of thin copper-nickel alloy 1 tubes, usually of a diameter of 3.5 mm. The tubes expand at both ends into tube 2 sheets, which guarantee a separation between the two 3 circuits involved in the condensation of steam, namely the cooling water circuit and the condensate circuit. Since there is no 4 contact between the condensate and the coolant during the 5 condensation process, the condenser produces pure 6 distilled water, which is perfect for use as boiler feed-water. This is how the two circuits operate. In the cooling water circuit, a circulating pump sends a steady 7 flow of seawater into the banks of tubes. Before entering the tubes, the seawater is 8 filtered by a series of strainers. The circulating pump is fed by a sea-chest valve, and a standby pump is 9 fitted in case the main pump breaks down. A cross-connection valve between the 10 two pumps allows them to be operated at the same time.

27

02_KeysExercises.indd 27

25-03-2013 14:49:21

Teacher’s book

In the condensate circuit, as the steady flow of seawater passes through the 11 bank of tubes, the exhaust steam entering from the steam inlet 12 condenses on contact with the cool surface of the tubes. Condensed steam – called “the 13 condensate” – then falls into the hot well. A condensate pump removes the condensate from the hot 14 well and sends it into the boiler as feed-water. The condenser is constantly kept under vacuum, since any 15 air entering the system with the exhaust steam is drawn off by an air 16 ejector, which is fitted above the hot well. Condensers must be regularly inspected for leakage and are fitted with protective anodes against corrosion. Ex 5 Answer the questions. 1 The condenser tubes are made of a copper-nickel alloy. 2 The cooling water circuit and the condensate circuit. 3 The two circuits are kept separate. 4 A condenser produces pure distilled water. 5 The seawater flows through the bank of tubes. 6 Seawater is sent into the condenser by a circulating pump. 7 Seawater is filtered by strainers before entering the condenser tubes. 8 There are a main circulating pump and a stand-by pump, in case the main pump breaks down. 9 By opening a cross-connection valve. 10 The exhaust steam condenses on contact with the cool surface of the tubes. 11 The condensate collects in the hot well. 12 The condensate is finally sent into a boiler as boiler feed-water. 13 Condensers are constantly inspected for leakage. 14 Protective anodes are used to protect condensers against corrosion. Ex 6 How are the components of a condenser arranged in the two circuits? Complete the sequence in the table. Cooling water circuit

Condensate circuit

Sea-chest valve Strainers

Steam inlet

Circulating pump Seawater inlet

Bank of tubes Seawater outlet

Tubes surface

Air ejector Hot well

Condensate pump

Ex 7 Looking at the table in Ex. 6, talk about the condenser components with your partner and say what they do, or what happens there. Follow the example: Ex: What’s the function of a sea-chest valve? It controls the entry of seawater into the condenser. 1 What’s the function of strainers? Strainers filter the seawater before it enters the condenser tubes. 2 What’s the function of the circulating pump? The circulating pump sends a steady flow of seawater into the tubes. 3 What’s the function of the seawater inlet? The seawater enters the condenser through the seawater inlet. 4 What’s the function of the bank of tubes? The bank of tubes is the cooling surface of a condenser. The cooling water flows in the bank of tubes. 5 What’s the function of the seawater outlet? Seawater is discharged overboard through the seawater outlet. 6 What’s the function of the steam inlet? Exhaust steam enters the condenser through the steam inlet. 7 What’s the function of the air ejector? The air ejector draws off any air from the condenser. 8 What’s the function of the hot well? The condensate collects in the hot well. 9 What’s the function of the condensate pump? The condensate pump draws the condensate from the hot well and sends it into the boiler as boiler feed-water. Ex 8 Complete the text with the missing prepositions and relative pronouns. A condenser converts exhaust steam into boiler feed-water. The main parts 1 of a condenser are the following ones. The bank of tubes, in 2 which the cooling water flows; the hot well, 3 where the condensate collects; the circulating pump, 4 which draws the cooling water 5 from the sea; the condensate pump, 6 which sends the condensate 7 into the boiler. A condenser is also fitted 8 with a valve, which regulates the entry 9 of seawater 10 into the bank of tubes, and 11 with an air ejector or vacuum pump, which draws 12 off the air and keeps the condenser 13 under a vacuum. There are two

28

02_KeysExercises.indd 28

25-03-2013 14:49:21

key to unit exercises

separate circuits 14 in a condenser: the cooling water circuit and the condensate circuit. Ex 10 Study the condenser form with your partner and find the following information. 1 It is a surface-cooling, single flow condenser. 2 The condenser surface is 3,400 m2. 3 Its working pressure is 45,000 Ps (Pascals). 4 13,600 m3 per hour. 5 Two vacuum pumps are installed. 6 They extract 14.0 kg per hour. 7 The vacuum pumps are driven by an electric motor. 8 The power of the driving motor is 22 kW. Ex 11 Now complete the sentences referring to condensers and evaporators using used to or is/are used to. One sentence is in the negative form! 1 Condensers 1 used to be essential parts of steam turbines. 2 Nowadays, steam turbines 2 are not used as the main engine on board ship. 3 Until the 1980s, steam turbines 3 were used to drive the main propeller. 4 Steam turbines 4 are still used to drive oil cargo pumps on oil tankers. 5 Today, condensers 5 are used to condense refrigerant gases in air condition systems. 6 A condensers 6 is used to condense vapour through heat rejection. 7 An evaporator 7 is used to evaporate liquids through heat extraction. 8 Nowadays, condensers and evaporators 8 are used in freshwater generating systems. Ex 12 Mark the following statements as True or False and correct the false ones. 1T–2F–3F–4T–5T–6F–7F–8T 2 Fresh water is an essential necessity on board ship. 3 Fresh water is generated by a distillation process. 6 Water boils at a lower temperature in a freshwater generator. 7 Air ejectors are used to reduce the pressure in the evaporation chamber. Project Work Complete the table with the missing information.

Ship’s full name Type of ship In the winter the QM2 In the summer the QM2



QUEEN MARY 2 Luxury cruise liner cruises in the Southern Hemisphere. crosses the Atlantic between Southampton and New York.

2,600 1,500 Swimming pools 3 With no freshwater system, 6 days

Number of passengers Crew size

water would be finished in Number of evaporators Capacity Decline in production is caused by Scale reduces

6 3,000 litres/hour scale (calcare). heat transfer, causing efficiency and production to drop.

Unit 15 The steam engine plant Ex 1 Answer the questions. 1 The engine is an energy converter. 2 They convert other types of energy into useful work. 3 The electric motor and the heat engine are the two types of engine we use every day. 4 Electric motors convert electricity into work. 5 Heat engines transform heat or thermal energy into mechanical work. 6 The source of thermal energy absorbed and converted by heat engines is a working fluid. 7 The working fluid in a steam engine plant is steam. 8 In a steam engine plant, steam follows a closed cycle. This means that steam changes its physical state (from water into steam) but its quantity and chemical characteristics do not change. Ex 2 In a steam engine plant, steam operates as the working fluid and follows the cycle that is described in the paragraphs below. Read the following paragraphs and arrange them in the correct sequence. Then listen to the recording and check. The steam cycle in a steam engine plant In a steam plant system, there are four basic stages of steam operation: generation, expansion, condensation and feed. The steam cycle begins in boilers, which are steam-generating apparatus.

29

02_KeysExercises.indd 29

25-03-2013 14:49:21

Teacher’s book

Boilers contain banks of steel tubes filled with water, and arranged so that the heat from the furnaces passes over them. In the furnaces, fuel oil is sprayed under high pressure and it burns with intense heat, changing the water in the tubes into steam. The generated steam passes to the turbine through the main steam pipe, for the second stage of the steam cycle. Steam expansion takes place in the turbine. It is here that the heat energy of steam is converted into mechanical work. The main part of a turbine engine is a revolving rotor mounted with a series of alternating rows of static and moving blades. As steam passes through the blades and expands, each row deflects the steam flow on to the following one. These engines have a high pressure (HP) and low pressure stage (LP). After steam has passed through both stages, it goes to the condenser for the next stage. In the condenser, exhaust steam is cooled and condensed back into water. A condensate pump draws the condensate from the condenser and sends it into a deaerating tank known as the hot well. The final stage of the process is the feed stage. The condensate that collects in the hot well is pumped back to the boiler by a feed pump and is known as feed-water. Ex 3 Answer the questions. 1 The basic steps in steam operation are steam generation, expansion, condensation and feed. 2 The cycle begins in a boiler, because a boiler generates steam. 3 After leaving the boiler, steam passes into the turbine. 4 In the turbine, steam expands as it passes through the turbine blades. 5 In the condenser, exhaust steam condenses into water again. 6 The condensate finally goes into the boiler as boiler feed-water. Ex 4 Label the blocks that represent the main components of a marine steam engine plant.

Boiler

Steam turbine

Condenser

Hot well

Ex 5 Work with your partner and, using the diagram, describe the sequence of steam operation in the system using the sequencers first, then, next, after that, finally. After that, write your sentences as a key to the diagram. Here is an example: First, steam is generated in a boiler. Then it goes into the turbine, where it expands though the turbine blades. Next the exhaust steam is condensed back into water in a condenser. It is finally sent back into the boiler, as boiler feed-water. Ex 8 Complete the sentences by using a derived noun or one of the verbs in Ex. 7 in the appropriate form. Note that some of the sentences need the passive form. 1 The apparatus that increases or decreases electric voltage is called a transformer. 2 The engine is an energy converter. 3 An internal combustion engine converts chemical energy into mechanical energy. 4 Liquids become less dense, when they are heated. 5 Water turns into steam when it reaches boiling point. 6 The up and down motion of a piston is transformed into a rotary motion by a connecting rod. 7 Ice turns back into water when it is heated. 8 A solar panel converts the energy of the Sun into electricity. Ex 9 Select the appropriate verb form to fill in the gaps. Transformations of heat energy in the system A steam engine plant 1 converts heat into mechanical work by 2 transforming the

30

02_KeysExercises.indd 30

25-03-2013 14:49:22

key to unit exercises

heat energy of steam, which operates in the system as the working fluid. First, water receives heat energy from a heating source and 3 changes into steam, then some of the heat energy of the fluid is 4 converted into useful work in the turbine. Finally, the remaining heat that cannot be 5 transformed into work, is absorbed by a cooling source, and steam 6 is turned into water again. The main parts of the system are the boiler, the main engine and the condenser. Ex 10 So far you have found some unusual expressions in the texts. Have you understood their meaning? Complete the definitions. The first and last one have been done for you. The fluid/the working fluid here is steam. A heating source refers to the boiler (the heat from the furnace). The condenser is called a cooling source. Thermal energy is the same as heat/heat energy. Mechanical energy is synonymous with mechanical work/useful work. Ex 11 Choose the correct option. 1c, 2b, 3b, 4a, 5c Ex 12 Study the diagram of a steam engine plant and identify the following components. 1 A hot well 2 B economiser 3 C boiler 4 E steam tank 5 V1 main stop valve 6 V3 seawater valve 7 F turbine 8 G condenser 9 P1 main circulating pump 10 P2 condensate pump 11 P3 feed pump 12 V4 donkey stop valve (for auxiliary duties) Ex 13 Read and complete the description of the plant, then listen to the recording and check. Sequence of operations in a steam engine plant A feed pump 1 draws the water from the hot well and 2 sends it into the economiser. In the economiser, the feedwater receives the 3 heat of the exhaust gases that come from the boiler furnace, and 4 becomes hotter. The hot water is

then 5 sent into a steam tank, placed above the boiler. In the boiler, the water is converted into steam. The steam 6 generated in the boiler is sent into a super-heater, which makes steam dryer and more efficient. After that, steam enters the turbine 7 through a main steam-pipe. A number of valves are 8 fitted on the pipeline. There are stop valves, which control the 9 passage of steam to the engine or to auxiliary machinery, and a feed check valve, which 10 controls the final entry of steam into the turbine. In the turbine, steam 11 expands as it pushes the rotor blades. The blades start rotating and transmit 12 their rotary motion to the shaft. From the turbine shaft, the rotary motion is transmitted to the ship’s 13 propeller by a line of shaft assemblies and reduction gears. Then, exhaust steam goes into the condenser, where it condenses back into water, 14 because it gives some of its heat to the cooling water that flows through the condenser tubes. A condensate pump draws the 15 condensate from the condenser and sends it into the hot well. Here the steam cycle starts 16 again. Ex 14 Now answer the questions without looking at the texts. 1 A steam engine plant is used for producing mechanical energy for driving auxiliary machinery. 2 The main components of the plant are boilers, steam turbines and condensers. 3 Steam is the working fluid because its heat energy is transformed into mechanical energy by the turbine. 4 The basic stages of steam operation are steam generation, expansion, condensation and feed. 5 A boiler generates steam. 6 In a boiler, water is converted into steam because it receives the heat of the exhaust gases from the furnace. 7 The main part of a steam turbine engine is a revolving rotor, which carries many rows of rotating blades. 8 As it passes through the turbine, steam expands and makes the rotor blades move. 9 The main component of a condenser is a cooling surface made up of banks of tubes, which contain cool seawater.

31

02_KeysExercises.indd 31

25-03-2013 14:49:22

Teacher’s book

10 In a condenser, steam condenses back into water because it gives some of its heat to the seawater flowing through the condenser tubes. 11 A stop valve controls the passage of steam to the engine or to auxiliary machinery. 12 Feed check valves control the final entry of steam into the engine. Project Work The cartoon was made in 1928 Fact by Walt Disney and is considered the debut of Mickey Mouse.

Unit 16 Nautical charts Ex 1 Answer the questions. 1 Yes, they did. Babylonian, Egyptian and Greek mariners probably used nautical charts 2 Ptolemy was the greatest map-maker of ancient times. 3 Columbus used the Ptolemaic Chart in 1492. 4 Mercator lived in the 16th century. 5 A navigator uses a working chart to plot the ship’s course and current position. Ex 2 Read paragraph 2 and label the pictures with the following terms. 1 great circle: Equator 2 small circle: parallel 3 great circle 4 small circle 5 great circle: meridian 6 small circle Ex 3 Complete the description of the picture in paragraph 3 with the missing words. The picture shows the two possible 1 routes between the points A and B on the Earth’s surface. You can see that the blue great circle 2 track is an arc of a 3 great circle which passes through the 4 centre of the Earth, while the red 5 rhumb line is represented as the arc of a 6 spiral. The 7 easiest route to follow is the rhumb line, because it keeps a constant 8 angle, while the 9 shortest route is the great circle track, because it joins two points with a 10 minimum distance. Therefore, 11 rhumb lines are the best

choice for short crossings, and 12 great circle tracks are preferred for ocean crossings. Ex 4 Insert the correct term corresponding to each definition. 1 rhumb line 2 great circle track 3 great circle 4 small circle 5 rhumb line 6 rhumb line 7 great circle track 8 great circle track Ex 5 Now underline the correct alternative. 1 Since geographical maps and nautical charts are flat representations of the Earth’s spherical surface, they can only represent the Earth’s surface with some distortions. 2 Maps and charts are reduced representations of more or less extended areas of the Earth’s surface. 3 The chart scale indicates how many times the Earth’s surface has been reduced to be represented on the chart. 4 A scale of 1:800,000 can represent a more extended area of the Earth’s surface than a scale of 1:80,000 on the same size chart. 5 Projection is the technique used for drawing up maps and charts. Ex 6 Complete the text with the missing words. 1 Projection is the technique used for drawing up geographical maps and nautical charts. Only two projection methods are widely used for 2 nautical charts: the Mercator projection and the 3 gnomonic projection. Mercator lived in the 16th century and was a pioneer in the world of map-making, since he made use of mathematical 4 calculations to draw up his charts. He imagined the Earth as being inside a 5 cylinder and projected the surface of the Earth onto it. Parallels and meridians are represented as 6 straight lines which form constant 7 right angles where they intersect. Meridians are equally spaced out, while 8 parallels move farther apart as we move away from the 9 Equator to the poles. A mathematical 10 constant is used to work out this ever-increasing distance.

32

02_KeysExercises.indd 32

25-03-2013 14:49:22

key to unit exercises

The viewpoint of a gnomonic chart is the 11 centre of the Earth. On this chart, parallels and meridians are projected outwards onto a plane 12 tangent to a point on the Earth’s surface. Nautical charts also indicate particular features of the coast and 13 sea and they are an essential 14 aid to navigation. Ex 7 Answer the questions. 1 No, no single projection method preserves all the wanted properties. 2 Rhumb lines are plotted as straight lines; angles are presented correctly; for small areas, the true shape of features is maintained. 3 A chart is “conformal” when angles are presented correctly. 4 When using a Mercator chart, you can easily work out position, distance and direction. 5 Rhumb lines can be plotted as a straight line. 6 On a gnomonic chart, a straight line represents the best circle route. 7 A gnomonic chart is useful to the navigator for plotting the best circle route. 8 The best working chart for the routine plotting of navigational data is the Mercator chart. Ex 8 Compare the two types of nautical charts by completing the table. Mercator chart Projection from the centre of the Earth onto a cylinder.

Great circle tracks result as curved lines. Rhumb lines result as straight lines.

Mostly used for plotting the track during navigation. Gnomonic chart

Projection from the centre of the Earth on a tangent plane. Great circle tracks result as straight lines. Rhumb lines result as curved lines. Used for identifying the best great circle track between two points. Ex 9 Mark the following statements as True or False and correct the false ones. 1F–2T–3F–4T–5F–6F 1 Nautical charts also include information about the coastline, prominent features, buoys and traffic separation schemes.

3 The NOAA produces the charts in the USA. 5 Channel features are represented on large-scale charts. 6 Small-scale charts are used to represent large areas like ocean basins. Ex 10 Match each term with its definition. 1d, 2f, 3h, 4g, 5b, 6e, 7c, 8a Project Work 2. Now go to the glossary page on the same site and find the requested information. 1 Lights, buoys, day marks, and fog signals. 2 They mark channels and warn mariners of dangers such as rocks, wrecks, and obstructions. 3 The U.S. Coast Guard takes care of the aids to navigation along the coasts of the United States. 4 A nautical chart shows where the aids to navigation (lights, buoys, day marks) are, and where the dangers (rocks, shallow spots, wrecks, reefs) are. 5 It is a weekly publication by the U.S. Coast Guard which tells mariners about important changes to their nautical charts. 6 The ship star is also known as the “Pole Star.” The sailor’s name for Polaris, the North Star. This star is important for ocean navigation. 7 A shoal is a place where the water is shallow enough to be dangerous to ships. 8 Sailors stand the watch on the ship’s deck to watch for danger (rocky shoals, enemy ships, storms or shipwrecks). 9 It is the rise and fall of sea level due to the pull of the moon on the water. 10 In some places in the United States, tides may be as high as 20 feet. 3. Now go to this site which shows how to read markers – or buoys – on a chart. Complete the following table, but remember that in North and South America they use the IALA System B for lateral marks, and this is why the red and green colours are inverted. The shapes of

33

02_KeysExercises.indd 33

25-03-2013 14:49:22

Teacher’s book

the topmarks are inverted, too (nun=cone). Letters and numbers on buoy 1 RW “G” 2 G “1” Fl G 4 secs 3 RN “2” 4 GC “3” 5 RGN “C” Description 1 Red and White striped marker with letter “G” 2 Green marker with number 1 and flashing a green light every 4 seconds 3 Red Nun buoy with number “2” 4 Green Can buoy with number “3” 5 Red and Green Nun buoy with letter “C” Type of buoy 1 Safe water marker 2 Light marker 3 Starboard marker IALA System B 4 Port marker IALA System B 5 Junction marker

Unit 17 Piloting & plotting Ex 1 Answer the questions. 1 Coastal navigation is also known as piloting. 2 Landmarks are easily recognizable objects along the coastline such as a lighthouse, a church or a tower. 3 Landmarks are always indicated – often with a specific symbol – on nautical charts. 4 It means line of position. Ex 2 Fill in the gaps; one has already been done to help you. When we navigate near the coast, we make use of 1 landmarks along the shoreline to work out our 2 position. For example, we use 3 lighthouses, 4 churches or towers to take a 5 bearing. A bearing will tell us our ship’s 6 position relative to the landmark. We draw a 7 line of position on the 8 chart for each bearing. Ex 3 Answer the questions. 1 When we are taking a bearing we are actually measuring the angle between

North and our landmark, as this angle is seen from our ship. 2 We call it a compass bearing. 3 We need to apply corrections for both variation and deviation. 4 The magnetic variation is indicated on the nautical chart of the area and can be either east or west. 5 If the variation is to the East, it has a positive algebraic sign (+) and we add it to our compass reading; if the variation is to the West, it has a negative algebraic sign (–) and we subtract it from the compass reading. 6 Ships are mostly made of metals which interfere with the ship’s compass. These metals cause a deviation of the compass magnetic needle. The magnetic deviation is specific for each ship and needs to be corrected by expert technicians, who report the corrections on a ship’s own compass deviation tables. (See Unit 8, paragraph 2) Ex 4 Study the picture in paragraph 2 and decide whether the magnetic variation has a positive or negative sign. Then apply the correction rule using the correction values in the table below and work out the ship’s true courses. Compass courses Compass bearing of oil rig: 44° E Compass heading course: 324° Magnetic variation: +/– 3°

324°

N

44°

True courses LOP: 50° (44° cc + 3° var + 3° dev = 50° tc) True course: 330° (224° cc + 3° var + 3° dev = 330° tc) Magnetic deviation: +3

34

02_KeysExercises.indd 34

25-03-2013 14:49:22

key to unit exercises

330°

is the most accurate and easiest bearing to 6 take. The ship is on the line which 7 joins the two objects.

N

50°

Ex 5 Answer the questions. 1 We choose a high landmark, such as a lighthouse or church tower. 2 The height of these landmarks is indicated on the nautical chart. 3 We use the following formula: d = (2h) : a, where d is the distance in nautical miles, h is the height in metres of the landmark and a is the angle found by the sextant in minutes of an arc. 4 We can draw a circular LOP on the nautical chart. 5 Next we can take a compass bearing and get a line of position that will cross the circular LOP at some point, giving our exact position or fix. 6 This method is called by bearing and distance. Ex 6 Imagine you are piloting along the island of Asinara, in the north-west of Sardinia, and you are now close to Punta Scorno Lighthouse, which you know is 80 metres above sea-level. If your sextant reading is 2°.15’, what is your distance from the lighthouse? Apply the formula in paragraph 3 and find out. For sextant reading 2°.15’ (two degrees point fifteen minutes) the distance should be 1.1 nautical miles. Explain Ss that they divide the result by 1,852 to convert the distance from metres to nautical miles. Ex 7 Fill in the gaps. When we have two or three 1 bearings from two or three landmarks we can determine our position 2 fix. Our ship is at the point where two 3 LOPs cross or inside the 4 triangle formed by three LOPs. If two landmarks are on the same line, we say that they give a 5 range (bearing). This

Ex 8 Answer the questions. 1 It means to mark the position of something on a diagram by connecting points. 2 On the horizontal edges of a Mercator chart. 3 The vertical edges of the chart show the latitude scale. 4 We measure the distance in miles on the latitude scale, where each minute of latitude corresponds to one nautical mile. 5 A compass rose is used to measure directions using true or magnetic bearings. 6 Magnetic bearings are referred to the inner circle of the compass rose. 7 It is printed with annual change in the centre of the compass rose. 8 To plot on a Mercator chart we need a pencil, rubber or eraser, a pair of dividers and nautical triangles or a parallel ruler. Ex 9 These are the steps followed in paragraph 7a. Try to put them in the right order. 1a, 2g, 3e, 4d, 5h, 6c, 7f, 8b Ex 10 Complete the summary for paragraph 7b with the missing words. We need 1 another LOP to fix our position, so we take a bearing on a 2 second buoy. Our compass reading is 3 45°. So we find 45° 4 magnetic on the compass rose and, using the parallel ruler, 5 draw another line starting at the 6 second buoy until it crosses our 7 first LOP. The point where the two lines 8 cross is our fix. We label the fix with a 9 circle and write the time. We use 10 24 hours time on the chart to avoid confusion between am and pm. Ex 11 Answer questions 1-5 about paragraphs 7c, and questions 6-10 about paragraph 7d. 1 It starts at our fix and ends at the channel buoys. 2 The course is plotted as a straight line that runs from our fix to the buoys. 3 At the centre of the compass rose. 4 Here a parallel ruler is used. An edge of the parallel ruler is placed on the course line, the other edge or arm is made to walk over to the centre of the compass

35

02_KeysExercises.indd 35

25-03-2013 14:49:23

Teacher’s book

rose, so that the magnetic heading of the course line can be read. 5 The capital M above the course line indicates that it is degrees magnetic. 6 To take the length of the course line we use the dividers. 7 To the latitude scale of the chart, to find the length in nautical miles. 8 Because on the latitude scale each minute of latitude corresponds to one nautical mile. 9 It is 1.9 nautical miles long. 10 Under the course line. Ex 12 Try to sequence the steps for obtaining and plotting a running fix. 1g, 2d, 3f, 4a, 5h, 6b, 7e, 8c Ex 13 Make up the correct sequence of actions performed to measure the course angle with a couple of nautical triangles. Notice that here you have to measure the angle on the meridian and not on the compass rose. 1d, 2b, 3a, 4e, 5c Project Work 1. Watch & listen to the video at least three times, until you find all the requested information. 1 Course 080°. Speed 8.0 knots per hour. 2 Alpha Rock. 3 At 0900 (zero nine hundred). 4 The first compass bearing is 045°. 5 At 0930. 6 The second bearing is 015°. 7 First you need to convert the compass bearings into true bearings. 8 D = S x T /60 (D is equal to S times T divided by sixty). 9 You already know the ship’s speed – 8 miles per hour – and the time interval between the two bearings – 30 minutes. 10 The vessel has sailed 4 nautical miles in 30 minutes. 11 We measure the distance on the latitude scale, on the nearest vertical edge of the chart. We use the dividers to do that. 12 Next we use the dividers to transfer the length of 4 nautical miles on the chart, placing one leg of the dividers on the 0900 LOP and the other leg on the course line. 13 Our running fix position is where the “advanced” 0900 LOP crosses the course line.

14 A running fix is labeled RF(ix) with the time alongside. 2. Now follow the script while you listen to the video again, for another three times at least, until you can easily understand what the speaker says. This is how we plot a running fix position. Assuming the course is 080° (zero eighty degrees) and the speed is 8.0 (eight knots) so eight nautical miles per hour, we take a bearing of 045°on Alpha Rock at 0900 (zero nine hundred). Now convert the compass bearings to true bearings and we plot it on the chart. After 30 minutes, we take a new bearing on the same rock that reads 015° (zero fifteen degrees). Now convert the compass bearings to true bearings and plot it on the chart along with the new time, 0930 (zero nine-thirty). Knowing the speed, the next step is to determine the distance that the vessel sailed from 0900 to 0930. For that we use the formula D = S x T /60 (D is equal to S times T divided by sixty), where D is the distance in nautical miles, S is the boat speed, and T is the time in minutes. In our case 8 knots x (times) 30 minutes divided by sixty equals 4 nautical miles. (8 knots x 30 min /60 = 4 NM). Using the dividers, we span* a distance of 4 miles on the latitude scale which is closest to the course line and which runs along the sides of the chart. We apply this span* on our course, placing one leg of the dividers on the 0900 LOP intercepting the course and the other leg on the course line. (We mark the point of interception with a blue pencil). Using the parallel ruler, we transfer the 0900 LOP to the blue mark. As we notice, the two LOPs intercept at the point RF. This is our running fix position.

*to span or to spread, span or spread (the nouns) 3. Ask your navigation teacher to give you a suitable nautical chart on which you can take two or three bearings to fix your ship’s position and plan the first leg of your course to a given destination. You should plot the chart with LOPs, fix position and course. Then write the description – in English – of your procedure. You can work in pairs, if you prefer.

36

02_KeysExercises.indd 36

25-03-2013 14:49:23

key to unit exercises

Unit 18 Business logistics Ex 1 Find the English expressions for the following terms in the passage. 1 Beni di consumo 2 Consumare 3 Produrre 4 Immagazzinamento 5 Acquisire 6 Efficienza di produzione 7 Tenore di vita 8 Fonti di produzione

goods/commodities to consume to produce storage to acquire production efficiency standard of living sources of production

Ex 2 Complete the following diagram with the missing words. Early peoples and small african villages

3 Separately. 4 Coordinated management. 5 Because products are made available exactly when and where they are needed. 6 1961. 7 Council of Logistics Management. 8 Point of origin and point of consumption. 9 No, it also deals with services. 10 Because it includes all the activities in transportation and supply. Ex 5 What is the aim of SCM/integrated logistics management? Put the following phrases in the correct order to complete the definition. SCM aims to get the right goods or services to

the right place, at the right time, and in the desired condition, while making the greatest contribution to the firm.

produce and acquire goods close to home

Ex 6 Refer to the diagram and the text and reorder the steps in the Customer Service Loop.

consume in the

move

same area

goods

Inventory maintenance – Order processing – Transportation – Customer receives goods

to store

perishable goods

limited range of goods

consume in a short time

consume later

Ex 3 There are 10 mistakes in the following text. Listen and underline the mistakes. Number the mistakes from 1 to 10, then listen again and write the correct words. Logistics is an essential part of trade. Since different areas are more suitable for producing different goods, logistic systems allow excess goods to be exported while goods not found locally could be imported. This process is known as the principle of comparative advantage and ensures a higher economic standard of living for everyone in the world. Logistics is a bridge between production and market areas which can often be a long way away from each other. Any company operating in the world market today needs to have effective logistic management. Ex 4 Answer the questions. 1 Business logistics. 2 Finance, marketing and production.

Ex 7 Find out why transportation and inventories are essential logistic activities. Listen and complete the text. Transportation is essential because no modern 1 firm can operate without providing for the movement of its 2 raw 3 materials or its finished 4 products. Inventories are also essential to logistics management because it is usually not 5 possible or 6 practical to provide 7 instant production. Inventory 8 maintenance of goods serves as buffers between supply and 9 demand, so that needed product availability may be maintained for 10 customers. Experience has shown that each will represent 11 one-half to two-thirds of total logistics 12 costs. Ex 8 Look at the diagram, fill in the past participle of each verb and complete the steps in the supply chain. Raw materials are 1 sent by ship to overseas ports from the sources production. They are 2 transported from the port to a warehouse location. They are then transported to a factory, where they are 3 transformed into 4 finished products.

37

02_KeysExercises.indd 37

25-03-2013 14:49:23

Teacher’s book

Then these products are 5 stored in a warehouse before being 6 delivered to the final customers. Ex 9 Match the following items. 1d, 2c, 3e, 4a, 5b Ex 10 Mark the following statements as True or False and correct the false ones. 1F–2T–3F–4F–5T–6T 1 Reverse logistics systems handle the flow of goods from the client back to the source. 3 Products can sometimes be returned if they are damaged. 4 Packaging materials are sometimes returned to the shipper. Ex 11 Answer the questions. 1 Customers, suppliers and stakeholders. 2 In terms of time and place. 3 Because it is the wrong time of year. 4 Because it is the wrong place. 5 When customers pay more for a product than what it costs to put it in their hands. 6 It adds value. Ex 12 Choose the correct option. 1c, 2b, 3b, 4a, 5a, 6c

Unit 19 The moving air Ex 1 Answer the questions. 1 An “air mass” is a part of the atmosphere where temperature, humidity and pressure are homogeneous. 2 Air masses form when the air remains for a long time over an extensive area with stable environmental conditions. 3 Cold and dry air masses usually form over the continental regions. 4 Warm and humid air masses form over tropical areas. 5 No, air masses do not remain in their areas of origin. 6 As they move all around the Earth, air masses redistribute the Sun’s heat from the regions which receive too much to those which receive too little. Ex 2 Answer the questions. 1 The physical phenomenon which makes the air move over the Earth’s surface is convection. 2 Cold air is heavier than warm air. 3 Convection currents happen when the

light warm air rises while cold air descends and takes the place of the warm air. 4 There are air masses with different temperatures all around the Earth because the temperature varies from place to place. 5 The air over the land is warmer than the air over the sea in summer because the ground rapidly heats up and reflects this heat. Ex 3 Answer the questions. 1 Air pressure varies with temperature because cold air is heavier than warm air and has a higher pressure. 2 It varies with humidity because the more water vapour there is in the air, the lighter it is. 3 Warm and humid low pressure air masses typically form over the equatorial regions because these regions receive a lot of sun and are rich with vegetation. 4 The factors determining the movements of air masses are temperature differences, humidity and pressure and their reciprocal effects. 5 Isobars are points with the same atmospheric pressure. They are shown as rings around the high and low pressure centres. 6 High pressure areas are marked with H, low pressure areas with L. 7 Winds tend to flow around the pressure centre following the isobar. 8 The blue arrows indicate the wind direction around the low pressure area. Ex 4 Mark the following statements as True or False and correct the false ones. 1F–2F–3T–4T–5F–6T–7T–8F 1 Cyclone areas contain low pressure air. 2 High pressure air is attracted to the neighbouring low pressure zones. 5 In the northern hemisphere the winds turn towards the right and in the Southern Hemisphere they turn towards the left. 8 Winds blow in the direction where the pressure is lower. Ex 5 Work with your partner and complete the questions in the exercise below, then ask and answer the questions with your partner. 1 What are the main winds? 2 When do the main winds blow? 3 Where are the main high pressure areas on our globe?

38

02_KeysExercises.indd 38

25-03-2013 14:49:24

key to unit exercises

4 Where are the main low pressure areas situated? 5 Why do the main winds blow in opposite directions in the two hemispheres? 6 How far can the main winds move air masses? Ex 6 Match each phrase on the left with its second part on the right. 1e, 2l, 3k, 4j, 5h, 6a, 7i, 8f, 9d, 10g, 11c, 12b Ex 7 Answer the questions. 1 A weather front is the area of transition between two different air masses. 2 A cold weather front is when cold air approaches and replaces warm air. 3 The cold air in a cold front moves under the warm air, making it rise. 4 A warm weather front is when warm air replaces cold air. 5 The warm air slides over the cold air and rises, cooling down as it does so. 6 When a warm front passes, it often brings rain and snow. 7 A warm front is represented as a red line with red semicircles pointing in the direction the front is travelling. 8 A cold front is indicated by a blue line with blue triangles pointing in the direction the front is travelling. Ex 8 Form questions using the given question words. 1 Where does the satellite image come from? 2 When was it taken? 3 What time was it taken? 4 What kind of image is it? 5 Who elaborated the data? 6 How is the data represented on the weather map? 7 Why was the sea rough? 8 Where was the front going? Project Work Use this link http://www. theweatherchannelkids.com/cool-clips/ hurricaneminute/, then answer the following questions. Clip 1: Peakseason 1 September 10. 2 August-October. 3 The sea surface is warmest and the winds are weak making the best atmospheric conditions for hurricanes.

Clip 2: Odds of a strike 1 Once every 2 years. 2 South Florida. 3 Every three to five years. Clip 3: Grab’n’go 1 Money, medicine and documents. 2 Your pets. Clip 4: Eyeopeners 1 Microwave imagery. 2 A very large eye is more damaging to the coast. A contracting eye can lead to the strengthening of the hurricane. Clip 5: The Deadliest Complete the table with the missing facts: Where /name Hurricane Mitch Antilles Galveston Bay of Bengal (Bangladesh)

When How many victims?

1998 1780

1990 1970

11,000 22,000

8,000 – 12,000 ¼ to ½ million people

Clip 6: All in a name 1 The Caribbean name for the God of evil winds. 2 From the name of the Greek gods. 3 Tropical cyclone. 4 In the Indian Ocean and Australia. HURRICANE MINUTE (Complete video script) Peak season Just like no two hurricanes are alike, no two hurricane seasons are alike as well, so the most active months can change each year, but there are averages with September 10th considered the peak of the season. September’s the hot month when the majority of hurricanes form, followed by August and October and the reason for that is the sea surface temperatures are the warmest during that time and the atmospheric environment for hurricane and tropical storms to form is the best; in other words, the winds in the atmosphere are fairly weak, so weak winds in the atmosphere and warm water means the chances for hurricanes to form is greater. While the odds are higher hurricanes do and can happen outside those peak months and can also be very intense.

39

02_KeysExercises.indd 39

25-03-2013 14:49:24

Teacher’s book

Odds of a strike I wouldn’t bet on it but odds are the United States will see a landfalling hurricane on average once every 2 or 3 years based on what we’ve seen over time; that said, the probabilities depend on location. The number 1 spot for a landfalling hurricane in the US is South Florida, particularly Miami or the Florida Keys, and then the number 2 is probably, the Outer Banks of North Carolina has a very high chance of getting struck, followed by the mouth of the Mississippi. Then the Florida Panhandle and the Upper Texas Coast are also high incidence areas but not nearly as high as South Florida which is the number 1. But if you look at the probability of each individual location, the odds of getting hit actually go down. For example, you could expect a hurricane to hit the number 1 area, South Florida, on average every 3 to 5 years but remember we could get one, more or less frequently, it all depends on the weather pattern. Grab’n’go Ideally you won’t have to grab and go if hurricane is headed your way! If you do, there’s a chance you’ll forget something important when it’s time to evacuate. “A mandatory evacuation has been ordered…” You want to make sure you have money, make sure you have medicine and make sure you have any documents with you that are easy to carry that you cannot replace and that may include your favourite photographs as well. Also don’t leave your pets behind! There are now some shelters that will allow pets or try to make arrangements beforehand for a kennel, a friend or a relative that can care for them and remember to take their food, medicine, favourite toy or blanket and perhaps a carrier too. Eyeopeners A hurricane can have an eye even if you can’t see it on satellite. That’s because there can be just a veil of cirrus that covers the top of the eye of the hurricane so you can’t see underneath it. We can see that now very easily with microwave imagery so it can’t fool us anymore.

Also the size of the eye doesn’t necessarily correspond to the strength of the winds around it. The thing we can say is that a very large eye of the hurricane is more damaging to the coast because more of the coast feels the strongest winds of the hurricane. The other interesting thing is that if you have an eye that is contracting, getting smaller with time, sometimes that’s related to the strengthening of the hurricane, as it tends to wind up much like an ice-skater with their arms out, when they pull their arms in, they spin faster. This is called an “eye-wall replacement hurricane.” The Deadliest When you consider what the deadliest hurricane is, it depends on time and place. The deadliest hurricane in recent memory in the Atlantic Basin is Hurricane Mitch in 1998. Mitch is estimated to have killed more than 11,000 people in Central America, but the record in the Atlantic Basin is the 1780 hurricane that actually went through the Antilles and more than 22,000 people lost their lives in that.

How about the deadliest hurricane to landfall in the United States?

That distinction goes to the Galveston hurricane of 1900, an estimated 8,000 to as high as 12,000 people died. Looking at hurricanes outside the Atlantic Basin, there’s no competition. It’s a 1970 tropical cyclone that was in the Bay of Bengal. It hit Bangladesh, where at least a quarter of a million to half a million people were killed. In one time alone, it’s believed 45% of the 167,000 residents were lost. All in a name Is a hurricane different than a typhoon? Actually the only thing that’s different is the name. We have the name hurricane in the Atlantic Basin and that basically comes from the God of Evil Winds, from the Caribbean terminology, Huracan, and we use the same name in the Eastern Pacific as well. The Western Pacific, the typhoon is the same phenomenon and that name has actually been traced back to Greek times.

40

02_KeysExercises.indd 40

25-03-2013 14:49:24

key to unit exercises

The term tropical cyclone, on the other hand, encompasses both hurricanes and typhoons. Meteorologists, they came up with the idea, well, let’s make a generic term that any low pressure system that spins around a low pressure centre that originates in the Tropics or Sub Tropics, we’ll call a tropical cyclone and in the area of Australia and the Indian Ocean only the name tropical cyclone is used.

Unit 20

Logistic services Ex 1 See if you can remember Pfohl’s definition of “logistics” by reordering the following parts given in scrambled order; try not to look!

“Logistics must ensure that a recipient is supplied from a point of origin in accordance with his requirements with the correct product (in quantity and variety), in the right condition, at the right time and in the right place at minimum cost.” Ex 2 Mark the following statements as True or False and correct the false ones. 1F–2T–3F–4T–5T–6F–7F–8F 1 Logistic service providers manage the transport/movement of goods. 3 Global providers transport good all over the world. 6 Goods are moved from one point to another and sometimes they are stored. 7 Providers use transport-logistical networks to deliver their goods on time. 8 The three core processes of logistics are transport, transhipping and storage. Ex 3 Listen and fill in the gaps. Transport is the coverage of distance or the 1 change of location for goods using a means of transport. Every transport system consists of 2 cargo, means of transport and the transport process. Means of transport involves the 3 type of transport in which goods are moved. The choice of the means of transport – either ground, air or 4 water transport – is closely tied to economic and 5 time factors. The transport process concerns the 6 planning and management of the transport chain by which goods are 7 moved from a source – the sender – to a

8 destination – the recipient. It implies the management of the organizational procedures, supported by technically advanced solutions, by which the goods 9 flow is constantly under control and accompanied by the corresponding 10 documents.

Ex 4 Answer the questions about paragraphs 3, 4, 5. 1 The coverage of distance or change of location of goods using a means of transport. 2 Economic and time factors. 3 The way goods are moved from the source to the recipient. 4 Using different means of transport for the same goods. 5 A warehouse. 6 Goods are loaded onto vehicles and sent to a receiving point. 7 A bridge between dispatch and receipt of goods. 8 Construction and operation of the transhipment warehouse. Ex 5 Revise the comparative and superlative forms of these adjectives. cheap expensive slow fast

cheaper more expensive slower faster

the cheapest the most expensive the slowest the fastest

Ex 6 Decide on the best main transport method for the following products; consider whether you are transporting a large/small quantity and if time is important. Goods/place of manufacture

Recipient

A Giorgio Armani dress manufactured Boutique on Fifth Avenue, in Thailand New York 10,000 Manchester United ballpoint pens manufactured in China needed before season begins

Manchester United Supporters’ Club Shop

Jeans manufactured in India

Camden Street Market

1,000 fresh eggs produced in Northern Distribution warehouse England (London) of a supermarket chain

Small/large quantity/ time-critical

Transport (air/sea/road & rail)

small

air

large/time-critical

road & rail

large

sea

large/time-critical

road & rail

41

02_KeysExercises.indd 41

25-03-2013 14:49:24

Teacher’s book

Ex 7 Complete the definitions by matching each phrase on the left with its second part on the right. 1c, 2e, 3g, 4b, 5f, 6a, 7d Ex 8 What does each ship carry? Write the type of cargo next to the ship. sugar, rice, grain 1 Bulk carriers 2 OBO carriers mineral ore, coal 3 Oil tankers crude oil 4 Cruise liners rich holiday-makers 5 Refrigerated ships dairy produce, fruit,

meat cars and passengers

6 Ferries

Ex 9 Put the strengths and weaknesses of containerized ship transport in the correct part of the table. Strengths

Weaknesses

economical

high capital costs

environmentally friendly slow large transport volume

tied to the water network

independent of weather

dependency of large container ships on specially equipped ports

Ex 10 Look at the bill of lading and answer the questions. 1 Tinned tomatoes. 2 4. 3 800. 4 20,000. 5 Naples. 6 San Francisco. 7 Caetano Overseas Shipping. 8 331 Great Valley Avenue, San Francisco 23457 USA. 9 Seamar, s.r.l. 10 Highlander. 11 Kolf-Heinz AG. 12 22nd March 2011.

Break-bulk 1 Used for non-bulk cargo not in containers. 2 Goods are loaded directly into the hold; – on pallets; – in crates; – in drums or sacks. 3 Typical cargo: specialised cargoes (fresh fruit). 4 Often used in small ports with no infrastructures. 5 Goods are easily damaged so sturdy packaging is necessary. Bulk 1 Large shipments of particular commodities. 2 Types of cargo: – coal; – oil; – ore; – wheat. 5 Goods are not packaged, they are simply carried in the hold.

Unit 21 Moving waters

Complete the table.

Ex 1 Choose the correct option for each sentence. 1 Most of the earth is covered by water. 2 Only a quarter of the Earth’s surface is land. 3 The greatest quantity of water is in the Southern Hemisphere. 4 There is less water in the Northern Hemisphere. 5 The large extensions of water between continents are called oceans. 6 Lands enclose parts of oceans forming smaller basins called seas. 7 Seas are connected to oceans.

Containers 1 Used for cargo already in containers. 2 Number of kinds of containers: 20. 3 Different sizes: 2. 4 Large ships hold: 9,000 containers 5 Advantages: – direct transfer ship/road-rail; –d  oor-to-door service; – fast and efficient loading/unloading; – security.

Ex 2 Complete with the missing definitions. 1 It indicates the quantity of salt in the water. 2 It decreases with depth. 3 It decreases with latitude from the Equator to the Poles. 4 It is typical of warm seas because of constant evaporation. 5 It is heavier than less salty water.

Project Work

42

02_KeysExercises.indd 42

25-03-2013 14:49:24

key to unit exercises

6 It is typical of seas which receive a constant flow of fresh water from rivers and rain.

Other examples: The Persian Sea is the warmest sea in the world. The Persian Sea is warmer than the Baltic Sea.

and at the poles, reducing the difference in temperature between the extreme 11 regions of the Earth. Together with the equatorial masses of warm air that move towards the poles and the 12 cold masses of polar air that move towards the Equator, the great ocean currents make the temperature bearable for human life all over the Earth. One well-known example is the Gulf Stream, which originates from the North Equatorial Current and transports 13 warm water from the Gulf of Mexico to the North Atlantic along the American coast. Then it turns north-east and carries the heat of the tropical seas to the North of Europe, making life bearable even in Spitzbergen in the Arctic Ocean. Cold ocean currents, like the Labrador Current, tend to move in the 14 opposite direction towards the Equator.

Ex 4 Listen and fill in the gaps. We have seen that the 1 waters of the sea are not the same everywhere. Their 2 temperature varies: it is different on the surface and underwater, at the poles and at the 3 Equator. Their salinity varies, as it depends on 4 evaporation and on the supply of fresh water from rivers and rain. These variations give rise to water masses, which are quite 5 different from each other and which also have great difficulty in mixing with each other. These 6 water masses slide alongside each other, side by side or over and under each other and they can often flow for 7 thousands of miles retaining their own particular characteristics, before they finally and gradually merge with the nearby waters. The constant motion of these water masses form the main ocean 8 currents which have a great influence on climates. These large currents form a system called the global conveyor belt. They slowly transport 9 warm waters over long distances towards the colder zones of the globe and cold waters towards the hot zones. In this way they help to redistribute the different amount of 10 Sun’s heat that the Earth’s surface receives at the Equator

Ex 5 Now answer the questions. 1 No, seawater is not the same everywhere. 2 There are differences in, for example, surface and underwater temperature, salinity, density etc. 3 These differences give origin to water masses, which are quite different to one another. 4 When water masses meet, they have difficulty in merging and often slide alongside each other for great distances until eventually they mix. 5 These great movements of water masses are called the main currents. 6 No, all parts of the Earth do not receive equal amounts of heat from the Sun. The poles receive very little, the temperate regions receive more, and the equatorial regions receive the most. 7 Warm currents go towards the poles. 8 They carry warm water to the cold zones, and together with the warm air masses make life bearable in extremely cold regions. 9 The Gulf Stream originates from the North Equatorial Current and eventually arrives to the North of Europe flowing into the Arctic Ocean. 10 The Gulf Stream is a warm ocean current, while the Labrador Current is a cold ocean current.

1 2 3 4 5 6

Salinity The sea temperature The sea temperature High salinity Very salty water Low salinity

Ex 3 Compare the following oceans and seas using comparatives and superlatives. Follow the examples. Ex: The Pacific Ocean is the largest ocean in the world. The Pacific Ocean is larger than the Atlantic Ocean.

43

02_KeysExercises.indd 43

25-03-2013 14:49:24

Teacher’s book

Ex 7 Fill in the gaps in the following table about tides. Type of tides

Interested areas

High tides

Hemisphere tilted towards Moon.



Opposite hemisphere.

Low tides

Neighbouring areas to high tide zones.

Spring tides

Hemisphere tilted towards the Moon & hemisphere tilted towards the Sun.

Neap tides

Both hemispheres.

Cause

Effect

The attraction of the Moon.

Ocean surface swells/rises.

The centrifugal force. of the Earth

Ocean surface rises as water masses gather from neighbouring zones.

Water taken away and moved to high tide zones.

Water drops/decreases.

Sun and Full Moon are aligned. Sun and Moon’s forces of gravity pull in the same line. Sun and Moon are perpendicular.

Sun and Moon’s forces of gravity work against each other.

Ex 8 Mark the following statements as True or False and correct the false ones. 1F–2F–3T–4F–5F–6T–7F–8F 1 Tides are caused by the action of the Moon (and the Sun). 2 The tide cycle is repeated twice a day. 4 Spring tides occur when the Sun and the Moon are aligned/in line. 5 When the Sun and Moon are perpendicular there are neap tides. 7 Spring tides occur when the Moon is full. 8 Neap tides occur when the Moon is in the first or last quarter. Ex 9 Match each term with its definition. 1d, 2a, 3b, 4c Ex 10 Compare the Atlantic Ocean and the Mediterranean Sea and choose the correct option for each sentence. 1 The waters of the Atlantic Ocean and the Mediterranean Sea meet at the Gibraltar Strait. Here the Mediterranean is about 30 cm lower than the Atlantic. 2 On the surface the lighter waters of the Atlantic flow towards the Mediterranean. 3 However, deep down the heavier waters of the Mediterranean flow in the opposite direction. The seawater in the Mediterranean is denser because it is saltier.

Project Work First of all, check what you know about ocean currents by choosing the correct option in the following sentences. The cold water in the polar regions forms sea ice making the water become saltier; consequently, its density increases and it starts to sink; surface water moves in to replace the sinking water, and in turn, it becomes saltier and colder starting the cycle of moving currents known as the global conveyor belt. This system is driven by thermohaline circulation, which starts in the cold waters near the North Pole; the cooled surface water sinks and a current is formed as surface water moves in to replace it. The deep water moves south past the Equator and then around the edge of Antarctica, where it cools and sinks again – in other words, it is “recharged”. The main current divides into two sections which are eventually warmed and rise as they travel back towards the North Atlantic, where the cycle begins again. The cycle is very slow – scientists estimate that it takes about 1,000 years for any cubic metre of water to complete the cycle. Unfortunately, research has shown that climate change has an effect on the conveyor belt. Global warming causing increased rainfall and the melting of glaciers means that more warm fresh water enters the system and it could stop the cold, salty water from sinking. If this happens, the global conveyor belt could stop working causing terrible effects for the Earth’s temperature.

Unit 22

The dead reckoning plot Ex 1 Answer the questions. 1 From the Latin navis together with agere, navigation means to “to move and direct” the ship from a starting point to her destination. 2 The navigator plans the course before starting the journey, to be sure to follow the shortest and safest route to his destination. 3 He uses nautical charts, radio bulletins, weather maps referring to the areas where the ship will be sailing.

44

02_KeysExercises.indd 44

25-03-2013 14:49:25

key to unit exercises

4 The track is the ship’s planned course. 5 The planned track line divided into segments because there are points where the ship has to change direction. 6 These segments are called the legs of the track. 7 Junction points are the points where the ship changes her course direction. They are the points where the track legs meet. 8 The track looks like a broken line on the chart. Ex 2 Study the meaning of the English terms, then find and write the Italian equivalent for each of them. 1 Ship’s heading = prora bussola 2 Course = rotta 3 True course or track = rotta vera 4 Drift = velocità della corrente e deriva 5 Leeway = scarroccio 6 Track line or course line = spezzata lossodromica 7 Leg of the track (or leg of the course) = tratto della spezzata 8 Junction points = punto estremo di ciascun tratto della spezzata Ex 3 Mark the following statements as True or False and correct the false ones. 1T–2F–3F–4T–5T 2 In the past, deduced reckoning involved making a lot of calculations. 3 Nowadays, dead reckoning means applying vectors to the last fix to work out the ship’s approximate position. Ex 4 Match each term with its definition. 1c, 2e, 3j, 4f, 5d, 6g, 7k, 8l, 9a, 10b, 11h, 12i Ex 5 Put the sentences in the correct sequence. e, f, b, c, a, d Ex 6 Find and correct eight mistakes in the summary. While plotting his course, the navigator notes down his ordered speed and works out the distance the ship has to cover using this formula: D = S x T. This means that he can work out how long it will take the ship to reach the next junction point. However, several factors cause errors in calculations; one major problem is the effect of sea currents. For this reason the navigator has to make a fix as often as possible to check his position and make necessary adjustments to his ship’s course.

Ex 7 Now cover the text and answer the questions about the plot on the chart. 1 The ship’s course line was in the direction of 090°, at a 15-knots speed. 2 The ship changed speed, so the navigator plotted a DR position for this time, 7.5 miles further of the 0900 position. 3 He changed the direction of the course line. 4 The new course was to 145°, at a 20-knots speed. 5 The course line ended at 1106, when a new fix was obtained. 6 A new DR course line starts at this point, from the new fix. Ex 8 Listen and complete the following text. How to apply the DR rules Clearing the harbour at 1 1000, the navigator obtains a last visual 2 fix. This is called taking departure, and the position determined is called the departure. At the 1000 departure, the Conning Officer* orders a course of 060° and a speed of 10 3 knots. Therefore the navigator lays out the course line from the 1000 fix in a direction of 4 060°. He calculates that in one hour at 10 knots he will travel 10 5 nautical miles. He measures 10 nautical miles from the 1000 fix position and marks the course line with a 6 semicircle. At 1100, the Conning Officer orders a course change to 7 090°. The navigator plots an 1100 DR due to the 8 course change and to the “every hour” rule. At 1200, the Conning Officer 9 changes course to 180° and speed of 5 knots. The navigator plots the 1200 DR. At 1300, the navigator 10 obtains a fix. He noticed that the fix position is offset to the 11 east from the DR position. So he determines set and drift from this offset and applies this 12 set and drift to any DR 13 position from 1300 until the next fix. He also resets the DR to the fix; that is, he draws the 180°course line from the 14 1300 fix. *The Conning Officer is the Deck Officer in charge of navigation, having responsibility for the ship as the direct representative of the Captain. Project Work 1. First we visit a web page that will teach you how to solve problems involving

45

02_KeysExercises.indd 45

25-03-2013 14:49:25

Teacher’s book

speed, time and distance. Find the following information. http://www.schoolofsailing.net/ speedtimedistance.html D 1 To use it simply put your finger S•T over the letter you are solving for. 2 One knot is equal to one nautical mile per hour. 3 Twelve nautical miles. 4 The “tricky thing” is when you have to calculate not only full hours but also minutes. 5 To convert minutes to hours divide by 60. 6 Twenty-three minutes divided by sixty equals 0.38 hours (23 minutes/60 minutes per hour = 0.38 hours). 7 Just make sure a couple of calculators are a regular part of your boat’s equipment! 2. Now we’ll watch this video http://www. youtube.com/watch?v=80Ad8Y4bZJM, which shows how to calculate your Set and Drift. Watch and listen to the video at least three times, until you find all requested information for each exercise. 2a. Complete the table by inserting each of the following items in the correct position: Ship’s heading 085°M (magnetic) Ship’s sailing 4 knots speed Sailing time passed 2.30 hours before fix Set and drift vector 130°M angle Length of vector 6 NM Speed of sea 2.4 knots current 2b. Now listen and complete the video script. Calculating your set and drift We are sailing along and 1 obtain a fix. Our heading is 2 085° magnetic and speed is 3 four knots. At 4 two and a half hours later we figure our dead reckoning position. At that time we also obtain another fix. The two positions are different. What is the set and drift? Draw a 5 line from the original fix to the new fix: that was our 6 track over the last two and a half hours. 7 Draw a line from the 8 DR to our new fix: that is the setdrift 9 vector over the last two and a half

hours. Using a course protractor or the 10 compass rose measure the vector 11 angle, we find that is 130° M. We find our vector 12 length to be six nautical miles, therefore the speed of the 13 current is six nautical 14 miles divided by two point five 15 hours: that’s two point four 16 knots. 3. Imagine you are the Conning Officer instructing a Deck Cadet. Your ship’s DR plot is the one shown in paragraph 5. Give the cadet the instructions to determine the set and drift (the direction and speed of the current) which offset the ship from the expected DR position. To find the real track that the ship has sailed over the last 2.06 hours 1 draw a line from the original fix to 2 the new fix. To find the set and drift vector that offset the ship over the last two hours draw 3

a line from the DR position to the new fix.

To determine the direction of the current 4 measure the vector angle. To calculate the speed of the current 5 find the vector length and divide this length by 6 2.06 hours, which is the time that has passed since the previous fix.

Unit 23

Petroleum Ex 1 Answer the questions. 1 Hydrocarbons are mainly composed of hydrogen and carbon. 2 It was formed from the remains of unicellular plants and animals. 3 It took from five to a hundred million years. 4 At the bottom of salty marshes or at the mouth of a river. 5 The organic remains deposited at the bottom of salty marshes and lagoons, where their molecules were slowly broken down by anaerobic bacteria, until only carbon and hydrogen remained. This carbon and hydrogen formed the crude oil molecules. 6 A petroleum trap is formed by impermeable rocks which “trap” a petroleum deposit. 7 They are called oilfields. 8 It contains oxygen, nitrogen, sulphur and traces of mineral salts, sediments and water.

46

02_KeysExercises.indd 46

25-03-2013 14:49:25

key to unit exercises

Ex 3 Answer the questions. 1 It is carried out in the fractionating tower of an oil refinery. 2 The temperature is higher at the bottom, which is the point nearest to the furnace. 3 The heavier hydrocarbons. 4 Heavier hydrocarbons have a higher number of carbon atoms in their molecules. 5 The lightest hydrocarbon is natural gas or methane. 6 It only has one carbon atom in its molecule. 7 From 16 to 20 carbon atoms. Ex 4 Study the example and link the pair of sentences below using the relative pronoun which. 1 Coal, crude oil and natural gas, which are mainly composed of hydrogen and carbon, are known as hydrocarbons. 2 Natural gas, which has only one carbon atom in its molecule, is the lightest hydrocarbon. 3 Heavy oil and lubricating oil, which have up to 25 carbon atoms in their molecules, are the heaviest hydrocarbons. 4 A great number of products are obtained from petroleum distillation, which is carried out in oil refineries. 5 Petroleum is a mixture of different hydrocarbons, which have different boiling temperatures. 6 The first distillation process is fractional distillation, which is given this name because the various products are separated out into fractions according to their boiling temperatures. Ex 5 Match the two parts of each definition. 1e, 2f, 3g, 4c, 5b, 6d, 7a Ex 6 Complete the text with the given words. First the crude oil passes 1 through the pipe still, where it turns partially 2 into steam. Then it enters the distillation tower. The oil goes 3 up through the tubes and plates. The fractions 4 of different boiling ranges are drawn 5 off at different levels of the tower. The 6 heavier distillates, such as heavy oil go 7 through other processes, the most important of which is 8 cracking. In this

process, the heavy oils are heated to 9

over 450°C and their long molecular chains are broken 10 down, so that 11 lighter molecules are formed, 12 which are typical of petrol. The petrol obtained in the first refining process 13 goes through another process called 14 reforming. In this process, aromatic hydrocarbons like 15 benzene are added to petrol, in order to 16 increase its octane number. Project Work 1. Check what you know about the refining process by matching each phrase on the left with its second part on the right. 1q, 2k, 3e, 4f, 5m, 6d, 7p, 8j, 9c, 10h, 11o, 12g, 13i, 14n, 15b, 16l, 17a

Unit 24

Kinds of energy & energy sources Ex 1 Mark the following statements as True or False and correct the false ones. 1T–2T–3F–4F–5T–6F–7T–8F– 9 T – 10 T 3 Kinetic energy is the energy of movement. 4 Potential energy is stored energy. 6 The chemical energy of fuel is potential energy. 8 Fuel chemical energy is converted into thermal energy through a combustion process. Ex 2 Answer the questions. 1 The primary types of energy derive directly from an energy source. 2 The secondary types of energy derive from the transformation of a primary type of energy. 3 Mechanical, thermal, nuclear, chemical. 4 Compressed air, pressurised water and electrical energy. Ex 4 Answer the questions. 1 We need energy sources to produce power and run machinery. 2 Renewable and non-renewable energy sources. 3 They are renewable, which means that they are continuously renewed (made again, anew) by Nature.

47

02_KeysExercises.indd 47

25-03-2013 14:49:25

Teacher’s book

4 Fossil fuels. 5 They were formed from the fossilised remains of unicellular marine plants and animals millions of years ago. It also took millions of years to form them. 6 They are not an endless resource, since Nature cannot make oil deposits or coal fields in a short time cycle. Ex 5 Match each keyword with its meaning. 1c, 2e, 3d, 4a, 5b Ex 6 Complete the diagram with the primary sources of energy given us by Nature. PRIMARY ENERGY

Renewable energy sources

Solar power

Wind power

Non-renewable energy sources (fossil fuels)

Water power

Coal

Gas

Oil

Ex 7 Answer to the questions. 1 Prime movers are energy converters. 2 A heat engine is a prime mover. 3 Heat engines use the chemical energy stored in fossil fuels. 4 They produce mechanical energy. 5 It is released through a combustion process. 6 Heat engines use non-renewable energy sources. Ex 8 Complete the diagram with the missing items from paragraph 4. PRIME MOVERS

Heat engines

Natural power

Solar power

Wind mill

Water wheel

Hydroturbine

Internal combustion engines

External combustion engines

Ex 9 What kind of prime movers are these? Complete the sentences. 1 A solar panel converts the energy of the Sun into electrical energy. 2 A windmill is worked by the action of the wind on sales which revolve.

3 A water wheel is turned by a flow of water and is used to work machinery. 4 A hydro-turbine is an engine whose driving wheel is turned by a current of water. Ex 10 Without looking at the texts, try to answer the following questions. 1 Energy is the source for every physical or chemical phenomenon and for every transformation. 2 Potential and kinetic energy. 3 Primary energy derives from a source in nature; secondary energy is derived from the conversion of some kind of primary energy. 4 Primary: mechanical, thermal, nuclear, chemical. Secondary: electrical, pressurised air, compressed air. 5 Renewable energy sources are continually remade. Non-renewable energy sources were formed millions of years ago and are not easy or quick to replace. 6 Renewable: Sun, water, wind. Nonrenewable: gas, oil, coal. 7 A prime mover is an energy converter, it allows us to transform energy for use. 8 Yes, it is because it transforms the chemical energy in fossil fuels into mechanical energy. 9 Heat engines use fossil fuels. They produce mechanical energy. 10 Solar panels, water wheels, windmills. Ex 11 What are fuels? What is the main characteristic of fuels? Compare your answer to the definition found in a monolingual dictionary and copy it below. Fuel: A fuel is a material for producing heat or other forms of energy. Ex 12 Read the pairs of statements carefully and choose the correct option. 1b, 2b, 3a, 4b, 5b, 6a, 7b, 8a, 9b, 10a Project Work Have you ever thought how much energy goes into the making of a sandwich? Use this link http://www.youtube.com/ watch?v=d6UZrgGSrY4 to find out why a sandwich is dripping in oil! Watch and complete the table below.

48

02_KeysExercises.indd 48

25-03-2013 14:49:26

key to unit exercises

Ingredient

Production

BREAD 1 The farmer ploughs and (Cereal) harrows the field and drills the seeds into the ground. 2 For seeds to grow, he uses fungicides, pesticides, insecticides. 3 As nutrients he adds chemical fertilisers. 4 When cereal ripens, it is harvested. 5 The grain is dried. 6 Then grain is driven to be processed in huge industrial plants.

Fuel He uses a

diesel-run tractor. Made from oil. Derived from

natural gas.

Diesel-run harvesters. He uses big heaters. (More fuel!) More diesel!

HAM It comes from a pig.

Pigs need grain, 1/2 tonne per pig. (Repeat steps 1-5 for grain!)

SALAD

Energy needed!

a Shipped; b Flown; c Grown in a heated greenhouse.

ALL INGREDIENTS Cooked, cooled or both.

Energy needed!



More diesel!

Transported in a

refrigerated lorry.

This is why our simple ham and salad sandwich is dripping in oil!

Unit 25

Heat energy & heat engines Ex 1 Answer the questions. 1 The continuous motion of atoms and molecules produces thermal energy or heat. 2 Not completely. 3 It means that not all the heat energy produced in the combustion process can be transformed into mechanical work by the engine. 4 It is lost through the engine (by friction) and dispersed in the surrounding air. 5 About 40%. Ex 2 Complete the sentences by using the following terms. 1 The more heat energy converted into mechanical work, the more efficient the engine. 2 All of mechanical energy can be transformed into heat. 3 Some of the thermal energy produced in the combustion process is not transformed into mechanical work but is wasted

through the engine and dispersed into the air. 4 Less than 40% of the heat energy produced by petrol is converted into mechanical work. 5 Most of the heat energy produced in a car engine is dispersed into the surrounding air. 6 More than 60% of the heat energy produced by internal combustion engines is lost because it cannot be transformed into useful work. Ex 3 Answer the questions. 1 They are called hydrocarbons. 2 Wood, coal, crude oil are examples of hydrocarbons. 3 Because they release a great amount of heat in a combustion process. 4 They are said to have a high heating value. Ex 4 Answer the questions. 1 Combustion is a chemical reaction. 2 Antoine Lavoisier, in 1783. 3 They combine together and form new chemical compounds. 4 Carbon monoxide will be formed when there is not enough oxygen to oxidise the carbon completely. 5 When the carbon oxidation is complete, carbon dioxide is formed. 6 In a combustion process thermal energy or heat is produced. 7 This energy comes from the chemical energy stored in the fuel. 8 More heat energy is produced when CO2 is produced in the burning process, because this happens when the carbon in the fuel oxidises (or burns) completely. Ex 5 Label the flow chart with the following items: Engine, Fossil fuels, Burning process. Fossil fuels Stored chemical energy

Burning process Chemical energy transformed into heat energy

Engine Heat energy transformed into mechanical energy

Ex 6 Complete the questions using these question words. Then complete the answers. Questions 1 What kind of energy does a fuel have? 2 When is a fuel’s chemical energy released?

49

02_KeysExercises.indd 49

25-03-2013 14:49:26

Teacher’s book

3 In what form is it released? 4 What does a heat engine do? Answers 1 It has stored chemical energy. 2 It is released through a combustion process. 3 It is released in the form of heat and light. 4 It converts heat energy into mechanical energy. Ex 7 Listen and complete the text. Electrical and Heat engines In the previous unit we learned that the engine is a 1 prime mover: a machine that converts some 2 types of energy into another. The form of energy we mostly need to operate all different types of machinery is 3 mechanical energy, or useful work. We use 4 engines to provide mechanical work from some other form of energy. For example, a water wheel converts the energy of a 5 flow of water into mechanical work to operate machinery. Electric motors and heat engines are the two 6 main types of engine in use today, taking their name from the kind of energy that they 7 absorb and convert. The electric motor makes use of 8 electrical energy, while the heat engine converts 9 thermal energy or heat into useful work. This thermal energy is produced 10 through a combustion process, which may take place either in a combustion chamber 11 inside the engine, or 12 outside the engine in separate machinery, usually a boiler. Ex 8 Answer the questions. 1 A machine that converts some types of energy into another. 2 Mechanical energy is also called useful work. 3 We need it to operate all different types of machinery. 4 Engines are used to provide useful work. 5/6 Electric motors and heat engines take their name from the type of energy they absorb and convert into mechanical work. Ex 9 Answer the questions. 1 The combustion process takes place outside the engine in a separate boiler. 2 The working fluid in steam engines and steam turbines is steam.

3 Steam is produced in a boiler before entering the engine. 4 It turns the moving blades or moves the pistons up and down. 5 The two types of internal combustion engines are reciprocating engines and gas turbines. 6 Combustion take place in a combustion chamber inside the engine. 7 The working fluid in internal combustion engines is the hot expanding gases. 8 The flow of gases moves the turbine rotor or a piston. Ex 10 Fill in the diagram about heat engines and then complete the text to describe the diagram in your exercise book. HEAT ENGINES

Internal combustion engines

reciprocating engines

gas turbines

External combustion engines

steam turbines

reciprocating steam engines

Heat engines are divided into internal and external combustion engines. The steam engine and the steam turbine are external combustion engines. In external combustion engines steam operates as the working fluid and drives the piston or the rotor blades. Gas turbines and piston engines are internal combustion engines. The gas turbine rotor and the pistons are moved by exhaust gases. Project Work The picture shows an electric car charging from an on-street station in London. Today we are going to learn about the current market of electric cars; see what potential benefits they could bring and what reasons limit their widespread adoption. Use the following link and fill in the table. http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Electric_car Definition of an electric car An electric car is an automobile which is

propelled by electric motor(s), using electrical energy stored in batteries or another energy storage device.

Top selling models of electric cars by October 2011: Mitsubishi i-MiEV;

50

02_KeysExercises.indd 50

25-03-2013 14:49:27

key to unit exercises

Nissan Leaf. Number of worldwide sales of each model: More than 16,000 units each. Benefits of electric cars as compared to internal combustion cars

A significant reduction of urban air pollution as they do not emit harmful tailpipe pollutants, such as carbon dioxide, and other greenhouse gases. Consequently they help to reduce greenhouse gas emissions. Less dependence on foreign oil. Limitations to the widespread adoption of electric cars They are more expensive than conventional internal combustion engine vehicles due to the additional cost of their lithium-ion battery pack. Lack of public and private recharging infrastructure.

Unit 26

Radio communication on board Ex 1 Answer the questions. 1 By the internal telephone system or by radio telephony. 2 Yes, to raise an alarm, for example in case of a fire or a man overboard. 3 Posted next to the telephone. 4 Channels for on board communications. Ex 2 Listen and complete the sentences. 1 The IMO and the ITU regulate the international telecommunication system. 2 VHF stands for Very High Frequency. 3 The frequency band for marine VHF radio communications is between 156 and 174 MHz. 4 The marine band contains 56 channels. 5 Channel 16 is used for distress, safety and calling. 6 Channel 13 is for intership or bridge-tobridge communication. 7 Channel 70 is used to send an alert by Digital Selective Calling. 8 Channels 15 or 17 are usually selected for on board communications. 9 The maximum power allowed for a marine VHF radio is 25 watts. 10 The power allowed for on board communications is 1 watt.

Ex 3 Fill in the gaps with the missing acronyms. Full name

Acronym

Very High Frequency Radio Telephony Digital Selective Calling Search and Rescue Vessel Traffic Management Services International Telecommunications Union Maritime Safety Information Coast Radio Stations Estimated Time of Arrival Estimated Time of Departure Navigational Telex receiver Mega Hertz

VHF RT DSC SAR VTMS ITU MSI CRS ETA ETD NAVTEX MHz

Ex 4 Study the table legend on page 230 and fill in the gaps. 1 They transmit navigational and meteorological warnings, weather forecasts, urgent distress messages. Coast Radio Stations 2 These are Search and Rescue operations which use aircraft.

Aero SAR 3 Radio communications between ships are given this name.

Inter-Ship 4 These alerts are exclusively transmitted on VHF Channel 70.

DSC alerts 5 Coast Radio Stations transmit on channels indicated by this function.

Public Correspondence 6 This is what CRS messages are called.

MSI (Maritime Safety Information) 7 Radio communications from the bridge to the Engine Room are indicated by this name.

On Board Communications 8 This channel is exclusively available for Radio Telephony Distress, Urgency or Safety calls.

VHF CH 16 Ex 5 Which radio channel(s) would you switch on to...? 1 order the ship’s engine room to reduce speed. (VHF CH 15 or 17) 2 listen to the weather forecast. (Any channel dedicated to “public

correspondence”, for example: Channels 01-05, 18, 60-65)

51

02_KeysExercises.indd 51

25-03-2013 14:49:27

Teacher’s book

3 call another ship when you realize your ships are in danger of colliding. (VHF CH 13) 4 send an automatic distress alert. (VHF CH 70) 5 communicate with the VTMS and ask if you can enter the harbour. (Any channel

dedicated to “port operations”, for example: Channels 11, 12, 74, 87-88)

6 communicate by radio telephony that you have an injured person on board and need medical assistance. (VHF CH 16) Ex 6 Answer the questions. 1 A code of letters and numbers. 2 No, because we need to distinguish ships with the same name. 3 A country’s registration authority. 4 To identify the ship when communicating by radio. 5 Maritime Mobile Service Identification. 6 A unique nine digit number. 7 Into the ship’s DCS unit. 8 When the operator makes a VHF DSC call. Ex 7 Mark the following statements as True or False and correct the false ones. 1F–2T–3F–4T–5T–6F–7T–8F 1 Sailors need to communicate with ships from anywhere in the world. 3 SMCP is IMO’s standardized safety language. 6 The SMCP makes use of a simplified version of maritime English. 8 Any external communication must follow the procedures indicated in the ITU regulations. Ex 8 Listen and complete the information about the ship. 1 This is XIA Men. 2 I spell: X-ray – India – Alfa – Mike – Echo – November. 3 My MMSI is 413065000. 4 My present position is 44°23’N, 8°48’E. 5 My bearing is 115 degrees from Lanterna Lighthouse. 6 My distance is 13.6 nautical miles from Lanterna Lighthouse. 7 My present course is 045° to Genova Harbour. 8 My speed is 16.5 knots. 9 My ETA is 0700 hours local time. 10 My ETD is 1700 hours local time.

Ex 9 Complete the sentences with the correct procedure words. Then listen to the recording and check. 1 “My draft is one-two decimal 6 metres – repeat one – two decimal 6 metres”. 2 “My present speed is one-four knots – mistake. Correction, my present speed is one-two knots”. 3 “What is your position? Say again”. 4 “Vessel in distress in position 160° six miles from Barry Pier. Correction: 160° four miles from Barry Pier”. 5 “Fairway speed is eight knots. Do not overtake – repeat – do not overtake”. 6 “The course to reach me is 135°ʺ – “Message not understood. Say again”. 7 “I cannot understand you. Please use Standard Marine Communication Phrases”. 8 “What is bearing and distance of MV Utopia from fairway buoy?” – “No information – repeat – No information”. Ex 10 These messages are transmitted to your ship by a VTS Station: match each of them with the appropriate response. Then listen to the recording and check. 1f, 2d, 3a, 4g, 5c, 6b, 7e Messages 1 ADVICE. Do not overtake the vessel north of you. 2 Advice (you) change to VHF Channel 18. 3 Stand by on VHF Channel 6. 4 INSTRUCTION. Do not cross the fairway. 5 Be ready to get underway. 6 Repeat your position for identification. 7 What is your ETA at High Cross Pilot Station in local time? Responses f I will not overtake the vessel north of me. d Changing to VHF Channel 18. a Standing by on VHF Channel 6. g I will not cross the fairway. c I am ready to get underway. b My position is bearing 040° from Lizard Point, distance 3.4 nautical miles. e My ETA at High Cross Pilot Station is 0830 hours in local time. Ex 11 Indicate the correct marker for each message. Two markers are repeated. Message 1 I am approaching from south. 2 I will anchor at Haven buoy and wait for instructions.

52

02_KeysExercises.indd 52

25-03-2013 14:49:27

key to unit exercises

3 Charted depth has increased by two metres due to winds. 4 You must keep to the north of the fairway line. 5 From what direction are you approaching? 6 Yes, I have altered course. My new course is 025 degrees. 7 Dangerous wreck obstruction located in position 49°43.ʹ4ʺN 2°22.ʹ7ʺW / 49.71778°N 2.36861°W. 8 I require a pilot at Small Cross Pilot Station. 9 Have you altered course? 10 You are proceeding at a dangerous speed. Advise you reduce speed to 4 knots. Message Marker 1 ANSWER 2 INTENTION 3 INFORMATION 4 INSTRUCTION 5 QUESTION 6 ANSWER 7 WARNING 8 REQUEST 9 QUESTION 10 ADVICE Ex 12 Use the suggestions and write the message you would say or hear in each situation. Then listen to the recording and check if your message was correct. 1 QUESTION. Do I have permission to enter the fairway? 2 ANSWER. Stand by until the pilot arrives. 3 QUESTION. Do you require a tug for berthing manoeuvres? 4 ANSWER. I will need two tugs and a pilot. 5 What is the name of your vessel and call sign? 6 The name of my vessel is “Queen Mary”. 7 Please spell your call sign. 8 I spell BPBB. 9 What is your course and speed? 10 My present course is 087°. 11 My present speed is 18 knots. 12 From what direction are you approaching? Project Work Now use the link to read about some people who trained and worked as Radio Officers. Complete the information in the table below

about: Geoff from England, Dirk J. from the Netherlands and Riccardo from Italy. http://digilander.libero.it/radiofficer/qna.html Name

Geoff

Date of birth (year)

25.08.1952

Education

He attended the College of International Marine Radio Telecommunications in Manchester. Then he completed the Radar Maintenance certificate, and later took the Radio Electronics Diploma in Liverpool. MRGC certificate, Radar Maintenance certificate, Radio Electronics Diploma Ocean Bridge / GYKA



Certificates



First ship (name/type) Present job



Presently employed as electronics systems engineer.

Name Date of birth (year)

–

Education

He completed his studies at the nautical college in Vlissingen and obtained the general certificate for the maritime mobile service. Ham-radio license obtained during his studies. Coral Rubrum / PJUT



Certificates First ship (name/type) Present job

Employed at Philips Electronics in Brazil.

Name

Geoff

Date of birth (year)

1945

Education

Radio Officers school International Certificate of First Class, GMDSS GOC Calypso / 5MIK

Certificates



First ship (name/type) Present job

Retired

Unit 27

Radio messages Ex 1 Answer the questions. 1 Channel 16. 2 A suggested channel such as Channel 13, 73. 3 Because Channel 16 must be left free for Distress, Urgency or Safety calls. 4 THIS IS. 5 By Name, Call Sign or MMSI number. 6 No, they are not. 7 Three times. 8 Because of language pronunciation problems. 9 OVER. 10 OUT.

53

02_KeysExercises.indd 53

25-03-2013 14:49:27

Teacher’s book

Ex 2 Reorder the steps in the correct sequence. 1d, 2c, 3f, 4b, 5a, 6e Ex 3 Now listen to the complete conversation between Ulysses 503000100 and Falmouth Coast Guard. Falmouth Coast Guard, Falmouth Coast Guard, THIS IS Ulysses, Ulysses 503000100 on Channel 16, Position report, Suggest Channel 73. Over. Ulysses 503000100 THIS IS Falmouth Coast Guard, Falmouth Coast Guard. Changing to Channel 73. Over. Falmouth Coast Guard THIS IS Ulysses, Ulysses 503000100 on Channel 73. How do you read me? Over. THIS IS Falmouth Coast Guard. Readability loud and clear (five by five) go ahead with your position report. Over. THIS IS Ulysses. Position report: Ulysses 503000100 anchored in position 137 degrees from Lizard Point, distance 2.4 nautical miles. Over. THIS IS Falmouth Coast Guard. Your position report received, returning to Channel 16 and standing by, Falmouth Coast Guard. Out. Ex 4 Imagine you are the radio operator on board the OBO ship Lucky Star 03480000100. What would you say to…? 1 Homer Bay Coast Guard, Homer Bay Coast Guard. 2 This is Lucky Star, Lucky Star 03480000100 on Channel 16. 3 Change to Channel 73. 4 Changing to Channel 73. 5 How do you read me? 6 Position report, Lucky Star 03480000100. 7 OVER. 8 OUT. Ex 5 Try to put the radio conversation between Rotterdam Coast Guard and the Oil Tanker Lucky First in the correct order. Then listen to the recording and check. 1b, 2e, 3a, 4g, 5c, 6f, 7d Rotterdam Coast Guard, Rotterdam Coast Guard. This is Lucky First 5783, Lucky First 5783. Over. Lucky First 5783, Lucky First 5783. This is Rotterdam Coast Guard, Rotterdam Coast Guard. Change to VHF Channel 11. Over

 his is Lucky First 5783. Changing to VHF T Channel 11. Over Rotterdam Coast Guard, this is Lucky First 5783. Calling on VHF Channel 11. How do you read me? Over Lucky First 5783, this is Rotterdam Coast Guard. I read you strength 4. Go ahead with your message. Over This is Lucky First 5783. My ETA at Hook Buoy will be 0900 UTC. Over This is Rotterdam Coast Guard. Received message. Your ETA at Hook Buoy will be 0900 UTC. Advise you change to channel 16 and stand by. Out Ex 6 Imagine that you are sailing on your ten-metre long sailing boat, called Magic Lady. Your call sign is I45M – I is the call sign prefix for Italian ships. Your MMSI is 247653290 – the first three digits, 247, of your MMSI indicate Italian nationality. You want to spend a few days at Sailfish Marina on the Croatian coast, so you call the Marina to know if they have a berth for your boat. Fill in the gaps in the conversation, then listen to the recording and check. Sailfish Marina, Sailfish Marina. This is 1 Magic Lady, 2 Magic Lady, I458M (or 3 247653290). Over. Magic Lady, Magic Lady. This is 4 Sailfish Marina, 5 change to Channel 08. Over. Sailfish Marina, This is Magic Lady, Romeo. I’m changing 6 to Channel 08. Over. Sailfish Marina. This is Magic Lady, Magic Lady. On Channel 08. Do you have a berth for a 7 ten-metre long sailing boat? Over. Magic Lady, This is 8 Sailfish Marina, 9 yes we have. Sail into the marina and go to left pier number three. Over. Sailfish Marina, 10 This is Magic Lady. We are under way. Out. Ex 7 Answer the questions. 1 VHF Channel 16. 2 VHF Channel 70 is dedicated to VHF DSC. 3 Vessels are required to maintain a continuous listening watch on Channel 16 and also on Channel 70, if they are fitted with VHF DSC equipment. 4 Distress, Urgency, Safety and routine messages.

54

02_KeysExercises.indd 54

25-03-2013 14:49:27

key to unit exercises

5 Distress communications are maintained on VHF Channel 16 until it is certain that the ship in distress has received assistance. 6 After an initial call on Channel 16, Urgency, Safety and routine communications are transmitted on a working channel. An example of a complete distress call and message

The VHF DSC Distress Alert followed by: MAYDAY MAYDAY MAYDAY THIS IS LUBECK LUBECK LUBECK 211207270 MAYDAY LUBECK 211207270 045 DEGREES TRUE FROM RERIK, DISTANCE 24 NAUTICAL MILES SINKING AFTER STRIKING SUBMERGED OBJECT ESTIMATE FURTHER 15 MINUTES AFLOAT 30 METRE FISHING VESSEL BLUE HULL WHITE SUPERSTRUCTURE 5 PERSONS ONBOARD EPIRB ACTIVATED OVER Ex 8 Put the distress message in order. Then listen to the recording and check. 1b, 2d, 3a, 4e, 5c, 6g, 7f, 8h MAYDAY-MAYDAY-MAYDAY. This is Blue Duck-Blue Duck-Blue Duck WA1234. Cape Henry Lighthouse bearing 185 degrees – distance 2 miles. Struck submerged object. Need pumps – medical assistance and tow. Three adults, two children on board. One person compound fracture of arm. Estimate can remain afloat two hours. Blue Duck is twenty-two metre cabin cruiser – white hull – blue deck house. OVER. Ex 9 The dry cargo vessel Isabel J8B4332 is travelling in the Cyclades, in the Aegean Sea. The ship has struck a submerged rock, the hull is holed and the Engine Room is flooded. The ship is fully loaded and now she is heavily leaning to one side. The captain sends a Mayday. Try to make the ship’s distress call and message, completing the table with the following information.

Distress call MAYDAY, MAYDAY, MAYDAY. THIS IS ISABEL, ISABEL, ISABEL J8B4332. Distress message Distress signal MAYDAY Name and MMSI/call sign ISABEL

J8B4332

Position TEN NAUTICAL MILES SOUTH OF DRAGONISI 37°23’N, 25° 24 E Nature of distress

HOLED AND LISTING HEAVILY, ENGINE ROOM FLOODED REQUIRE IMMEDIATE ASSISTANCE Other information

SIX PEOPLE ON BOARD SEAS ROUGH The word OVER OVER Ex 10 Answer the questions. 1 They acknowledge receipt. 2 The coast station. 3 All stations must maintain radio silence. 4 Until all transmissions have finished and the emergency is over. 5 It indicates that normal transmissions can begin again. An example of acknowledgment or receipt of a distress message by a ship station: MAYDAY Lubeck Lubeck Lubeck 211207270 THIS IS Sealandia Sealandia Sealandia OZGQ2 RECEIVED MAYDAY OVER Example of a message by the distress vessel or the control station imposing silence: MAYDAY All stations, all stations, all stations THIS IS Rerik Coast Station Rerik Coast Station Rerik Coast Station SEELONCE MAYDAY Example of the distress vessel or the control station advising resumption of “normal working transmission” on the distress channel: MAYDAY All stations, all stations, all stations

55

02_KeysExercises.indd 55

25-03-2013 14:49:28

Teacher’s book

THIS IS Rerik Coast Station Rerik Coast Station Rerik Coast Station 1500 Local Time LUBECK 211207270 SEELONCE FEENEE

All stations All stations All stations THIS IS Hastings Maritime Radio Hastings Maritime Radio Hastings Maritime Radio Navigation warning listen on Channel 67

Example of the broadcast of an urgency call:

Ex 13 Classify the following radio messages as Distress, Urgency or Safety calls. 1 Distress. 2 Urgency. 3 Safety. 4 Safety. 5 Urgency. 6 Distress. 7 Distress. 8 Safety. 9 Safety. 10 Urgency.

PAN PAN, PAN PAN, PAN PAN Newharbour Coast Guard THIS IS Gironde Gironde Gironde 219217000 Request urgent medical assistance – crew member sustained a broken leg – suggest change to Channel 67 OVER Ex 11 Complete the table for the urgency message using the following information. Then listen to the recording and check. URGENCY SIGNAL

PAN PAN, PAN PAN, PAN PAN Addressed to

All stations, all stations, all stations The words “THIS IS” THIS IS Station calling (x3)

MAERSK MAERSK MAERSK FWYH In position 33°85ʹ South, 18°39ʹ East Urgency message broken rudder, no steerage request tow to shore The word OVER OVER Ex 12 The sailing boat ALBATROSS ZM1726 with three people on board was travelling west of Kapiti Island in New Zealand. An accident occurred and the skipper sent an urgency message. Reorder the sentences. Then listen to the recording and check. 1e, 2i, 3h, 4g, 5j, 6b, 7d, 8a, 9f, 10c PAN PAN, PAN PAN, PAN PAN. ALL STATIONS, ALL STATIONS, ALL STATIONS. THIS IS Albatross, Albatross, Albatross ZM1726. Five nautical miles west of Kapiti Island. Dismasted and drifting. Require tow. Sea smooth. No immediate danger. There are three people on board. OVER. Example of the broadcast of safety call from a coast station: SECURITÉ, SECURITÉ, SECURITÉ

Ex 14 Match the two parts of each definition. 1c, 2g, 3a, 4f, 5b, 6d, 7e Project Work Write the following Italian definitions in the table. burrasca previsione mareggiata costiero forte vento piattaforma petrolifera posa di condotte

gale forecast/outlook tidal surge inshore strong wind rig pipelaying

Now use the information from the site to complete the following table: 1 How many gale warnings are

6

regularly broadcast every day? 2 What time is the first 24 hour

0620

forecast at Portpatrick? 3 How many WZ warnings are

6

regularly broadcast every day?

WARNING

4 SWW stands for STRONG WIND

………...........……

5 IWF stands for

………...........……



INSHORE

WATERS FORECAST 6 What time is the second inshore

1720

forecast at Niton? 7 What three channels are usually

23, 84, 86

used to broadcast MSI? 8 Navigational warnings (WZ) are provided by the UK

………..........

HYDROGRAPHIC

Office

9 Navigational warnings are

NAVTEX

normally broadcast on………...........……

56

02_KeysExercises.indd 56

25-03-2013 14:49:28

key to unit exercises

10 What is the name given to the

RIGMOVES

movement of rigs? 11 Are RIGMOVES and pipelaying

No

operations included in WZ? 12 How often are meteorological

Every 3 hours

warnings given? 13 How often are shipping forecasts Twice daily given? 14 When is a gale warning given?

As soon as possible

15 A SWW is given when wind speed 6 or more is predicted at FORCE

Unit 28

Reciprocating engines Ex 1 Answer the questions. 1 Petrol engines and diesel engines. 2 As regards fuel ignition, they are classified as spark-ignition and compression-ignition engines. 3 In diesel engines, there is no need for sparking plugs, since the fuel catches fire as soon as it is exposed to the very hot air which is compressed in the cylinder. 4 Diesel oil is a heavier distillate than petrol, because it has more carbon atoms in its molecules. 5 Fuel injectors. 6 Because the direct injection system has proved to be more efficient, since it can reduce fuel consumption. Ex 2 Work with your partner and match the words and verbs on the left with their correct definition on the right. Then write down some of the definitions in your exercise book so that you can remember them and use some of them as synonyms for the verbs on the left. 1l, 2f, 3g, 4h, 5k, 6b, 7i, 8d, 9c, 10j, 11e, 12a, 13r, 14p, 15q, 16m, 17o, 18s, 19n Ex 5 Mark the following statements as True or False and correct the false ones. 1F–2T–3T–4F–5T–6F–7F–8T– 9 T – 10 F 1 The cylinders are cut in the cylinder block. 4 A stroke is one up or down movement of the piston. 6 Each time the piston reciprocates, the crankshaft turns through 360°. 7 In a four-stroke engine, the piston reciprocates twice to complete a cycle. 10 Only one of the four stages of the cycle provides useful work.

Ex 6 The pictures show the four-stroke process in a petrol engine. Study them and complete the descriptions of what happens with each piston stroke. Intake stroke The piston moves down. The intake valve opens: – fuel and air enter the combustion chamber. Compression stroke The piston goes up and fuel and air are compressed in the c.c.: – the volume of the fuel mixture is reduced; – the pressure inside the chamber is increased; – the temperature of the mixture rises to about 300°C. As a result, the mixture becomes explosive. Combustion stroke The fuel mixture is set on fire by a sparking plug: – the mixture explodes; – hot expanding gases are produced; – the hot gases push the piston down. Exhaust stroke The exhaust valve opens. The piston moves up and pushes exhaust gases out of the cylinder. Ex 7 Work with your partner and complete the text with the missing words. Four-stroke engines are the most popular type of petrol engine. In this type of engine the piston must 1 reciprocate twice to produce 2 mechanical energy. That is, the engine needs four piston strokes to 3 convert fuel into motion. This process is 4 called the four-stroke process and 5 consists of four stages: intake, compression, combustion and exhaust. During the intake stroke the piston 6 goes down, the intake valve 7 opens and the fuel-and-air 8 mixture enters the combustion chamber. During the next stroke, the piston returns to the top of the 9 cylinder. As the piston goes up, it 10 compresses the fuel mixture into a small space, so that the volume of the mixture is 11 reduced. As the volume is reduced, the 12 pressure is increased and the temperature of the mixture 13 rises to about 300°C. Now the mixture is ready for combustion.

57

02_KeysExercises.indd 57

25-03-2013 14:49:28

Teacher’s book

During the combustion stroke the fuel-air mixture is 14 ignited/set on fire by a spark. The mixture immediately explodes and the hot 15 expanding gases which are produced in the combustion process push the piston 16 down. Then the exhaust valve opens in the combustion chamber and, as the piston moves up again, it pushes the 17 exhaust/ waste gases out of the cylinder. This is the exhaust stroke. Then the piston goes down and the process starts again with the 18 intake stroke. Ex 8 Fill in the missing words to complete the text about the four-stroke diesel engine. The four-stroke diesel engine has exhaust and air-intake 1 valves. It needs 2 two revolutions of the crankshaft to carry out a 3 power stroke in all the cylinders. A cycle begins with the intake stroke, when the piston moves down and 4 intakes air into the cylinder. Then the piston 5 goes up and compresses the air. During the compression stroke, the 6 temperature of the air rises to about 900°F (480°C). When the fuel oil is 7 injected into the cylinder by the fuelinjector, it mixes with the hot air and 8 burns explosively. The gases produced by the combustion of the fuel 9 push the piston down for the power 10 stroke. In the exhaust stroke, the piston moves 11 up again, and forces the burned gases 12 out of the cylinder. Ex 10 Answer the questions. 1 A two-stroke engine executes two piston strokes to complete a thermal cycle. 2 There are no valves in a two-stroke engine, they only have ports. 3 The main disadvantage of two-stroke petrol engines is that during scavenging some unburned/unused fuel mixture is lost because it is discharged with the exhaust gases. 4 Two-stroke petrol engines are only applied to small motorcycles. 5 Two-stroke diesel engines are used for driving industrial machinery and for ship propulsion. 6 No fuel is lost during scavenging because diesel engines only compress air, not a fuelair mixture like petrol engines. Ex 11 Check how much you have learned about the two types of piston engines,

and decide which of the following sentences refer to the petrol engine and which refer to the diesel engine. 1 P.E. 2 D.E. 3 P.E. 4 P.E. 5 D.E. 6 P.E. 7 D.E. 8 D.E. 9 P.E. 10 D.E. Ex 12 Choose the correct statements among the ones below. 1a, 2b, 3a, 4b, 5a, 6a Ex 13 Listen and complete the text. The marine diesel engine There are two 1 types of marine diesel engine: the slow speed diesel engine, and the medium speed diesel engine. 2 Large diesel engines, which have cylinders nearly 3 feet in diameter, turn at the relatively 3 slow speed of about 200 rpm. They are known as slow speed diesel engines and can be connected to the 4 propeller without reduction gears. Although 5 higher power could be produced by higher revolutions, this would reduce the 6 efficiency of the propeller, because a propeller is more efficient the larger it is and the 7 slower it runs. In fact, a propeller is not effective 8 above 200 rpm. These large slow running diesel engines are traditionally used in 9 larger merchant ships, particularly bulk-carriers and tankers, because of their low fuel consumption. Medium speed diesel engines operate between 10 400 and 600 rpm; therefore, they are connected to the propeller by reduction gears. Once the use of this type of engine was restricted to the 11 smaller cargo ships, but nowadays it is also used in large ships such as 12 tankers and 13 bulk carriers. This is thanks to its small size, which reduces the space and weight of the engine. The power output of the engine is expressed as brake horsepower (BHP), which may also be expressed in 14 kilowatts. In the case of diesel engines, effective horsepower is the power developed by the piston in the cylinder.

58

02_KeysExercises.indd 58

25-03-2013 14:49:28

key to unit exercises

Project Work 1. Use this link http://www.brighthub.com/ engineering/marine/articles/66033.aspx to find out the answers to the questions. a For the generation of electricity on board. b All the watch keeping engineers in their duty hours. c After 250 running hours. d Every 1,000 hours routine/running. 2. Now complete the table showing the daily checks made on the engine. DAILY CHECKS ON THE ENGINE Check levels of: 1 fuel in the service tank 2 lube oil in the engine sump 3 lube oil in the governor Check pressure of: 1 lube oil 2 water Check temperature of: 1 exhaust gases 2 cooling water 3 lube oil inlet Drain: 1 the service and settling tank of any water 2 the condensate from the scavenge manifold

and the air coolers

Lubricate: 1 the fuel racks 2 linkages 3 fuel pump rack operating gear

Unit 29

Turbine engines Ex 1 Rewrite the following statements, using either because or since. Follow the examples. Ex: a Since they can ensure high manoeuvrability and speed, gas turbines maintain a prime position for the propulsion of naval vessels. b Gas turbines have a prime position in the propulsion of naval vessels because they can ensure high manoeuvrability and speed. 1 a Since turbine engines consume more fuel than diesel engines, they are more expensive to run.

b Turbine engines are more expensive to run because they consume more fuel. 2 a Since they are subjected to very high pressures and speeds, turbine rotors and blades are made of special alloys. b Turbine rotors and blades are made of

special alloys because they are subjected to very high pressures and speeds.

3 a Since they run at very high speeds, turbine rotors are connected to propeller shafts by double reduction gears. b Turbine rotors are connected to

propeller shafts by double reduction gears because they run at very high speeds.

4 a Since turbines are one-way engines, a separate turbine is required to go astern. b A separate turbine is required to go

astern because turbines are one-way engines.

5 a Since their application to ship propulsion generates technical and economical problems, turbine engines have disappeared as propelling engines on board commercial ships. b Turbine engines have disappeared as

propelling engines on board commercial ships because their application to ship propulsion generates technical and economical problems.

6 a Since turbines are able to produce great power, they are used in many industrial plants, such as electric power stations. b Turbines are used in many industrial

plants, such as electric power stations because they are able to produce great power.

Ex 2 Listen and complete the text. The compressor 1 intakes atmospheric air, which is 2 compressed so that its volume is reduced while its pressure is increased. In this way, the air 3 temperature rises greatly. Then, the hot compressed air 4 flows into the combustion chamber, where the fuel is injected in the form of very minute droplets by a 5 fuel injector. As the stream of compressed air enters the combustion chamber, the fuel 6 burns. The expanding gases produced in combustion then enter the turbine. Here the 7 hot gases expand

59

02_KeysExercises.indd 59

25-03-2013 14:49:28

Teacher’s book

as they set the rotor blades in motion, and their 8 heat energy is converted into mechanical power by the 9 moving blades. The rotating blades drive the rotor 10 shaft. A part of the mechanical 11 power developed in the turbine is used to run the 12 compressor, which is mounted on the same axis; the remaining power is transmitted to the propeller shaft through double 13 reduction gears. The working cycle of the gas turbine engine is similar to that of the 14 fourstroke diesel engine. In both engine cycles there is induction, compression, combustion and 15 exhaust as long as the engine is running. The main difference is that these steps follow one another at given intervals of time in each 16 cylinder of a diesel engine, while they occur continuously in the different 17 parts of a gas turbine. In fact, the turbine engine eliminates the three 18 idle strokes and enables more fuel to be burnt in a shorter time; for this reason it produces a greater power 19 output for a given size of engine. Ex 3 Now cover the text and answer the questions below; you can use the drawing to help you. 1 Turbines are used in many industrial plants, such as electric power stations, and only a few are found on board ship. Gas turbines are used in many naval vessels, in some container ships and fast ferries. 2 As they are very expensive to run, in the last decades most turbine engines have been replaced by diesel engines. In fact, diesel engines have been improved and they can provide greater power nowadays than they did in the seventies, consuming less fuel than turbines. 3 The compressor, the combustion chamber and the turbine. 4 A compressor draws and compresses atmospheric air. 5 Because the air pressure is increased. 6 From the compressor, the compressed air goes into the combustion chamber. 7 In a gas turbine, combustion occurs as soon as the injected fuel comes into contact with the hot compressed air. 8 Useful power is produced in the rotor blades, where the heat energy of the hot gases is converted into mechanical power by the moving blades.

9 In both engines there is a four-step working cycle, but the steps occur at the same time in the different parts of a gas turbine, while they occur one after the other in the cylinders of a diesel engine. 10 The gas turbine engine eliminates three idle strokes, because combustion occurs continuously. Ex 4 Complete the summary with the missing words. Air is 1 drawn from the atmosphere and 2 compressed in the compressor. Then the compressed air 3 enters the combustion chamber, where a jet of fuel is continuously injected, therefore 4 combustion takes place continuously. The 5 expanding gases produced in combustion are 6 directed against the turbine blades. The blades start rotating and turn a shaft which operates the 7 compressor. Some of the mechanical power produced by the 8 turbine is used to drive the compressor. The remaining mechanical energy can be used for useful work. Ex 5 Study the flow chart and use some of the words to complete the text. A gas turbine engine provides thrust by increasing the air kinetic energy, or air velocity. The air velocity is increased as the airflow passes through the engine and receives different kinds of energy. First of all, the air 1 kinetic energy is increased in the compressor, by means of increased 2 pressure energy. Then 3 heat energy is added, generated through the combustion of air and an atomised fuel. The heat energy of the hot gases is converted back to 4 kinetic energy by the blades in the turbine rotor. Forward thrust results from the rearward ejection of a high velocity efflux of gases from the output shaft. Ex 6 Answer the questions. 1 Hydraulic impulse turbines are based on the same principle as the water wheel: they rotate in the same direction as the water current. 2 Reaction turbines are based on the working principle of the windmill. 3 They rotate in the direction opposite to the water flow, just as the sails of a windmill rotate in the direction opposite to the wind. 4 Lester Allen Pelton, an American engineer, in the middle of the 19th century. 5 James Francis, a British engineer.

60

02_KeysExercises.indd 60

25-03-2013 14:49:28

key to unit exercises

Ex 7 Answer the questions. 1 The first steam turbine engines were built by Charles Parson and Gustave De Laval. 2 A steam turbine essentially consists of a stationary element called a steam distributor, and of a rotary element called a rotor. 3 Steam enters the turbine through the steam distributor or through the stationary blades. 4 The steam distributor transforms the steam heat energy into kinetic energy, because steam expands (totally or partially) in this part of the turbine. 5 In the distributor. 6 In the moving or “rotor” blades. 7 The steam distributor of impulse turbines is called a “nozzle”. 8 In reaction turbines there are no nozzles, because steam enters the engine and expands through the stationary blades. They operate/act as a steam distributor. Ex 8 Mark the following statements as True or False and correct the false ones. 1F–2F–3F–4T–5F–6T–7F–8T– 9 T – 10 F – 11 F – 12 T 1 A steam turbine is an external combustion engine. 2 Charles Parson built the first reaction turbine. 3 Impulse turbines have alternate rows of nozzles and moving blades. 5 The steam flow enters the turbine through the stationary parts of the engine. 7 As steam expands, its velocity is increased. 10 In reaction turbines, steam expands partially in the moving blades. 11 In impulse turbines, steam pressure is reduced in the nozzles. Ex 9 Explain the differences in their construction by looking at the diagrams and filling in the gaps in the following passage. The impulse turbine has a steam distributor called a 1 nozzle, which deflects the steam flow onto a row of 2 moving/rotor blades. In the impulse turbine, steam expands in the nozzle, where steam 3 pressure is reduced but its 4 velocity is increased. The reaction turbine has both 5 fixed

(stationary) and moving blades. The fixed blades deflect the steam 6 flow onto the moving blades. In this kind of turbine steam expands in both sets of 7 blades. Ex 10 After reading the next passage, study the picture showing a steam propulsion unit, and identify the parts of the engine listed below. Then compare the picture to the photograph that shows a similar power unit. 1 steam inlet to HP turbine 2 HP turbine 3 pipeline between HP and LP turbine 4 LP turbine 5 reduction gearing 6 condenser Ex 11 Fill in the gaps in the following table referring to the Tosi propulsion unit. A

B

Construction period

1970s

Number of container ships using the Tosi unit 8 Total power output of HP and LP turbines

28,500 W

Ship’s maximum velocity

26 knots

Propeller rotation with a Tosi unit

120 rpm 62 t/h

Boilers produce Boiler pressure

61.4 bar

Boiler temperature

513°

Ex 12 Before you take a look at the world’s only turbine-driven car (Batman’s car!), revise what you remember about the advantages of a turbine engine by choosing the correct alternative. Advantages of a turbine engine: 1 They have a greater power output. 2 They need very little maintenance. 3 They use less lubricating oil than diesel engines. Project Work Have you heard of the Batmobile? Bruce Wayne (Batman) used to drive a turbinepowered Batmobile! Use this link to see an actual working version of the Batmobile and then see if the inventor states the same advantages for his Batmobile, completing the missing information in the table. http://www.toddcooperider.com/theworlds-only-turbine-powered-batmobileby-putsch-racing/

61

02_KeysExercises.indd 61

25-03-2013 14:49:29

Teacher’s book

Batmobile Power output 365hp (compared to a Dodge Viper sportscar)* Maintenance

Less than a normal car.

Lubricating oil Oil lasts longer than in a normal piston engine. *If you are interested use this link to find out the top speed of a Dodge Viper: http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Dodge_Viper

Top speed: 296km/h The Batmobile uses a Drone Attack helicopter engine. Who pilots the Drone Attack helicopter? Nobody, it is unmanned.

Unit 30

The inert gas system Ex 1 Answer the questions. 1 An “inert gas” is a gas which does not allow a chemical reaction to take place. 2 Carbon dioxide, nitrogen and other combustion gases containing less than 8% of oxygen are inert gases. 3 Above 8%. A percentage of oxygen below 8% is unable to feed the combustion process. Ex 2 Answer the questions. 1 The main danger on board crude oil tankers is the danger of accidental fires and explosions. 2 Crude oil and petroleum products release hydrocarbon vapours. 3 When these hydrocarbon vapours are mixed with air, they form an explosive mixture. 4 If a static discharge is accidentally released, the air and vapour mixture can catch fire. 5 The SOLAS convention, in Chapter II. 6 The safest method for avoiding accidental fires and explosions in crude oil cargo tanks consists in replacing the atmospheric air in these tanks with inert gas. This contains such a low percentage of oxygen that combustion is impossible. 7 Because an oxygen percentage below 8% does not allow a combustion process to take place. 8 Inert gas is produced in special plants on board ship. 9 It is obtained from the treatment of exhaust gases from a complete combustion of hydrocarbons. 10 The gas produced in these generating

plants must be the purest possible compound of nitrogen and carbon dioxide. Ex 3 Try to put these scrambled sentences in the correct order to make up a paragraph about inert gases. 1c, 2g, 3a, 4e, 5f, 6b, 7d The main danger on board oil tankers and chemical carriers is the eventuality of accidental fires and explosions in the cargo tanks. Crude oil and petroleum by-products release hydrocarbon vapours which can easily catch fire when they are mixed with air. For example, they can be set on fire by an accidental static discharge. The safest method for avoiding accidental fires and explosions in crude oil cargo tanks is to replace the atmospheric air in these tanks with inert gas. While atmospheric air contains a percentage of oxygen around 20%, the inert gas used to fill the cargo tanks contains an oxygen percentage around 5%. This is too little oxygen to feed a combustion process. This inert gas, produced in special generating plants on board ship, is obtained from the treatment of exhaust gases and must contain mainly nitrogen and carbon dioxide. Ex 4 Answer the questions. 1 The main uses of inert gas are to prevent explosions and fires and also to fight corrosion and oxidation of certain goods. 2 Inert gas is used in the pharmaceutical and food industries, it can be also found in the steel and aluminium furnaces of the engineering industries, and it is used in the refineries and chemical/petrochemical factories. 3 Bulk carriers and chemical carriers. 4 Ships which carry flammable cargoes: oil tankers, OBO ships, gas and chemical carriers. 5 The oxygen percentage of the inert gas on board chemical and gas carriers is 0.5%. This oxygen percentage is lower than that required for oil tankers because they carry a lighter and more volatile type of hydrocarbon.

62

02_KeysExercises.indd 62

25-03-2013 14:49:29

key to unit exercises

6 Because they need to use an inert gas saturated with water vapour. Ex 5 Complete the following sentences after reading paragraph 3. 1 Inert gas is also used against corrosion and cargo oxidation. 2 It is used in different types of industrial plants which produce flammable products, for example, in oil refineries and in the chemical industry. 3 It can be found on board ships which carry goods that can be oxidised on contact with the air. 4 It is obligatory for ships which carry

inflammable cargoes, like crude oil tankers and chemical carriers.

5 The oxygen percentage can range between 0.5% (chemical and gas carriers) to 5% (oil tankers). 6 The humidity value can vary: dehumidified gas for chemical and gas carries, saturated with water vapour for oil tankers and OBO carriers. Ex 6 Complete the following notes about the main purposes of inert gas. 1 Replace the air in cargo tanks to make the atmosphere inert. 2 Keep the cargo space under pressure, so that oxygen cannot enter the tanks during the unloading operations. 3 Clean and keep out inflammable gases from pipelines and tanks. 4 Cleaning the cargo tanks atmosphere before ventilation with fresh air, to allow

inspection and maintenance work to be carried out.

Ex 7 Answer the questions. 1 In the scrubbing tower the exhaust gases pass under jets of seawater, which cool them down and remove the nitrous and sulphur oxides. 2 Since the gases are saturated with water vapour when they leave the tower, they pass through special demister filters, which absorb the water moisture. 3 The compressor compresses the gases to the desired pressure. 4 The oxygen analyser continuously controls the oxygen content of the gas. It is often connected to audible and visual alarms, which are activated when the oxygen level rises above the desired value.

5 The deck water seal prevents any back flow of hydrocarbon gases into the system when this is not in operation. 6 When the system is not in operation, seawater rises through the gas inlet, preventing any back-flow of cargo gases into the system. 7 The pressure-vacuum breaker regulates the inert gas pressure in the system so that it is maintained constant. 8 When the gas pressure is too high, the water mixture in the cylinder rises up and forces the excess gas out into the atmosphere. Project Work 1. Use this link http://www.aalborgindustries.com/business_areas/inert.php to find the answers to the following questions. 1 An inert gas is defined as an inactive gas. 2 A gas or a mixture of gases, such as flue gas, which contain insufficient oxygen to support the combustion of hydrocarbons. 3 Flue gas is another definition for exhaust gases. 4 Heat, fuel and oxygen. 5 Take away one of the elements in the fire triangle. 6 Reducing the oxygen content in a tank to below 8% by addition of inert gas. 2. Now watch the Inert Gas System animation movie: http://www.aalborg-industries.com/press_ room/showroom.php?path=film_IGS and try to recognise the main parts of the system that you have studied in this unit. 1 Five. 2 Scrubber unit, inert gas fans, deck water seal unit, cargo tank, P/V breaker. 3 It is cylindrical. 4 From bottom left. 5 From top right. 6 Next it goes to the fans. 7 They give pressure to the gas. 8 To prevent back flow from the cargo tanks side. 9 At the top, above the cargo level, to fill in any empty space between the cargo and the top of the tank, so that no hydrocarbon vapours can go up. 10 It prevents over pressure and over vacuum in cargo tanks.

63

02_KeysExercises.indd 63

25-03-2013 14:49:29

Teacher’s book

Unit 31

The GMDSS Ex 1 Answer the questions. 1 It was introduced in 1988. 2 It became fully operational in 1999. 3 The GMDSS makes use of satellite communication systems and terrestrial radio systems. 4 It is called a global system because it operates everywhere in the world. 5 Ships nearby and land-based communication and rescue stations. 6 MRCC are Maritime Rescue and Coordination Centres. Ex 2 Reorder the sentences given in scrambled order describing what happens when a distress call is sent. 1d, 2a, 3c, 4e, 5b Ex 3 Match each acronym with its meaning. 1e, 2d, 3f, 4g, 5h, 6c, 7b, 8a Ex 4 Mark the following statements as True or False and correct the false ones. 1F–2T–3F–4F–5F–6T–7T–8F 1 GMDSS is obligatory for vessels over 300 Gross Tonnes. 3 Vessels over 500 GT must carry 2 SARTs. 4 Two sets of portable VHF transceivers must be carried on survival craft under 500GT. 5 Radio installations need to transmit on different frequencies. 8 An EPIRB is an Emergency Position Indicating Radio Beacon. Ex 5 Listen to complete the information. In the GMDSS, Digital 1 Selective Calling (DSC) is used to automate the transmission and 2 reception of distress alerts sent via terrestrial Medium, 3 High and Very High Frequency (MF, HF and 4 VHF) radio. A DSC alert is normally followed by radiotelephone 5 communications between the vessel in distress and coast stations or other 6 ships which have received the call. The DSC transmitter-receiver automatically includes in every message the identity with the 7 MMSI number of the calling ship. The DSC unit stores 8 four different types of message according to their level of priority. These may be distress, 9 urgency, safety or routine calls. At the coast station, ship-to-shore distress calls receive priority

handling and are routed to the nearest Rescue Coordination Centre (RCC). On board ship, DSC receivers sound an 10 alarm when a distress call is received. Ex 6 Match each phrase on the left with a phrase on the right to make complete sentences. 1h, 2e, 3j, 4i, 5c, 6l, 7a, 8f, 9d, 10b, 11k,12g Ex 7 Choose the correct option. 1a, 2c, 3a, 4c, 5b Ex 8 Complete the table about ships’ radio equipment with the information taken from the following paragraph 6. Sea areas

Distance from the coast

Sea Sea Sea Sea

20-30 nautical miles 100-150 nautical miles over 150 miles outside areas A1, A2, A3 (polar regions)

Area A1 Area A2 area A3 Area A4

Within range of radio Radio equipment required station coverage on board

VHF coast station MF coast station MF/HF coast station, Inmarsat land station

HF coast station

VHF radio installation VHF and MF radio installation VHF and MF/HF radio installation,

Inmarsat Earth station and NBDP VHF, MF, HF radio installation, and NBDP

Project Work 1. See what the NAVTEX receiver looks like. Read the information regarding the Real Features and answer the following questions: a An international service of telegraphy. b Warnings, weather reports and MSI. c 518KHz. 2. See what the Inmarsat C system looks like. Read the information regarding the “Features of the real system” and answer the following questions: a Two-way data communications anywhere in the world. b It is designed to be simple, small and low-cost. c About 40. 3. See what the EPIRB looks like. Read the information regarding how it works and complete the sentences with the missing words. a In an emergency, the radio beacon EPIRB is activated 1 manually or 2 automatically.

64

02_KeysExercises.indd 64

25-03-2013 14:49:29

key to unit exercises

b The EPIRB transmits an 3 “emergency code” and activates the strobe (flash) indicating that it is operating. c The signal is received by a COPAS-SARSAT 4 satellite and sent to the nearest 5 station. d The station computes the 6 location of the EPIRB and decodes the 7 identification code. e The rescue station uses the identification code to determine the 8 type of vessel, its owner, 9 size, and emergency contacts. 10 Rescue Centers are contacted and alerted to start the rescue operation.

f 11 SAR agencies locate the EPIRB using the accurate 12 position information, the 13 121.5 MHz signal and the 14 strobe light emitted from the beacon EPIRB.

Unit 32

Integrated navigation Ex 1 Answer the questions. 1 The IBS is the Integrated Bridge System. 2 The various electronic instruments on board ship are connected in a computer network. 3 It collects, processes, integrates incoming information and distributes it back to all components of the system. 4 On the display at the primary navigation workstation. 5 So that in the case of failure, instruments may still be operated separately. Ex 2 Match each term with its definition. 1g, 2f, 3a, 4b, 5e, 6c, 7d Ex 3 Reorder the following sentences. 1c, 2e, 3a, 4d, 5b Ex 4 Mark the following statements as True or False, underline and correct the mistakes in the false ones. 1T–2F–3F–4T–5F–6F 2 The automatic pilot receives the ship’s position from the gyrocompass. 3 An alarm is activated when the ship deviates from the planned track. 5 Wind and sea currents set the ship off track very often. 6 A hydraulic mechanism connects the ATP to the ship’s rudder.

Ex 5 Match each phrase on the left with a phrase on the right to make complete sentences. 1d, 2c, 3e, 4a, 5b Ex 6 See what the following equipment is used for and note down its function. NAVTEX – Automatic receiver and recorder

for navigational and meteorological warning purpose Speed log – Speed and distance indicator Automatic pilot – Automatic track-keeping system Echo sounding equipment – Depth water indicators with adjustment controls Anemometer – Wind direction and velocity indicator GPS – Position fixing electronic systems Gyro and magnetic compass – Heading indicators Ex 7 Match each kind of equipment with its function. 1b, 2c, 3a

Ex 8 There are several mistakes in the following description of the BNWAS. Underline the mistakes, then listen and correct them. A Bridge Navigational Watch Alarm System (BNWAS) is a series of audible and visual alarms. The ship’s main navigational sensors are connected to the alarm system. In the case of danger to navigation the alarm system alerts the OOW. The OOW must always acknowledge the alarm by silencing sound alarms, setting visual alarms to steady and obviously doing something to put the problem right. If the OOW does not reply to the alarm, then the Captain or another OOW is alerted. The BNWAS also allows the OOW to call for immediate help. Ex 9 Answer the questions. 1 Close to the forward centre window of the bridge. 2 So that they can perform their main tasks and avoid any collisions. 3 Its manoeuvring state. 4 Rudder angle, propeller revolutions, engine revolutions and bow-thruster blades direction and pitch. 5 To steer the ship according to the direction and speed required. Ex 10 Fill in the gaps. 1 ECDIS stands for Electronic Chart Display and Information System. 2 ENCs are Electronic Navigational Charts.

65

02_KeysExercises.indd 65

25-03-2013 14:49:29

Teacher’s book

3 The ECDIS will become mandatory on international voyages between 2012 and 2018. 4 Official ENCs are produced by Hydrographic Offices. 5 S-57/3 is the Standard regulating content, structure and format of ENCs. 6 Scanned versions of paper charts are called “Raster Charts”. 7 The official ENC format is a vector format. 8 Vector charts are formed of many different “layers”. 9 Vector charts provide many additional details like depth and navigational details. 10 Using ECDIS is completely different from using paper charts. Ex 11 Listen and fill in the gaps to learn how the navigator should proceed. How to plan a route on an ECDIS 1 Before commencing a passage 1 plan the navigator must firstly ensure that the vessel has all the ENC charts (called cells) needed for the 2 voyage, and secondly that these are up to date with the 3 latest corrections that are supplied, either by CD ROM or via an 4 Internet connection. 2 The next thing that the navigator needs to do is to enter his ship’s 5 draft into the ECDIS and establish the safety contour based on draft and the required Under 6 Keel Clearance (UKC). Since most ENC have pre-set contour data, typically at 5 m intervals, if your vessel has a draft of 7 6 m the display will default to the next 8 deepest contour of 10 m. All areas of less than 10 m will be shown as 9 blue and areas deeper than 10 m will be displayed as 10 white. As long as the ship remains in the white area, she is safe.

contained by the following parameters: in 16 depth, by the safety contour and safety depth; in forward extent, by the look-ahead time or look-ahead range; in lateral closeness by a specified 17 distance. Once the safety parameters are set, the ECDIS will trigger 18 alarms any time the ship crosses the safety domain. Ex 12 Before we go on listening, check your answers and put the first five steps in planning a route in the correct order. 1d, 2e, 3b, 4c, 5a Now go on listening. 5 After the vessel’s dynamic parameters have been set, the passage plan can be created. By putting in the departure and arrival points, the ECDIS can instantaneously offer a Great Circle or Rhumb line route or a combination of both. The ECDIS will identify any obstructions along the route and alert the navigator to charted features such as traffic separation zones, restricted areas, anchorages, etc. It will also alert the navigator to any parts of the plan that are outside the safety domain parameters. The navigator can then move the waypoints (points where the ship changes direction along the track), and re-check the outline route.

3 In addition to the safety contour, for your ship’s draft of 6 m you can set a safety 11 depth of 8 m. In this case, if the navigator sets the ECDIS to display depths, then all depths of 12 less than 8 m will show in bold type and those deeper than 8 m will be a pale 13 grey. This means that a depth of 9 m – although within the 10 m blue safety contour – will be 14 displayed in pale grey text, while a depth of 7 m will be displayed in bold black.

6 Once the outline passage has been established, it is then essential to check the whole route in detail using the zooming and scrolling facilities. This process must be done with extreme care, because many chart features such as submarine cables are hidden on the different layers of the ENC. Also, essential detailed information, such as notes referring to precautionary areas, needs to be accessed and analysed for relevance, by means of clicking on the ! symbol to obtain the “pick report” relating to the feature. This pick report is one of the most essential tasks during planning because there are some confusing new symbols when compared to the paper chart. Traditional symbols have been replaced by a new symbology by default, but the familiar object display can be set through the menu.

4 After that, the navigator has to 15 input the parameters for beam clearance and set up a safety domain. The ECDIS allows users to specify a safety domain for the vessel,

7 The ECDIS calculates the course and the distance between the WPs and plots the course. The ship’s heading is represented by a vector line with an arrowhead (the

66

02_KeysExercises.indd 66

25-03-2013 14:49:29

keys to unit exercises

red line in the picture). The route is usually displayed as an orange line. 8 Once the plan has been completed and fully verified, save it on the ECDIS unit. You can finally export the passage plan to the primary navigation workstation. The ECDIS alarms sound any time a waypoint approaches, if the vessel wanders off track the predetermined route, if it crosses the pre-set safety domain or if it approaches a shoal or other charted hazards. Ex 13 Answer the following questions. 1 Your departure and arrival points. 2 Points where the ship changes direction. 3 Zooming and scrolling facilities. 4 You get a “pick report” of a feature. 5 Symbology. 6 By a vector line with an arrowhead. 7 By an orange line. 8 You save it. Ex 14 Now put all the steps in planning a route in the correct order. Don’t forget to use the 5 steps from Ex 12. 1 Check that you have the necessary up-todate ENC charts. 2 Enter your own ship’s draft and establish a safety contour based on your draft.

3 Enter a safety depth. 4 Enter beam clearance. 5 Establish a safety domain. 6 Create your passage plan. 7 Check your whole route in detail. 8 Visualise your route. 9 Save your route and export it to the workstation. Project Work Use this link to see what an AIS display looks like and fill in the AIS data from the tug Texan. http://www.navcen.uscg.gov/ images/WhatYouSeeWithAIS.jpg Ship’s Name

Texan

Call sign MMSI number Latitude Longitude Range Bearing Nav status Length Beam Type of ship Hazardous cargo Time since last update Draft ETA to destination

WDB4969 366904340 29°20’33.95”N 094° 49’ 36.58”W 2.542 Nm 264.8° Under Way Engine 16.0 m 8.0 m TUG N/A 00h 01m 15s 0.0 N/A

67

02_KeysExercises.indd 67

25-03-2013 14:49:30

Teacher’s book

Grammar – Key to exercises 1 VERBI ORDINARI E AUSILIARI 1.1 Studia la tabella e rispondi alle domande. • Simple present - Si aggiunge il suffisso -s • Simple past/Past participle - Si aggiunge il suffisso -ed 1.3 Ex 1 Coniuga i verbi tra parentesi nella forma corretta. 1 Diesel engines do not use spark plugs but fuel injectors. 2 Are rotary pumps faster than centrifugal pumps? 3 Have tankers got an inert gas system on board? 4 Cast iron is not as strong as iron. 5 Does a strain filter drain the lubricating oil? 6 Petrol engines haven’t got fuel injectors. 7 Does the connecting rod connect the piston and the crankshaft? 8 The Titanic did not have a GMSS system. 9 The reciprocating steam engine is not an internal combustion engine. 10 Has your car got a catalytic exhaust system? 1.4 L’ordine degli elementi della frase. Frase affermativa: soggetto – verbo – oggetto – altri complementi Frase negativa: soggetto – ausiliare – NOT – verbo – oggetto – altri complementi Frase interrogativa: ausiliare – soggetto – verbo – oggetto 1.5 Ex 2 Correggi l’errore in ciascuna frase. 1 Pumps are divided into three types. 2 A water tube boiler has a number of water drums. 3 Titanic was a cruise liner. 4 A centrifugal pump consists of an impeller which rotates in a casing. 5 What does a filter do? 6 The diagrams show a lubricating oil pump. 7 Bulk carriers carry loose cargo. 8 Oil passes through a centrifuge for purification. 9 There are two main types of piston engine. 10 There is a steam drum at the top of the boiler.

1.6 Ex 3 Trova il pronome soggetto mancante e inseriscilo nelle frasi. 1 John and Jenny are teachers, they live next door. 2 I’m studying history. It is a boring subject! 3 My father works at the hospital. He is a doctor. 4 Our teachers are good, but they give us a lot of homework. 5 When Sally was at school, she played in a football team. 6 Fossil fuels are the most common fuels, but they are running out. 7 Steam is produced in a boiler, then it is sent into the turbine. 8 The heat engine is a prime mover, because it transforms heat into mechanical work. 1.7 Ex 4 Collega ciascuna question word con la sua risposta. A2 – B8 – C7 – D1 – E3 – F6 – G4 – H5 1.8 Adesso completa la regola. • Quando who, what, which, how much, how many sono i soggetti della frase interrogativa, non richiedono l’ausiliare do (does/did). • Quando who, what, which, how much, how many sono il complemento oggetto in una domanda con un verbo ordinario, richiedono l’ausiliare do/does/did. Ex 5 Ricostruisci le domande nello schema e ricordati di coniugare i verbi accordandoli con i soggetti. 1 How many people work in the Engine

Room?

2 Which refining process separates the

hydrocarbons in petrol?

3 Who commands the ship? 4 How much steam expands in the moving

blades of a reaction turbine?

5 What causes the greenhouse effect? Ex 6 Formula le domande per le risposte date. 1 What do boilers produce? 2 What did Lavoisier discover? 3 Who plots the chart? 4 Who does the ship’s Captain represent? 5 Which engine uses electricity? 6 How much petrol does your car’s engine consume? 7 How much water flows in a condenser’s tubes?

68

02_KeysExercises.indd 68

25-03-2013 14:49:30

grammar - key to exercises

8 How many documents does a ship carry? 9 How many winds blow in Europe? 10 Which car goes faster? 1.9 Ex 7 Riscrivi le frasi usando l’infinito di scopo. 1 Henry went to Canterbury to visit the Cathedral. 2 Jack phoned the hotel to book a room. 3 Pat is going to Italy next month to learn Italian. 4 I stayed at home yesterday to clean my flat. 5 Safety valves are fitted in a boiler to allow excess steam to escape outside the boiler. 6 Stop valves are fitted on the pipe-line to control the passage of steam to the engine. 7 The ship’s Captain increased speed to arrive on time. 8 A high rate of evaporation in the boiler is essential to generate large quantities of steam.

2 La forma passiva 2.5 Ex 1 Completa la forma passiva delle frasi inserendo il participio passato dei verbi irregolari riportati nella tabella. 1 St Paul’s Cathedral was built in London in the 17th century. 2 My computer is made in Japan. 3 Ivanhoe was written by Walter Scott. 4 Paella is made of fish, vegetables and rice. 5 These ferries are built in Naples. 6 The two cars over there are made in Germany. 7 Hamlet was written by William Shakespeare. 8 This tanker was built in six months. Ex 2 Riscrivi le frasi nella forma passiva, eliminando i soggetti they, we che non sono rilevanti. 1 Every engine car is checked thoroughly. 2 The bread is wrapped automatically. 3 This computer is exported to seven different countries. 4 The thieves were arrested last night. 5 Yesterday’s meeting was cancelled. 6 The water was pumped out of the bilge. Ex 3 Riscrivi il paragrafo trasformando i verbi in forma passiva. The ship’s course must be planned before

starting the journey. All kinds of nautical charts are studied in advance, this means that any marked dangers are avoided. Weather reports are also received. All this information is collected and analysed and the best course is chosen. The starting and arrival points are marked on the chart and the course is plotted. The junction points are also planned in advance and indicated on the chart. The planned course is shown as a broken line. Ex 4 Rispondi alle domande del quiz usando la forma passiva e scegliendo la risposta giusta tra quelle elencate. 1 It was built by Etienne Lenoir. 2 It was discovered by Alexander Fleming. 3 It is called the English Channel. 4 It was invented by the Sumerians. 5 It was built by George Stephenson. 6 It was discovered by Antoine Lavoisier. 7 It was opened in 1994. 8 It was launched in 1912. Ex 5 Formula le domande del quiz usando la forma passiva in base alle risposte. Ricorda però che le risposte non sono nella sequenza giusta. 1E – 2G – 3F – 4D – 5A – 6C – 7B

3 I verbi modali 3.4 Ex 1 Completa le frasi con can/can’t, must/ mustn’t, could/couldn’t. 1 You mustn’t cross the street when the light is red. 2 I can’t come right now, I must do the washing up. 3 In Italy you can get a divorce now, you couldn’t till 1970. 4 You can go out with your friends but you must be back at 10.30. 5 Yesterday it was a bright day and you could see as far as the coast from here. 6 You can visit the museum free on Sundays. 7 The address you wrote must be wrong: this can’t be Lucy’s house! 8 There is a new tax: you must pay to get into Venice! Ex 2 Completa le frasi con may, might, should/shouldn’t. 1 If the train is late, George might not arrive in time. 2 What should I do to lose weight? You shouldn’t eat so much spaghetti! 3 The weather forecast says that it may/ might snow in the night.

69

02_KeysExercises.indd 69

25-03-2013 14:49:30

Teacher’s book

4 Don’t skate on that lake. The ice might/ may break. 5 You shouldn’t go out in this weather. 6 Do you think Liza will pass her driving test? She might/may pass, but she still can’t drive very well. 7 You should visit the British Museum when you go to London. 8 My nephew enjoys maths. He may study engineering at university. Ex 3 Ciascuna delle frasi contiene un errore. Trovalo e correggilo. 1 The new cruise ship should be ready by next June. 2 Excuse me, may I close the window? 3 They should work harder. 4 You must not forget to learn new vocabulary. 5 Concorde can fly at the speed of sound. 6 I might go to France on holiday next year (Togliere “definitely” che esprime una certezza) 7 Would you like a cup of coffee? 8 Work on the new model will begin next week. 9 You mustn’t walk on that bridge. It’s not safe. 10 Before operating the machinery, you should/must check the pressure level.

4 SOSTANTIVI NUMERABILI E NON NUMERABILI 4.4 Ex.1 Classifica i sostantivi in countables o in uncountables. Countable nouns Uncountable nouns

car mobile phone computer ship plane condenser pipeline tanker

steel oil petroleum equipment oxygen information gas coffee

5 USO DEGLI ARTICOLI 5.3 Ex 1 Completa le frasi inserendo gli articoli mancanti a, an, the. Ricorda però che in alcuni casi in inglese non si usa nessun articolo. 1 The new student’s name is Carlo. 2 Is there a language laboratory in your school? 3 I like rock music but I hate disco music.

4 I haven’t got a pen. Can I use a pencil? 5 Have you got a piano? No, I can’t play the piano. 6 The sun comes up in the east and goes down in the west. 7 I have lessons in the morning and in the afternoon. 8 Sarah’s dog is horrible. 9 Can’t you see Doctor Brown? He’s next to Mrs Robinson. 10 Are you interested in football? Ex 2 Inserisci gli articoli mancanti a, an, the nelle frasi. Ricorda che in alcuni casi in inglese non si usa nessun articolo. 1 Colliers are designed to carry coal. The coal is carried in bulk. 2 There was oil floating on the water. 3 There is a container ship in the port. 4 Cagliari is the most important port in Sardinia. 5 An electric motor operates the bilge pump. 6 There were cadets on board. 7 An oil tanker is a ship which carries crude oil. 8 The Titanic was the largest cruise ship of her time. Ex 3 Ricorda l’uso dell’articolo determinativo the con i nomi geografici e collega i nomi della colonna di destra con quelli di sinistra, come nell’esempio. 1 The Isle of Wight is in the English Channel. 2 The Shetland Isles are in the North Sea. 3 The Rocky Mountains are in the USA. 4 Ben Nevis is in Scotland. 5 The Falkland Isles are in the Atlantic Ocean. 6 Samoa is in the Pacific Ocean. 7 Sardinia is in the Tirrenian Sea. 8 Lake Victoria is in Africa. 9 The Thames is in England. 10 Wales is in Great Britain. 11 Mount Everest is in Nepal.

6 Avverbi derivati dagli aggettivi Ex 1 Completa lo schema scrivendo accanto agli aggettivi la forma corretta degli avverbi. slow slowly fair fairly beautiful beautifully easy easily angry angrily quick quickly immediate immediately cheap cheaply sad sadly

70

02_KeysExercises.indd 70

25-03-2013 14:49:30

grammar - key to exercises

Ex 2 Aggettivo o avverbio? Inserisci gli aggettivi o gli avverbi. 1 The journey was very slow. 2 We travelled slowly in the fog. 3 Harris is a careful driver. 4 He drives his car very carefully. 5 The test was easy. 6 Jane passed the exam easily. 7 Grrr! I’m angry! 8 Jane spoke angrily to her sister this morning. 9 Be quiet! 10 Jane went quietly upstairs when she heard a strange noise.

7 I PRONOMI RELATIVI 7.3 Ex 1 Sostituisci nelle frasi that con i pronomi who o which. 1 What’s the name of the village which is over there? 2 My family prefer to have friends who come from our hometown. 3 The colibri is a small bird which weighs two grams. 4 The girl who opened the shop is Joan. 5 Who’s got an umbrella which opens automatically? 6 I know a man who can’t drink beer. Ex 2 Completa le frasi con il pronome relativo soltanto quando è obbligatorio. 1 The book I bought for you is in this parcel. 2 Here are the pens you lost this morning. 3 We have a compass that alway points south. 4 These are the teachers we saw at school. 5 They like clothes which/that are very big for them. 6 He met the people who stayed at this hotel. 7 The film we saw last night was very funny. 8 The photos your sister took are very good.

8 Gli aggettivi qualificativi e i gradi dell’aggettivo e dell’avverbio 8.2 In cosa differiscono gli aggettivi e gli avverbi presenti nelle colonne A e B? • Prendono il suffisso in -er gli aggettivi e avverbi monosillabici.

•G  li aggettivi e avverbi che sono polisillabici si fanno precedere da more. 8.7 Ex 1 Alcuni tra gli aggettivi inglesi più comuni prendono i suffissi per formare il comparativo e il superlativo di maggioranza. Completa la tabella. Comparative Superlative fat fatter than the fattest of all nice nicer than the nicest of all smaller the smallest small large larger the largest light lighter the lightest heavy heavier the heaviest thin thinner the thinnest quicker the quickest quick slow slower the slowest big bigger the biggest good better the best bad worse the worst high higher the highest low lower the lowest Ex 2 Forma il comparativo e il superlativo di maggioranza di questi aggettivi. Comparative Superlative more difficult the most difficult

expensive more expensive more careful careful clever more clever intelligent more intelligent fashionable more fashionable modern more modern

difficult the most expensive the most careful the most clever the most intelligent the most fashionable the most modern

Ex 3 Riscrivi le frasi in modo tale che il secondo termine di paragone introdotto da than risulti a inizio frase, senza però cambiare il senso della frase; devi perciò sostituire gli aggettivi presenti con aggettivi di opposto significato. 1 A statute mile is shorter than a nautical mile. 2 England is cooler than Sardinia. 3 Petrol engines are more expensive to run than diesel engines. 4 A jumbo jet is slower than Concorde. 5 Petrol is lighter than diesel fuel. 6 Ferries are usually smaller than tankers.

71

02_KeysExercises.indd 71

25-03-2013 14:49:30

Teacher’s book

Ex 4 Riscrivi le frasi usando not so/as ... as, senza però cambiare il senso della frase. 1 England is not as warm as Sardinia. 2 The White Star was not as fast as the Titanic. 3 100 °F is not as hot as 100 °C. 4 Petrol engines are not so cheap to run as diesel engines. 5 Ben Nevis is not as high as Snowdon. Ex 5 Scegli l’alternativa corretta. 1A ­– 2A – 3B – 4C – 5B – 6A

9 CONGIUNZIONI 9.1 Ex 1 Abbina l’inizio di ogni frase con la conclusione corretta. BECAUSE 1C – 2A – 3D – 4B SO 1C – 2D – 3A – 4B 9.2 Ex 2 Riscrivi le frasi usando le congiunzioni: both... and e either... or in modo appropriato. 1 OBO ships carry both liquid and dry cargo. 2 Piston pumps pump either water or lowviscosity liquids. 3 Gear-wheel pumps are used to pump either lubricating or fuel oils. 4 A cadet can train as either a Deck Officer or an Engineer Officer. 5 Both piston engines and gas turbines are internal combustion engines. 6 GMDSS uses both satellite and conventional radio communication systems. 7 Sailors can use either a compass or a sextant to calculate their position. 8 IMO deals with both safety’ conventions and Officers’ training. 9 Ship piston engines can either be operated with diesel or heavy oil. 10 Centrifugal pumps pump either water or liquids with solid particles in suspension.

9.3 Ex 3 Riscrivi le coppie di frasi unendole con le congiunzioni suggerite. 1 Since/as diesel engines have to contain higher pressures than petrol engines, they are stronger than petrol engines. 2 Combustion engines make use of thermal energy, therefore they are known as heat engines. 3 Oil companies drill many exploration wells, however not many of these wells are worth developing. 4 Watt invented the first steam engine in 1765, although the first attempts at developing the heat engine took place around the end of the 17th century. 5 Engine types and sizes vary considerably since/as they are designed for many purposes. 6 Combustion occurs continuously in a gas turbine, therefore they eliminate the three idle strokes of the piston engine.

10 PREPOSIZIONI E AVVERBI DI LUOGO 10.2 Ex 1 Osserva il disegno, poi completa le istruzioni con le preposizioni mancanti. 1 You are 1 in the hold of the ship, 2 between the boxes and the rope. 2 Go 3 up the ladder on the 4 left. You are now 5 in the cabin. 3 6 In front of you there is a sea-chest. Open it and take 7 out the key. 4 Turn 8 right and pass 9 through the saloon, walk 10 across the corridor and go 11 into the galley. 5 12 On the shelf there is a box. Open it with your key and take the flag 13 out of the box. 6 Now turn 14 left and climb 15 up the ladder. You are now 16 on the main deck. 7 Turn left and walk 17 under the superstructure, go and stand 18 next to the flag-post.

72

02_KeysExercises.indd 72

25-03-2013 14:49:30

UNIT testS

Unit tests Class

Date

......................

Student

.................................

..............................................................................................................

Unit 1 Test – The main parts of a ship Ex 1 Complete the crossword. One definition has been inserted to help you. 1

2



ACROSS

3

4

2. The fore end of the ship. 5. The after end of the ship. 6. Left side of the ship. 7. The main body (or shell) of the ship. 8. It completely covers the hull. 9. The middle part of the ship.

5

6

7

H

U

L

L



DOWN

1. The immersed part of the hull. 8 3. Line on the side of the ship, parallel to the water. 4. The right side of the ship. 9

Ex 2 Write the names of the parts of a ship to label the diagram.

Item 5 has been inserted as an example.



1 2

3





8

4

4

6

6

9

9

5 E.R. 9



4

4

6

6 9

7

1. ............................................................................................... 2. ............................................................................................... 3. ............................................................................................... 4. ............................................................................................... 5. Engine Room 6. ............................................................................................... 7. ............................................................................................... 8. ............................................................................................... 9. ...............................................................................................

Ex 3 Refer to the ship diagram in Ex 2 and complete the sentences using once each of the following words. forward – aft – above – below – abeam – amidships 1 The bridge superstructure is ................................................................ of the forecastle. 2 Towards the bow is ................................................................. . 3 The bridge superstructure is

................................................................

the main deck.

73

03_Tests Unit.indd 73

21-03-2013 10:54:44

teacher’s book

4 The engine room is located ................................................................ . 5 The holds are situated ................................................................ the ’tween decks. 6 When you go across the ship from side to side you go ................................................................ .

Ex 4 Underline the mistakes in the following sentences and write the corrections

on the dotted lines. 1 The hull is divided horizontally by bulkheads. 2 In a liquid cargo ship, the hull is divided into holds. 3 The double bottom tanks are used to contain fresh water and ballast. 4 The superstructure is the permanent housing below deck. 5 The hull is divided vertically by decks. 6 The part below the surface of the water under the waterline



is known as the upper works.

................................................... ...................................................

.................................................. .................................................. ..................................................

..................................................

Ex 5 Answer the questions by writing complete sentences. 1 What are the central, fore and aft parts of the hull called? 2 What is the central line? 3 What are the two sides of the ship called? 4 What is the waterline? 5 What are the names of the two parts of the hull separated by the waterline? 6 What is the cargo space divided into on dry cargo ships?

74

03_Tests Unit.indd 74

21-03-2013 10:54:44

UNIT testS

Class

......................

Date

.................................

Student

..............................................................................................................

Unit 2 Test – Ships’ measurements and specifications Ex 1 Label the diagrams about the ship’s dimensions.

Aft perpendicular

Fwd perpendicular

Midships

5

Loaded waterline

4

8

7 1

138 m

2

142 m

3

6

146 m

1 …………………………………………………….......... 2 ……………………………………………………..........

5 ……………………………………………………......... 6 ……………………………………………………..........

3 4

7 …………………………………………………….......... 8 ……………………………………………………..........

……………………………………………………......... …………………………………………………….........

Ex 2 Write the definitions. 1 Displacement 2 Deadweight 3 Light displacement 4 Tonnage 5 Gross tonnage 6 Net tonnage

………………………………………………………………………………................................................................. ………………………………………………………………………………................................................................. ………………………………………………………………………………................................................................. ………………………………………………………………………………................................................................. ………………………………………………………………………………................................................................. ……………………………………………………………………………….................................................................

Ex 3 Choose the correct option. 1 a. The load line indicates the legal limit to which the ship can be unloaded. b. The plump line indicates the legal limit to which the ship can be loaded. c. The load line indicates the legal limit to which the ship can be loaded. 2 a. A classification society issues the Load Line Certificate. b. The ship’s master issues the Load Line Certificate. c. The port authority issues the Load Line Certificate. 3 a. Port dues are paid on the basis of the ship’s air draught. b. Port dues are paid on the basis of the ship’s country of registry. c. Port dues are paid on the basis of the ship’s deadweight. 4 a. Deadweight does not refer to any unit of physical measurement. b. Tonnage does not refer to any unit of physical measurement. c. Displacement does not refer to any unit of physical measurement.

75

03_Tests Unit.indd 75

21-03-2013 10:54:45

teacher’s book

5 Indicate which of the following certificates does not exist: a. the Waterline Certificate. b. the Tonnage Certificate. c. the Load Line Certificate.



Ex 4 Underline the mistakes in the following sentences and write the corrections

on the dotted lines. 1 The longest dimension for measuring a ship is the length between perpendiculars.

………………………

2 The extreme breadth is sometimes indicated as the draft.

………………………

3 The depth is the horizontal distance between keel and the main deck.

………………………

4 The freeboard is the vertical distance between the load line and the main deck.

………………………

5 Deadline is the ship’s maximum carrying capacity. 6 Gross tonnage refers to the ship’s earning capacity. 7 If the ship needs the assistance of a pilot, she has to pay towage fees. 8 The International Tonnage Certificate is determined by an IALA formula.

……………………… ……………………… ……………………… ………………………

Ex 5 Complete the specifications chart with the following items. 11,000 kW – 79.40 m – 1,600 t – 1,250 – 12.5 Knots – 4.00 m Ocean Princess 3 Builder Length oa Breadth Draft DWT (Deadweight) GT (Gross tonnage) Main engines output Service speed

Cuthbert & Sons …………………………………………

13.65 m ………………………………………… ………………………………………… ………………………………………… ………………………………………… …………………………………………

76

03_Tests Unit.indd 76

21-03-2013 10:54:45

UNIT testS

Class

......................

Date

Student

.................................

..............................................................................................................

Unit 3 Test – Ship classification Ex 1 Answer the questions by writing complete sentences. 1 What are merchant ships used for? 2 What are the two main categories of merchant ships? 3 What type of passenger ship is in use today? 4 What are the two main categories of cargo ships? 5 What do refrigerated ships carry? 6 On what kind of ships are grain, sugar and similar products carried? 7 What are dredgers used for? 8 What does the notation “unrestricted navigation” mean? 9 What does an OBO ship carry? 10 On what kind of ship is crude oil carried?

Ex 2 Complete the following definitions using the words given in scrambled order. passengers – inland – small – open – variable – less than 6 – lifeboats – considerable – engine – fishing 1 Boats are

………………..................

2 Boats are suitable for

open vessels.

………………..................

3 Boats are suitable for sailing distances 4 Boats are used for 5 Ships are of a

………………..................,

………………..................

6 Ships are propelled by an

………………..................

coastal

nautical miles.

………………..................,

water sports.

size.

………………....................

7 Ships are equipped to carry goods, 8 Ships can sail

navigation.

………………..................

………………..................,

vehicles on the

………………..................

sea.

distances from the coast.

Ex 3 Underline the mistakes in the following sentences and write

the corrections on the dotted lines. 1 Buoyancy is the ship’s capability to sink. 2 Stability is the ship’s capability to lose her balance after being inclined. 3 Impermeability is the ship’s capability to change her course. 4 Sea-kindliness means that the rolling movements of the ship are fast. 5 Variability is the ship’s ability to sail at a given speed. 6 Seaworthy means that the ship is unsuitable for navigation.

……………….................. ……………….................. ……………….................. ……………….................. ……………….................. ………………..................

77

03_Tests Unit.indd 77

21-03-2013 10:54:45

teacher’s book

Ex 4 Fill in the table. 1 The Italian classification authority 2 The …………………………………………………………………………………… 3 International Convention for Safety of Life at Sea 4 …………………………………………………………… indicates 5 The ship’s identity card 6 Distinctive number or letters is also known as 7 ………………………………………………… 8 The …………………………………………………………… indicates

……………………………………………………………

Lloyd’s Register of Shipping ……………………………………………………………

the distance ships can sail from the coast …………………………………………………………… ……………………………………………………………

the ship’s gross and net tonnage the minimum freeboard after loading

78

03_Tests Unit.indd 78

21-03-2013 10:54:45

UNIT testS

Class

......................

Date

.................................

Student

..............................................................................................................

Unit 4 Test – Shipbuilding Ex 1 Rewrite the following sentences in the passive form. a. First they build the keel. b. Finally, they install the superstructure. c. After this, they begin work on building the ship. d. First of all, the classification society approves the working plans. e. Then they erect the side framing and bulkheads. f. Next, they lay out the bottom with its plating. a.

……………………………………………………..........……………………………………………………..........………………………………………….........

b.

……………………………………………………..........……………………………………………………..........………………………………………….........

c. After this, work

……………………………………………………..........……………………………………………………..........………..............

d.

……………………………………………………..........……………………………………………………..........………………………………………….........

e.

……………………………………………………..........……………………………………………………..........………………………………………….........

f.

……………………………………………………..........……………………………………………………..........………………………………………….........

Ex 2 Now put the sentences above in the correct order to indicate the basic building steps. 1..... 2..... 3..... 4..... 5..... 6.....

Ex 3 Complete the text with the missing verbs given in scrambled order. breaking – outfitting – installed – carried – located – delivered – built – building – launching – towed – launched (2) Ships are

………………..................

in shipyards. Shipyards are

sels to be

………………..................

from the

………………..................

………………..................

near the sea to allow ves-

ways. Usually, ships are launched when

about two-thirds are completed. Shortly before ship is

………………..................

………………..................

hull. Then the ship is ………………..................

, the propeller and the engines are

, she is christened by

………………..................

………………..................

………………...................

. As the

a bottle of champagne on her

to the outfitting pier, where the

………………..................

out. Next the ship is taken for a trial trip, then she is finally

work is

………………..................

to

the owner.

Ex 4 Match each term with its definition. 1 combination framing

a. This protects the ship’s rudder and propeller.

2 longitudinal framing

b. It forms the bow.

79

03_Tests Unit.indd 79

21-03-2013 10:54:45

teacher’s book

3 the keel c. They support the deck plating. 4 the frames d. This is a longitudinal structural section at the bottom of the ship. 5 the beams and bulkheads e. With this building system, the hull structure has longitudinal frames. 6 the stem f. These are a series of ribs making up the ship’s sides. 7 the stern post g. The bottom and decks are longitudinally framed, the sides, the bow and the stern are transversely framed. 1..... 2..... 3..... 4..... 5..... 6..... 7.....

Ex 5 Answer the questions by writing complete sentences. 1 What does a naval architect do? 2 What does a classification society do? 3 What does outfitting include? 4 What does the owner decide on? 5 What do the qualified surveyors do? 6 Where are ships built? 7 What are double bottoms tested for before the ship is launched? 8 What happens during the trial trip?

80

03_Tests Unit.indd 80

21-03-2013 10:54:45

UNIT testS

Class

......................

Date

.................................

Student

..............................................................................................................

Unit 5 Test – Visual & sound signals and communication codes

Ex 1 Complete the following definitions. 1 IMO stands for 2 An Aldis lamp is used to send 3 To make a sound signal we use 4 Each letter or number is made up of a series of dots and dashes in the 5 Pennant-shaped flags are used to signal 6 The meaning of each flag is indicated in the

………………………………………………............................. ………………………………………………............................. ……………………………………………….............................

………………………………………………............................. ………………………………………………............................. ……………………………………………….............................

Ex 2 Mark the following sentences as True or False,

then underline the mistakes in the false sentences and write the corrections on the dotted lines. 1 T F 2 T F 3 T F 4 T F 5 T F

The most common method of radio communication today is by VHF. Nowadays the Engine Officer is usually responsible for the radio department on board ship. In the past, messages were transmitted by radio telegraphy using the flag code. In case of language difficulties, radio operators can make use of phonetic tables to transmit letters and numbers. The phonetic code for R is ROGER.

6 T F

The main language used for radio communications is Italian.

……………………………………

……………………………………

……………………………………

…………………………………… ……………………………………

……………………………………

Ex 3 Answer the questions. 1 Why is it important to have an International Code at sea? 2 Which organization regulates the use of this code between sailors? 3 What does the International Code contain? 4 What are phonetic tables used for? 5 What does the “O flag” represent? 6 Which language is used for communications between ships of different nationalities today?

81

03_Tests Unit.indd 81

21-03-2013 10:54:45

teacher’s book

Ex 4 Write the full form of these numbers. a. 3,422

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................

b. 1.45

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................

c. 226

.............................................................................................................................................................................................................................

d. 0.37 ............................................................................................................................................................................................................................ e. 22,402 ...................................................................................................................................................................................................................... f. 1,436,000

..............................................................................................................................................................................................................

Ex 5 Listen to your teacher and complete the following document. Name of ship

Call sign

…………………………………………

…………………………………………

…………………………………………

…………………………………………

…………………………… ……………………………

…………………………………………

82

03_Tests Unit.indd 82

21-03-2013 10:54:45

UNIT testS

Class

......................

Date

.................................

Student

..............................................................................................................

Unit 6 Test – The IALA Buoyage System & ship navigation lights Ex 1 Answer the questions by writing complete sentences. 1 What does the acronym IALA stand for? 2 What did the IALA do in 1976? 3 How many types of buoys are included in the present system? List the various types. 4 What characteristics distinguish the different types of buoys? 5 Where do you find buoys and what is their main and general purpose? 6 Is there any type of buoy with vertical stripes? 7 What do special marks indicate? 8 What do lateral marks indicate?

Ex 2 Which is Which? Indicate the correct type of buoy for each purpose. 1 They indicate the position of a hazard to shipping.

..............................................................................

2 They indicate the edges of a channel.

..............................................................................

3 They indicate that there is deep water around them.

..............................................................................

4 They indicate the safe side on which to pass a danger.

..............................................................................

Ex 3 Which is Which? Indicate the correct type of buoy for each type of topmark. 1 They can have a red sphere as a topmark. 2 They have a red can as a topmark.

............................................................................. ..............................................................................

3 Their topmark is two black cones with their bases together. .............................................................................. 4 They have two black spheres as a topmark. .............................................................................. 5 They have a green cone as a topmark. 6 Their topmark is two black cones pointing downwards.

.............................................................................. ..............................................................................

Ex 4 Choose the correct option. 1 They have two yellow bands with a black band in the middle. a. North cardinal Buoys b. East cardinal buoys c. West cardinal buoys 2 They are black over yellow. a. North cardinal buoys b. East cardinal buoys c. West cardinal buoys

83

03_Tests Unit.indd 83

21-03-2013 10:54:45

teacher’s book

3 They can be shaped like a cone. a. Cardinal marks b. Port-hand buoys c. Starboard-hand buoys 4 They can be spherical. a. Cardinal marks b. Safe water marks c. Port-hand buoys 5 They are black with one or more red stripes. a. Port-hand buoys b. Safe water marks c. Isolated danger marks 6 They have red and white stripes. a. Port-hand buoys b. Safe water marks c. Isolated danger marks

Ex 5 Complete the paragraph about ships at night. Vessels which navigate at night must have

..............................................

lights, so that other vessels can

see if there is a danger of collision and take action to avoid it. All vessels show a .................................... light on the right side of the ship (starboard) and a

..............................................

light on the left (port)

side. They must show a .............................................. stern light (behind or astern). The red and green lights mentioned are called

...............................................

. Ships must also show at least one masthead

light on the high mast. Ships which are more than 50 m long must have two ..............................................

lights.

84

03_Tests Unit.indd 84

21-03-2013 10:54:45

UNIT testS

Class

......................

Date

.................................

Student

..............................................................................................................

Unit 7 Test – Geographical coordinates Ex 1 Answer the questions by writing complete sentences. 1 What do we use geographical coordinates for? 2 What divides the Earth into two hemispheres? 3 In which hemisphere is Europe located? 4 What is the Prime Parallel? 5 What is the Prime Meridian? 6 What is the latitude of a place? 7 What is the longitude of a place? 8 What is the latitude of the North Pole? 9 What is the longitude of Greenwich? 10 What is the 180° meridian called and where is it located?

Ex 2 Mark the following sentences as True or False, then underline

the mistakes in the false sentences and write the corrections on the dotted lines. 1 2

T

F

All meridians have the same length.

…………………..........

T

F

Meridians are like the number of degrees in a circumference.

…………………..........

3 4

T

F

There are 180 meridians.

…………………..........

T

F

There are 180 parallels.

…………………..........

5 6

T

F

Longitude is indicated as North or South of Greenwich.

…………………..........

T

F

Parallels are larger as they get nearer to the poles.

…………………..........

Ex 3 Choose the correct option. 1 When we find the geographical coordinates of a place on the Earth’s surface, we consider the Earth as: a. a sphere. b. a circumference. c. an oval. 2 What does the following definition refer to: “It is an imaginary vertical line passing through the Earth’s centre”? a. Greenwich meridian. b. the Equator. c. the Earth’s axis. 3 We calculate latitude and longitude in degrees because they are: a. angular distances.

85

03_Tests Unit.indd 85

21-03-2013 10:54:46

teacher’s book

b. linear distances. c. distances in space.



4 In the Southern Hemisphere latitudes can vary from: a. 0° to 180°S. b. 0° to 90°S. c. 0° to 360°S. 5 Each parallel and meridian is separated from the following parallel or meridian by: a. 1 degree. b. 10 degrees. c. 15 degrees. 6 Which of the following sentences about the Equator is true? a. The Equator is the Earth’s axis. b. The Equator is the largest parallel. c. The Equator passes through Greenwich.

Ex 4 Fill in the table. …………………..........…………………..........

Unit of measurement for distances at sea

…………………..........…………………..........

Length of a nautical table

Number of time zones

…………………..........…………………..........

Degrees of longitude of each time zone

…………………..........…………………..........

Time zone 0 is

…………………..........…………………..........



The speed of a ship is measured in

…………………..........…………………..........

1 nm/h

…………………..........…………………..........



It measures the ship’s speed

…………………..........…………………..........

86

03_Tests Unit.indd 86

21-03-2013 10:54:46

UNIT testS

Class

......................

Date

.................................

Student

..............................................................................................................

Unit 8 Test – Navigational aids and instruments Ex 1 Mark the following sentences as True or False, then underline

the mistakes in the false sentences and write the corrections on the dotted lines. 1 T F The Earth generates a magnetic field which has north and south magnetic poles. …………………...... 2 T F Magnetic or true north is the point of the Earth’s axis

3 T F 4 T F 5 T F 6 T F 7 T F 8 T F

9 T F 10 T F

where all meridians converge.

…………………......

Geographic and magnetic poles do not exactly coincide.

…………………......

The continuous fluctuations in the Earth’s magnetic field cause the geographic poles to shift their position.

…………………......

The gyrocompass always indicates the magnetic north.

…………………......

A magnetic compass always indicates the geographic north.

…………………......

The angle formed between geographic and magnetic north is called magnetic variation.

…………………......

The magnetic variation is different from place to place and changes slowly with time.

…………………......

Magnetic variations can be either east or west of true north.

…………………......

When in a given area the magnetic north is east of true north, the variation is negative.

…………………......

Ex 2 Fill in the table. 1 RADAR stands for... 2 Type of radio frequencies used by Radar systems.

…………………………………………………….......... ……………………………………………………..........

3 Ships use the time elapsed between emission and return of the pulse signal to calculate...

……………………………………………………..........

4 The angle formed by the distance of a star or planet above the horizon.

……………………………………………………..........

5 Sonar stands for... 6 Speed of sound in water is around... 7 Bathymetric curves indicate... 8 Echo sounders are often used to locate shoals of fish on board...

…………………………………………………….......... …………………………………………………….......... ……………………………………………………..........

……………………………………………………..........

Ex 3 Fill in the name of each instrument. 1 Instrument used for determining direction which always points to geographic north.

………………………………………

87

03_Tests Unit.indd 87

21-03-2013 10:54:46

teacher’s book

2 Instrument used for measuring the distance and position of target objects.

………………………………………

3 Instrument used for scanning the various levels of the seabed and producing maps of the underwater relief.

………………………………………

4 Instrument used for determining direction by means of a magnetic needle that points to magnetic north.

………………………………………

5 Instrument used for measuring the sea depth and also locating the presence of shoals of fish.

………………………………………

6 Instrument used for finding a ship’s speed through the water and the distance covered.

………………………………………

7 Instrument used for measuring altitudes and other angles.

………………………………………

Ex 4 Try to fill in the 5 gaps in the text. Nowadays

………………………………………

are gradually replacing transmitting stations on the Earth.

Each satellite emits microwave radio signals indicating its position which are picked up by a ………………………………………

GPS stands for

receiver.

………………………………………………………………………………

and it currently has 31 satellites

orbiting around the Earth. This system allows us to calculate our position extremely accurately anywhere on the Earth’s surface. The receiver works out the time delay for the signal to arrive and uses data from 3 satellites to indicate our position as a geographical point in ………………………………………

and

……………………………………….

.

88

03_Tests Unit.indd 88

21-03-2013 10:54:46

UNIT testS

Class

......................

Date

.................................

Student

..............................................................................................................

Unit 9 Test – The Deck Department Ex 1 Complete the table showing how a ship’s crew is organized. 1.

……………………………………………………..............

Highest authority on ship

2.

……………………………………………………..............

Head of a department

3.

……………………………………………………..............

Assists the department head

4.

……………………………………………………..............

Next in ranking

5.

……………………………………………………..............

Supervises ratings

6.

……………………………………………………..............

Ratings (full name for AS)

7.

……………………………………………………..............

Ratings (full name for OS)

8.

……………………………………………………...............

Officers in training

Ex 2 Match the documents on the left with their description on the right. 1 Certificate of Registry

a. Provides details about the crew

2 Bill of Entry b. Provides guidance in maintaining the ship’s stability under various loading conditions 3 Bill of Export c. Indicates maximum draft to which a ship can be loaded 4 International Tonnage Certificate 5 International Load Line Certificate

d. Ship’s identity document

6 Intact Stability Booklet 7 Crew list

f. List of goods to be loaded on board

e. Indicates ship’s cargo carrying capacity g. List of carried goods

1….. 2….. 3….. 4….. 5….. 6….. 7…..

Ex 3 Choose the correct option. 1 The Deck Department is responsible for:

a. ensuring the safe running of the ship’s machinery.



b. unloading and loading cargo.



c. maintaining and repairing the port cargo gear. 2 Which sentence is NOT true?



The Captain:



a. stands watch.



b. is an experienced navigator.



c. represents the shipowner in all circumstances.

89

03_Tests Unit.indd 89

21-03-2013 10:54:46

teacher’s book

3 The Chief Officer is responsible:

a. for navigation.



b. for all life-saving equipment. c. for ensuring the maintenance of the ship’s hold.



4 Cadets:

a. never stand watch.



b. have no official responsibility on board.



c. are supervised directly by the Captain.

Ex 4 Underline the mistakes in the following sentences

and write the corrections on the dotted lines. 1 The Second Mate plans the daily maintenance programme. 2 The Bosun checks that the First Officer carries out these orders. 3 ABs carry out painting duties such as maintaining the ship’s course. 4 OS is the highest rank in the Deck Department. 5 ABs often have to wash and sweep the deck.

……………................................ ……………................................ ……………................................. ……………................................ ……………................................

Ex 5 Answer the questions by writing complete sentences. 1 What is a winch used for? 2 Why are synthetic ropes used on board ship? 3 What is the capstan used for? 4 What replaces a capstan on board large ships? 5 When do we say that a cargo ship is gearless? 6 What are bollards? 7 What 3 pieces of equipment are used to transfer dry goods? 8 How do RO/RO ships load cargo?

Ex 6 Put the mooring instructions in the correct order. 1….. 2….. 3….. 4….. a. Finished with manoeuvring stations. b. All gone and clear. c. Let go forward! Let go aft! d. Single up forward, single up aft.

90

03_Tests Unit.indd 90

21-03-2013 10:54:46

UNIT testS

Class

......................

Date

.................................

Student

..............................................................................................................

Unit 10 Test – The Engine Department Ex 1 Complete the table showing how the Engine Department is organized. Head of the Engine Department



The person the head of the Engine Department is responsible to The two Officers below the head in ranking

Two Engine Department ratings





…………………………………………………….....................



……………………………………………………....................



…………………………………………………….....................



…………………………………………………….....................

…………………………………………………….....................

…………………………………………………….....................

Ex 2 Answer the questions by writing complete sentences. 1 What is the general responsibility of the head of the Engine Department? 2 What is his responsibility concerning pollution and safety? 3 Who is usually responsible for repair and maintenance of electrical equipment on board? 4 What do Engineer Cadets do? 5 What is auxiliary machinery?

Ex 3 Write the function of each piece of machinery. 1 Oil or water coolers

…………………………………………………….....................…………………………………

2 Feed-water heaters (economisers)

…………………………………………………….....................…………………………………

3 The ballast pumping system

…………………………………………………….....................…………………………………

4 Evaporators 5 Engine shafts 6 Lifeboats 7 Automatic pilot 8 Electricity generators

…………………………………………………….....................………………………………… …………………………………………………….....................………………………………… …………………………………………………….....................………………………………… …………………………………………………….....................………………………………… …………………………………………………….....................…………………………………

Ex 4 Underline the mistakes in the following sentences and write the corrections on the dotted lines. 1 The Master is the head of the Engine Department. 2 Engineer Officers regularly update the Navigation Logbook. 3 The Engine Logbook contains information on the operation of engines, boilers and secondary machinery.

…………………………………… ……………………………………

……………………………………

91

03_Tests Unit.indd 91

21-03-2013 10:54:46

teacher’s book

4 Firemen are responsible for general oiling duties. 5 In the Logbook we find machinery parameters such as frying oil and lubricating oil consumption.

……………………………………

6 The auxiliary engines provide the ship’s propulsion.

……………………………………

……………………………………

Ex 5 Complete the table about the Engine Control Room (ECR) equipment. Generator panel Shows electrical ………………………………

such as voltage and load. Engineers can decide on how many electricity ………………………………

to keep in operation.

Electrical switchboard

Voltmeter and ammeter

Controls the power

Show voltage and

………………………………

………………………………

to the various machinery.

flow for all major equipment.

Alarm panel Monitors tank levels, temperature and …………………………… . of machinery. Allows engineers to take action when an alarm …………………………… .

Main engine controls Indicate fuel oil and ………………………………

oil consumption, speed, direction. These data are recorded in the Engine Room ………………………… .

92

03_Tests Unit.indd 92

21-03-2013 10:54:46

UNIT testS

Class

Date

......................

Student

.................................

..............................................................................................................

Unit 11 Test – Describing technical diagrams Ex 1 Look at the pictures and complete the sentences with

the following verbs in the correct form. Use each verb once. contain – represent – connect – consist – fit – show – divide Picture 1

Picture 2

Picture 3 Switch

Output device (lamp) Impeller

+ Power source (battery)

Ram moving down

Discharge valve (open)

Picture 4

Suction valve (closed)

Picture 1

Casing

a. The diagram

4

4

3

…………………………………………

3

3

4

4

a piston pump.

b. The pump chamber is ………………………………………… with discharge and suction valves at the top and bottom. Picture 2

The battery and the lamp are of copper wire.

Picture 3

A centrifugal pump inside a casing.

Picture 4

a. The diagram



b. It



c. The double bottom

…………………………………………

…………………………………………

…………………………………………

…………………………………………

by two lengths

of an impeller which rotates

the double-bottom of ship.

a number of tanks.

…………………………………………

into a number of tanks.

93

03_Tests Unit.indd 93

21-03-2013 10:54:48

teacher’s book

Ex 2 Fill in the gaps. The lubricating oil system The used lubricating oil drains to the crankcase and

…………………………

passes into the drain tank

through filters. The drain

………………………………………

………………………………………

is fitted with a purifier system which consists of a

and a centrifuge. First the oil is

it passes through the centrifuge to to the

………………………………………

Pressure

………………………………………

in the heater, then

purified. After purification, the oil is returned

tank at a point next to the suction strainer.

………………………………………

…………………

………………………

draw the oil through the suction strainer and discharge

into the cooler. From the cooler the oil ……………………………………… through the

distribution branches to various parts of the

……………………………………….

.

Ex 3 What happens to the lubricating oil when it passes through the different

parts of the system? Complete the sentences. 1 When it passes through filters and strainers, the oil is

……………………………………….

2 When it passes through a heater, the oil is

……………………………………….

.

3 When it passes through a cooler, the oil is

……………………………………….

.

.

4 When it passes through a cooler, the oil is ………………………………………. .

Ex 4 Use the given words to fill in the text about the fuel oil system

of a marine engine. through – from – in – of – into – before – at

Pumps draw the oil at low pressure …………………………………

…………………………………

the service tanks and discharge it

the heater. A viscosity regulator is fitted

…………………………………

the heater

discharge. Then the oil passes pump suctions

…………………………………

…………………………………

…………………………………

a fine strainer

…………………………………

going to the main fuel

the engine. A pressure control valve is fitted

the system and any excess oil is returned to the service oil tanks.

Ex 5 Answer the questions by writing complete sentences. 1 Before going to the fuel pump suctions of the engine, the fuel oil passes through a viscosity regulator. What is its function? 2 A diesel fuel tank is included in the fuel oil system through a change-over valve. What is its function? What does it allow?

94

03_Tests Unit.indd 94

21-03-2013 10:54:48

UNIT testS

Class

......................

Date

.................................

Student

..............................................................................................................

Unit 12 Test – Pumps Ex 1 Answer the questions by writing complete sentences. 1 What is a pump? 2 What is the pressure head? 3 What other hydraulic measure is used in pump operation? 4 What can provide the power for the pump?

Ex 2 Fill in the gaps using the following words. head – factors – reciprocating – quantity – liquids – viscosity – centrifugal – kinetic Pumps are used on board ship to move …………………………………………… or to give them pressure or ……………………………………………

energy.

There are three common types of pumps: and

……………………………………………

……………………………………………

pumps, gear-wheel pumps

pumps; each of these is used for a different purpose.

Before choosing which pump to use we have to consider a number of Firstly, the

……………………………………………

……………………………………………

; next, the

…………………………………………

.

of liquid to be moved and the pressure ……………………………………………

of the liquid and finally whether

or not the liquid is corrosive or contains solid particles in suspension.

Ex 3 Fill in the gaps with the correct prepositions. 1 The interlocking gear-wheels rotate ………………………… a casing. 2 Liquid is discharged ………………………… the delivery outlet. 3 Liquid is forced to circulate ………………………… the vanes of the impeller. 4 The piston moves ………………………… and ………………………… within the chamber. 5 Liquid is drawn ………………………… the vacuum ………………………… the suction tube. 6 Pressure is created on the liquid which is forced ………………………… of the delivery tube.

Ex 4 Choose the correct option. 1 Centrifugal pumps are: a. noisy and large.

b. noisy and small.

c. quiet and small. 2 Since gear-wheel pumps are often used to pump oil, we: a. do not need to lubricate their moving parts.



b. always need to lubricate their moving parts.



c. cannot pump lubricating oils.

95

03_Tests Unit.indd 95

21-03-2013 10:54:48

teacher’s book

3 Gear-wheel pumps and screw pumps are types of: a. rotary pumps. b. piston pumps.



c. centrifugal pumps. 4 In a single-acting reciprocating pump liquid is drawn and discharged: a. by a single piston stroke.



b. when the piston is up.



c. by a double piston stroke.

Ex 5 Fill in the missing words to complete the descriptions of the three main kinds

of pumps. Note that the same number indicates the same word which is repeated. Look at the example with 0 prime: The engine is a 0 prime mover.

A 0 prime mover is an energy The Equator is the 0 Prime converter. Parallel.

CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS

RECIPROCATING PUMPS

GEAR-WHEEL PUMPS

They are used for:

They are used for:

They are used for: high 1

…………………………

rates.

low 1

…………………………

rates.

low 1

…………………………

rates.

They give the liquid a:

They give the liquid a:

They give the liquid a:

low 2 ………………………… pressure.

high 2 ………………………… pressure.

low 2 ………………………… pressure.

They are suitable for:

They are suitable for:

They are suitable for:

medium 3 liquids.

high 3 ………………………… liquids like 4 ………………………… and fuel oils.

low 3

…………………………

liquids.

They provide an: even and 5

…………………………

delivery. They 7 ………………………… be used for liquids containing solid particles in suspension.

…………………………

They provide an: 6

delivery especially for the singleacting kind. …………………………

They provide an: even and 5 delivery.

…………………………

They 8 ………………………… not be used for liquids containing solid particles in suspension.

96

03_Tests Unit.indd 96

21-03-2013 10:54:48

UNIT testS

Class

......................

Date

.................................

Student

..............................................................................................................

Unit 13 Test – Boilers Ex 1 Fill in the gaps by using the given words. between – top – of – outside – from – to – bottom – by – around – in Water-tube boilers consist …………………………

…………………………

, a steam drum at the

drums are connected

…………………………

a fire-proof casing with a furnace at the

…………………………

and water-drums at a lower level. The

banks of tubes.

Other large tubes, called the downcomer tubes, are located

…………………………

the furnace. They

feed the water drums with cool water, so that convection currents make the water move …………………………

the system.

The water drums and banks of tubes are placed in the main flow of hot gases rising …………………………

the furnace: so the heat of the hot gases is transferred

…………………………

the water

in the tubes, generating steam. The difference in density allows the dry steam to collect …………………………

the steam-drum.

Superheaters, located

…………………………

the steam-drum and the water-drums, make the steam

drier and more efficient.

Ex 2 Underline the mistakes in the following sentences and write

the corrections on the dotted lines. 1 In a boiler, the furnace is located at the bottom because hot gases descend. 2 Water is cooled down when it comes into contact with

the hot gases. 3 Downcomer tubes provide a reservoir of relatively hot water. 4 Economisers heat the feed-water after it enters the boiler.

………………………........................

………………………........................ ………………………........................ ………………………........................

Ex 3 Choose the correct option. 1 The roof, side wall and floor tubes are known as: a. waterwalls. b. downcomer tubes. c. generating tubes. 2 Water is separated from the steam in the: a. water drum. b. the furnace. c. the steam drum. 3 Steam rises to the top of the drum because: a. it is heavier than the water. b. it is lighter than the water. c. it is higher than the water.

97

03_Tests Unit.indd 97

21-03-2013 10:54:48

teacher’s book

4 Boiler mountings or fittings are: a. banks of tubes. b. the various valves and gauges. c. the water and steam drums.

Ex 4 Answer the questions by writing complete sentences. 1 What are boilers used for on board ship? 2 How is steam generated? 3 How is water made to move around the system?

Ex 5 Match each name with its definition. 1 They release any excess steam from the boiler. 2 It allows samples of water to be taken for testing.

a. Blow-off valves

3 They control the entry of feed-water into the boiler. 4 It shows the water level in the boiler.

c. Safety valves

5 It is used to indicate the pressure in the boiler. 6 They drain off any grease or mud from the boiler.

e. Water level indicator

7 They control the passage of steam to the engine. 8 It indicates the temperature inside the boiler.

g. Salinometer valves

b. Pressure gauge d. Stop valves f. Thermometer h. Feed-check valves

1..... 2..... 3..... 4..... 5..... 6..... 7..... 8.....

98

03_Tests Unit.indd 98

21-03-2013 10:54:48

UNIT testS

Class

......................

Date

.................................

Student

..............................................................................................................

Unit 14 Test – Condensers & evaporators Ex 1 Fill in the gaps by using the given words. condensate – distilled water – cooling – condenses – condensing – heat – feed-water – pump – circulating – condensation – condenser – cooling water Most of the heat energy in exhaust steam can be saved by back to the boiler as hot ………………………………….

………………………………….

…………………………………

it and sending it

. Rapid condensation is provided by a

. The main component of a condenser is a

…………………………………

surface, made

up of thin copper-nickel alloy tubes. Two separate circuits are involved in steam ……………………………………………

………………………………….

. The first is the

circuit, the second is the condensate circuit.

In the first circuit, a ………………………………… pump provides a fast flow of seawater through the bank of tubes. In the second circuit, steam enters through a steam inlet and, by flowing over the tubes, transmits some of its

…………………………………

steam temperature occurs, so that steam the

………………………………….

A condensate

to the liquid in the tubes. A rapid drop in

…………………………………

and is collected in the hot well as

.

…………………………………

removes the condensate from the hot well and sends it into

the boiler. Since there is no contact between the condensate and the coolant, pure ………………………………………

is produced, which is ideal for feeding the boilers.

Ex 2 Answer the questions by writing complete sentences. 1 What is produced by a condenser in a steam plant? 2 What is used as the cooling liquid (or coolant) in a marine condenser? 3 What sends the cooling liquid into the condenser? 4 What removes the condensate from the hot well? 5 Where is the condensate finally sent to? 6 What are condensers used for on board ship today? Indicate at least one of their main uses on board.

Ex 3 Mark the following sentences as True or False, then underline the mistakes

in the false sentences and write the corrections on the dotted lines. 1 2

T

F

T F

3 T F 4 T F

Condensers and evaporators are heat exchangers.

………………….........

Heat exchangers perform an exchange of heat between solids at different temperatures.

………………….........

Condensers and evaporators operate the same heat transfer operation.

………………….........

In the evaporator the liquid condenses by extracting heat from an external fluid.

………………….........

99

03_Tests Unit.indd 99

21-03-2013 10:54:48

teacher’s book

5 T F 6 T F

In condensers vapour condenses by giving heat to an external fluid.

………………….........

In a fresh water generating system there are both a condenser and an evaporator.

………………….........

7 T F 8 T F

These systems are used on board to generate fresh water from seawater.

………………….........

First the seawater is heated to boiling point and turned into steam in the condenser.

………………….........

Then the steam rises into the evaporator where it is condensed producing the distillate.

………………….........

The engine jacket water provides the heat source for the evaporation of seawater.

………………….........

Air ejectors (or vacuum pumps) are used to increase the pressure in the evaporation chamber.

………………….........

Before drinking distilled water, it needs to be mineralised.

………………….........





9 T F 10 T F

11 T F 12 T F

100

03_Tests Unit.indd 100

21-03-2013 10:54:48

UNIT testS

Class

Date

......................

.................................

Student

..............................................................................................................

Unit 15 Test – The steam engine plant Ex 1 Underline the five wrong words in the text and write

the correct ones on the dotted lines.

There are two types of engines commonly used nowadays: electric motors and heat engines. The former produce mechanical energy from light,

………………...............

the latter convert heat into mechanical energy. Heat engines need a source

………………...............

of mechanical energy. They need a working liquid, whose heat they absorb

………………...............

and convert into useful job. In a steam engine plant the heat engine

………………...............

is a turbine and the working fluid is water.

………………...............

Ex 2 Complete the sentences. 1 The engine is an energy ………………................ . 2 Water ………………............... into steam when it reaches boiling point. 3 At an oil refinery, crude oil is converted ………………............... many different oil products. 4 Steam ………………............... into water in the condenser. 5 Thermal energy

………………...............

into mechanical work by heat engines.

Ex 3 Study the diagram representing a steam engine plant

and identify the following components.

Condensate pump .....

Main feed pump

Economiser

Superheater

Condenser

.....

.....

Turbine

Main circulating pump

.....

.....

.....

Hot well B

.....

Boiler furnace

.....

V4 Steam

E

V1

V2

To auxiliary services G

Uptake

Hot water

Pipe line to turbine

C A D F

P3 P2

Burner

V3

P1

Water Steam

B

Seawater

101

03_Tests Unit.indd 101

21-03-2013 10:54:49

teacher’s book

Ex 4 Fill in the gaps. The main parts of a steam engine plant are the ………………............... , the engine and the ………………...............

. Mechanical work is produced by using the ………………............... energy of steam as

the ………………............... fluid. First, water is heated and transformed into ………………................ . Then some of the heat energy of steam is used to operate the ………………............... . Next the remaining heat is cooled down and the steam is turned back into

………………...............

again.

Ex 5 Choose the correct option. 1 In a closed steam cycle: a. only the quantity of the working fluid change. b. only the chemical characteristics of the working fluid change. c. only the physical state of the working fluid changes. 2 The steam cycle begins: a. in the turbine. b. in the condenser. c. in the boiler. 3 In the turbine, the steam: a. makes the propeller rotate producing mechanical energy. b. makes the steam pipe rotate producing mechanical energy. c. makes the rotor blades rotate producing mechanical energy. 4 A condenser is where: a. exhaust steam is cooled and converted. b. exhaust steam is produced. c. exhaust steam is heated and converted.

Ex 6 Answer the questions by writing complete sentences. 1 What is the main function of a marine steam engine plant? 2 What does steam do in a steam engine plant? 3 Why is it defined as the “working fluid”? 4 What are the basic areas of steam operation in this plant? 5 Where does steam receive its heat energy?

102

03_Tests Unit.indd 102

21-03-2013 10:54:49

UNIT testS

Class

Date

......................

Student

.................................

..............................................................................................................

Unit 16 Test – Nautical charts Ex 1 Answer the questions by writing complete sentences. 1 What did Ptolemy’s world maps already show? 2 Why did Columbus believe he had reached the East Indies? 3 What is Gerhardus Mercator considered to be? 4 What did he produce in 1556? 5 What does a navigator plot on a working chart? 6 Give two examples of great circles.

Ex 2 Fill in the table with the items given below in scrambled order. shortest (2) – two (2) – great circle track – largest – centre – meridians – rhumb line – constant – arc – sphere Rhumb line intersects the

A line joining ………………………………………

Great circle track the surface of a

The

Small circle

The

………………………………………

route between 2 points on

circle on the Earth’s surface which passes

.

………………………………………

………………………………………………………

angle.

.

………………………………………

……………………………………….

points on the Earth’s surface which

………………………………………

A line following the

……………………………………….

Great circle through its

………………………………

at a

route between

of a small circle which is NOT the

………………………………………

………………………………………

Not used for ocean crossings.

………………………………………

Used for ocean crossings.

points.

Ex 3 Underline the mistakes in the following sentences and write

the corrections on the dotted lines. 1 As the Earth is spherical, it cannot be represented on a spherical surface without some distortion.

………………………........................

2 The line of a chart refers to the ratio between real dimensions and the size of the arc of the chart.

………………………........................

3 Nautical charts use Mercator and astronomic projections.

………………………........................

4 The Mercator is a hexagonal projection.

………………………........................

5 The physical constant used with Mercator charts is called j c.

………………………........................

6 Gnomonic charts cannot include more than one ocean because of distortion.

………………………........................

103

03_Tests Unit.indd 103

21-03-2013 10:54:49

teacher’s book

Ex 4 Complete the table by placing the expressions in the correct place

to identify the characteristics of each type of chart. rhumb lines are plotted as straight lines – distance and direction cannot be measured directly – great circle routes are plotted as straight lines – conformal – position, distance and direction are easily determined – the most widely used in navigation – not useful as a working chart – true shape of features is maintained MERCATOR CHARTS

GNOMONIC PROJECTIONS

1.

1.

2.

2.

3.

3.

4. 5.

Ex 5 Fill in the gaps. Hydrographic surveyors compile nautical charts by using considering both the

………………………........................

information, nautical charts make use of conventional The IHO ensures that

………………………........................

………………………........................

technology and

area and the shoreline. To show all this ……………………….........................

.

charts are standardized in various parts of the

world. Any

………………………........................

………………………...............

or updates to the chart are reported in bulletins called

to Mariners. Many charts today are produced as ENCs to be used in

………………………........................

Chart Display and Information Systems, which are an essential part of

………………………........................

navigation and bridge systems.

104

03_Tests Unit.indd 104

21-03-2013 10:54:49

UNIT testS

Class

......................

Date

.................................

Student

..............................................................................................................

Unit 17 Test – Piloting & plotting Ex 1 Underline the mistakes in the following sentences and write

the corrections on the dotted lines. 1 When we take a bearing, we are actually measuring the time between north and our landmark.

………………………......................

2 We use a magnetic sounder to read the values of the angle and take a bearing.

………………………......................

3 The compass sounding is what the ship’s compass reads at any time. 4 Before plotting compass bearings on a nautical chart with a LOP, we need to apply corrections for variation and differentiation. 5 If magnetic variation is to the west, it is indicated with the (+) sign. 6 To calculate magnetic deviation, we need to use the ship’s own landmark deviation tables.

………………………......................

………………………...................... ………………………......................

………………………......................

Ex 2 Reorder the steps in taking a sextant bearing. 1….. 2….. 3….. 4….. 5….. 6…. This method is called by bearing and distance. a. Apply the formula to get the distance from the object. b. Where this second LOP crosses the circular LOP, it is our exact position or fix. c. Find out the height of the landmark on the nautical chart. d. Use this distance to draw a circular LOP on the nautical chart.  e. Use the sextant to measure the angle a between the top and the bottom of the landmark. f. Now take a compass bearing to get a second line of position.

Ex 3 Choose the correct option. 1 Two landmarks are said to be “in range” when they are: a. very close to each other.

b. a long distance from each other.



c. in line with each other. 2 The accuracy of our bearing is increased when:



a. our ship is close to the chosen landmark.



b. our ship is a great distance from the landmark.



c. the landmarks are very close together.

105

03_Tests Unit.indd 105

21-03-2013 10:54:49

teacher’s book

3 To obtain an accurate fix, we normally draw: a. a single LOP. b. a circular LOP.



c. three LOPs to form a triangle. 4 On nautical charts, the horizontal edge of the chart indicates: a. the latitude scale.



b. the longitude scale.



c. true direction.

Ex 4 Fill in the gaps by using the given words. compass – read – reading – arm – destination – another – parallel – above – circle – heading – course – is – degrees – time – landmark – line – fix – LOP – rose – north First we locate our

……….............................

This compass reading will show the landmark and the compass ……….............................

……….............................

………..............................

Then we transfer this compass arm of our

on the chart, then we take a

……….............................

bearing of it.

and minutes of the angle formed by our

.

……….............................

to the chart. This is how we do. We place one

ruler on the chart compass

……….............................

, on the line indicating

the degrees and minutes shown by our compass reading. Then we place the other

……….....................

of the parallel ruler on our landmark and draw a line. This line is our first ………............................. . Next we draw a second LOP by choosing

……….............................

landmark and following the same

procedure. The point of intersection of the two LOPS is the

………..............................

. This is the point

on the chart where our ship ……….............................. . We indicate the fix by drawing a ………............................. around it and writing the ………............................. alongside. After that, we plot our ………............................ , drawing a straight line from our fix to our chosen ……….............................

. We place an edge of the parallel ruler on the course

other edge over the centre of the compass rose, where we

……….............................

……….............................

degrees of our course. These degrees represent our course magnetic

and the

the magnetic

………..............................

. Finally

we write this heading ………............................. the course line.

Ex 5 Answer the questions by writing complete sentences. 1 When do we take a running fix? 2 Why is it called a “running fix”? 3 What does a navigator use a parallel ruler or nautical triangles for? 4 What is the difference between a compass course – indicated by the letter “C” – and a true course, indicated by “T”?

106

03_Tests Unit.indd 106

21-03-2013 10:54:49

UNIT testS

Class

......................

Date

.................................

Student

..............................................................................................................

Unit 18 Test – Business logistics Ex 1 Write the Italian words regarding logistics. 1 ……………………………………………………................. goods / commodities 2 ……………………………………………………................. to consume 3 ……………………………………………………................. 4 …………………………………………………….................

storage

5 ……………………………………………………................. 6 …………………………………………………….................

standard of living

production efficiency sources of production

Ex 2 Complete the definitions by using the given words. transportation and inventory – supply chain management/process – limited movement storage system – coordinated management – Council of Logistics Management – principle of comparative advantage 1 A ……………………………………………………................. means that people had to live close to the production source and consume a narrow range of goods. 2 The …………………………………………………….................................... is the principle at the basis

of today’s international trade. 3 Historically, ……………………………………………………................. of goods were traditionally managed separately. 4 Business logistics has introduced the new concept of ……………………………………………………................. to the activities in question 3. 5 The professional organization of logistics managers is known as the ……………………………………………………........……........ . 6 The ……………………………………………………................. regards the logistic interactions that take place within a firm or between separate firms.

Ex 3 Write the names of the missing components of a typical logistics system. 1 ……………………………………………… service; 2 demand forecasting; 3 distribution ………………………………………………; 4 ……………………………………………… control; 5 material ………………………………………………; 6 ……………………………………………… processing; 7 parts and service ………………………………………………; 8 plant and ……………………………………………… site selection; 9 purchasing; 10 ………………………………………………;

107

03_Tests Unit.indd 107

21-03-2013 10:54:49

teacher’s book

11 ……………………………………………… goods handling; 12 salvage and scrap ………………………………………………; 13 ……………………………………………… and transportation; 14 warehousing and ……………………………………………… .

Ex 4 Underline the mistakes in the following sentences and write

the corrections on the dotted lines. Note that in one sentence there are two mistakes. 1 The various functional activities such as transportation, etc. are repeated very few times along the supply channel. ………………………...................... 2 The physical supply channel is the source and space gap between a firm’s immediate material sources and its processing points.

………………………......................

3 As well as transportation and inventory control, there are a number of “sustainable” activities involved in the logistics mix for each firm.

………………………......................

4 Packaging must protect goods during handling and purchasing.

………………………......................

5 Commodities like coal and gravel especially need special warehousing although inventories are never made.

………………………......................

Ex 5 Answer the questions by writing complete sentences. 1 Why is logistics so important in the modern day world? 2 When does the supply chain finish? 3 Why are inventories an essential logistic activity? 4 What does the term “materials management” refer to? 5 Why is it necessary to have a “reverse logistics channel”? 6 What does “outsourcing” mean?

108

03_Tests Unit.indd 108

21-03-2013 10:54:49

UNIT testS

Class

......................

Date

.................................

Student

..............................................................................................................

Unit 19 Test – The moving air Ex 1 Fill in the gaps by using the given words. convection – homogenous – warm – air masses – stable – heat – balances – colder – humidity – dry Meteorologists are trying to find a physical model to explain the movement of …………………………..................

around the Earth. Air masses are those parts of the atmosphere which

are ………………………….................. in temperature,

…………………………..................

and pressure. They form over

large areas where environmental conditions are ………………………….................. . Air masses can be warm or cold and ………………………….................. or humid, depending on where they form; for example, over a tropical desert area they will be ………………………….................. and dry. The fact that these air masses move over the surface of the Earth

…………………………..................

climate redistributing the Sun’s ………………………….................. from warmer to

our

…………………………..................

places. The most accepted model today is known as

…………………………..................

circulation of the air.

Ex 2 Choose the correct option. 1 Air masses move by: a. circulation. b. gravitation. c. convection. 2 Warm air is:

a. lighter than cold air. b. heavier than cold air. c. drier than cold air.

3 Cold air is: a. lighter than warm air. b. drier than cold air. c. heavier than warm air. 4 Under the force of the Earth’s gravity: a. warm air tends to descend. b. cold air tends to descend. c. cold air tends to rise. 5 Convection currents happen because:

a. warm air rises while cold air descends. b. cold air rises while warm air descends. c. cold air rises while dry airdescends.

Ex 3 Answer the questions by writing complete sentences. 1 What are the factors which determine the movements of atmospheric air? 2 Why does air pressure vary with temperature? 109

03_Tests Unit.indd 109

21-03-2013 10:54:49

teacher’s book

3 Why does it vary with humidity? 4 What are isobars? 5 How are they shown on weather maps?

Ex 4 Choose the correct option. 1 Cyclone areas are formed by: a. cold high pressure air masses. b. warm low pressure air masses. c. hot high pressure air masses. 2 Anticyclone areas are formed by: a. cold high pressure air masses. b. warm low pressure air masses. c. hot high pressure air masses.



3 Anticyclones are: a. the low pressure areas where the cold air tends to fall. b. the high pressure areas where the cold air tends to fall. c. the low pressure areas where the warm air tends to fall. 4 The air flow between cyclone and anticyclone areas is: a. the Coriolis force. b. the wind. c. an “empty space”.



5 Winds always move towards: a. low pressure areas. b. high pressure areas. c. the left. 6 The Coriolis effect is caused by the: a. movement of air masses. b. wind movement. c. rotation of the Earth.

Ex 5 Complete the definitions. Main

…………………………..................

blow all year round in the same direction.

The Polar Winds, the West Winds and the Trade Winds are the Monsoons are

…………………………..................

…………………………..................

…………………………..................

winds.

winds.

blow for six months from the sea and for six months from the land to

the sea. The Bora, the Föhn, the Mistral and the Sirocco are ………………………….................. winds, since they only blow periodically. A

…………………………..................

front is formed when cold air approaches and replaces rising warm air.

A

…………………………..................

front is shown by a line with red semicircles.

A line with blue triangles shows a

…………………………..................

front.

110

03_Tests Unit.indd 110

21-03-2013 10:54:49

UNIT testS

Class

......................

Date

.................................

Student

..............................................................................................................

Unit 20 Test – Logistic services Ex 1 Fill in the missing words in Pfohl’s definition of “logistics”. “Logistics must ensure that a ……………….……... is supplied from a ……………………………….…….. in accordance with his ………………..…….. with the correct ………………..…….. (in quantity and variety), in the …………………………….. , at the ………………..…….. and in the ………………..…….. at minimum ………………...…….. .”

Ex 2 Fill in the table. …………………………………………………………….…………….………

Specialized companies for moving products

TTS

…………………………………………………………….…………….………

Another name for storage points

…………………………………………………………….…………….………

The

By air

……………………………………….…

transport system

Transhipment locations

…………………………………………………………….…………….………

Suitable for intercontinental movement of bulk cargoes

…………………………………………………………….…………….………

Ex 3 Use the following adjectives to write two comparative

and two superlative true sentences about the different kinds of carriers. Adjectives: expensive – slow – fast – cheap Kinds of carriers: air freight – rail freight – sea freight 1 ……………………………………………………………. 2 ……………………………………………………………. 3 ……………………………………………………………. 4 …………………………………………………………….

Ex 4 Answer the questions by writing complete sentences. 1 What is ocean shipping suitable for? 2 What products are carried on a refrigerated ship? 3 What do ferries carry? 4 What size are container units?

111

03_Tests Unit.indd 111

21-03-2013 10:54:49

teacher’s book

5 What is the loading capacity of a container unit? 6 What are the two main advantages of using containers? 7 What are the two disadvantages of using containers? 8 What is a liner merchant ship?

Ex 5 Underline the mistakes in the following sentences and write

the corrections on the dotted lines. 1 Liners do not operate on a fixed schedule but can be hired for transport anywhere in the world.

………………………......................

2 The Extra Cargo Shipping Instructions provide the carrier with details of the goods and instructions on handling.

………………………......................

3 The bill of lading is issued by the sender and accompanies the goods to the port of discharge.

………………………......................

4 The bill of lading is a record of what kind of containers are being transported.

………………………......................

5 The owner is responsible for providing the special cranes for unloading/loading containerized ships.

………………………......................

6 Combined transport aims to transfer shipped goods with the greatest number of transhipment operations.

………………………......................

112

03_Tests Unit.indd 112

21-03-2013 10:54:50

UNIT testS

Class

......................

Date

Student

.................................

..............................................................................................................

Unit 21 Test – Moving waters Ex 1 Choose the correct option for each sentence. 1 .............................................. (two quarters/three quarters) of the Earth’s surface is covered by water. 2 There is .............................................. (less/more) water in the Southern Hemisphere. 3 The

..............................................

(greatest/smallest) quantity of water is in the Southern Hemisphere.

4 The large extensions of water between continents are called oceans/seas. 5 Lands enclose parts of oceans forming .............................................. (larger/smaller) basins called seas. 6 Seas

..............................................

(are/are not) connected to oceans.

Ex 2 Complete the crossword.

          3

   

2

              4

  2

   

 

             

3

           

       

 

1

1

             

           

       

       

   

     

ACROSS 1. The temperature in the Mediterranean is relatively

…

2. The sea is constantly in 3. 4

   

…

…

decreases with depth and latitude

from the Equator lo the Poles. 4. This sea has the least salt in the world.

DOWN 1. The quantity of salt in water is known as …

 

 

2. This hemisphere has less water. 3. Temperature and salinity determine 4. The saltiest sea in the world. (the

…

…

Sea)

Ex 3 Match the two parts of each sentence. 1 Salinity indicates a. warm seas because of constant evaporation. 2 The sea temperature decreases with

b. fresh water from rivers and rain.

3 The sea temperature increases with

c. warm water, because it is denser.

4 High salinity is typical of

d. the quantity of salt in the water.

5 Very salty water is heavier than

e. its temperature and salinity.

113

03_Tests Unit.indd 113

21-03-2013 10:54:50

teacher’s book

6 Low salinity is typical of seas which receive a constant flow of

f. depth.

7 Cold water is heavier than

g. latitude from the poles to the Equator.

8 The density of seawater varies according to h. less salty water. 1..... 2 ..... 3..... 4..... 5..... 6..... 7..... 8.....

Ex 4 Answer the questions by writing complete sentences. 1 Which are the three characteristics of the seawater determining the formation of water masses? 2 What do these water masses form? 3 How do they help to balance and redistribute the Sun’s heat all over the Earth? 4 What is the main difference between the waters of the Gulf Stream and the Labrador Current?

Ex 5 Fill in the gaps. The combined action of the Moon and the

..............................................

force of the Earth cause tides to

occur. .............................................. tides usually happen when the Moon is full and the Sun and the Moon are ............................................... . On the contrary, when the Sun and Moon are

..............................................

to each other, their forces do

not pull together and .............................................. tides occur. Every day the cycle of and low tides is repeated with a period of slack

..............................................

..............................................

occurring between tides.

114

03_Tests Unit.indd 114

21-03-2013 10:54:50

UNIT testS

Class

Date

......................

Student

.................................

..............................................................................................................

Unit 22 Test – The dead reckoning plot Ex 1 Answer the questions. 1 What kinds of nautical information does a navigator use to plan the ship’s best course? 2 What is the track? 3 Why is a planned track line divided into segments? 4 What are these segments called? 5 What are junction points? 6 What does the track look like on the chart?

Ex 2 Complete the text with the missing words. The term “dead reckoning” comes from …………………………………………… reckoning, which was shortened to

……………………………………

…………………………………

reckoning by sailors. It was a method established in the

century (and used up to the early 20th century) to calculate the ship’s

position by making lots of trigonometric ……………………………………………. . Ded reckoning was then modified to “dead reckoning”, which is the term still

……………………………………………

today.

Nowadays it indicates a …………………………………………… to geometrically determine a ship’s approximate position by applying a speed to the last

……………………………………………

…………………………………………….

representing true course and

.

Ex 3 Fill in the table. SOA stands for

……………………………………………………….

………………………………………………………

labels each leg of the track

………………………………………………………

speed in knots of the current

………………………………………………………

represents a fix

Leeway

……………………………………………………….

A semicircle

……………………………………………………….

Ex 4 Underline the mistakes in the following sentences and write

the corrections on the dotted lines. 1 Plot a DR position for the speed you obtain a fix. 2 Plot a new wind line from each fix as soon as this is plotted on the chart. 3 Plot a new DR position at the time of every course and/or compass change. 4 Plot a corrected DR position if the predicted course line proved wrong and continue from the first plotted fix. 5 Plot a DR position every month.

……………………….....................

……………………….....................

……………………….....................

………………………..................... ……………………….....................

115

03_Tests Unit.indd 115

21-03-2013 10:54:50

teacher’s book

Class

Date

......................

.................................

Student

..............................................................................................................

Unit 23 Test – Petroleum Ex 1 Answer the questions. 1 What are the main chemical components of petroleum? 2 What name is give to crude oil deposits? 3 What do they drill to extract petroleum? 4 Which is the lightest hydrocarbon? 5 Where is petroleum distillation carried out? 6 Which are the heaviest petroleum distillates? 7 What is the difference in the chemical composition of heavier and lighter hydrocarbons?

Ex 2 Link and rewrite the pair of sentences using the relative pronoun which. 1 a. Fossil fuels are the main industrial fuels. b. They are formed of hydrogen and carbon. 2 a. The combustible components of fossil fuels are hydrocarbons. b. They are formed of hydrogen and carbon. 3 a. Petrol, diesel oil and kerosene are the main industrial fuels.

b. They are petroleum distillates. 4 a. Crude oil was formed from the chemical transformation of organic remains. b. The organic remains deposited at the bottom of salty marshes and lagoons.

Ex 3 Fill in the gaps. Crude oil is composed of a mixture of oils

……………………….......

can be separated out into a number

of products, ………………………....... as petrol, diesel oil, kerosene and lubricants. The main method ……………………….......

……………………

separation is fractional distillation. Since the different oils have

boiling temperatures, they are isolated in

……………………….......

of different boiling

ranges. This separation process is carried out in a fractionating tower.

Ex 4 Underline and correct the mistakes in these sentences by changing the adjectives. 1 The temperature is lower at the bottom than at the top of the tower. ………………………..................... 2 The hydrocarbons with the highest boiling point are condensed at the top of the tower. 3 The hydrocarbons that remain at the base of the column are the lightest hydrocarbons. 4 The heavier hydrocarbons rise to the top.

5 The lighter hydrocarbons evaporate at higher temperatures.

……………………….....................

………………………..................... ………………………..................... ……………………….....................

116

03_Tests Unit.indd 116

21-03-2013 10:54:50

UNIT testS

6 The heavier hydrocarbons have fewer carbon atoms in their molecules.

……………………….....................

Ex 5 Fill in the table. 1 In this process the heavy oils are heated to a temperature of 450°C to break their molecules. 2 It takes place when the fuel burns before the piston reaches the cylinder bottom.

3 The various kinds of petrol are distinguished by their... 4 In this process the molecular chains of petrol are modified to increase its octane value. 5 It is a well-known aromatic hydrocarbon. 6 They are added to petrol to increase the octane value.

……………………….....................

………………………..................... ……………………….....................

………………………..................... ………………………..................... ……………………….....................

117

03_Tests Unit.indd 117

21-03-2013 10:54:50

teacher’s book

Class

......................

Date

Student

.................................

..............................................................................................................

Unit 24 Test – Kinds of energy & energy sources Ex 1 Mark the following statements as True or False, then underline

the mistakes in the false sentences and write the corrections on the dotted lines. 1 T F Energy exists in two forms, as either mechanical or kinetic energy. 2 T F Kinetic energy is the energy of position. 3 T F Kinetic energy is stored energy.

........................................ ........................................ ........................................

4 T F Stored energy can be liberated and transformed into kinetic energy. 5 T F The chemical energy of the fuel is kinetic energy. 6 T F Fuel chemical energy is released

........................................ ........................................

by the combustion process.

........................................

Ex 2 Fill in the gaps by using the given words. them – the – there – fuels – can – cannot/can’t – known – were ………………............

are different types of energy and each of ………………............ can be converted into

another type: from chemical into thermal, into mechanical, etc. While energy continuously be transformed, some of the primary energy sources

………………............

………………............

continuously

be replaced by Nature. These are ………………............ as non-renewable energy sources and consist of fossil

………………............

:

coal, oil, natural gas. Fossil fuels are found in deposits which ………………............ created over many thousands of years, from

………………............

chemical transformation of unicellular plants and

animals under the ground.

Ex 3 Answer the questions by writing complete sentences. 1 What is energy? 2 What form of energy is electrical energy? 3 What do we need energy sources for? 4 What is a heat engine? Give a definition. 5 Which is the best known of greenhouse gases? 6 When is it given off?

Ex 4 Choose the correct option. 1 Stored energy is: a. kinetic energy. b. chemical energy. c. potential energy. 118

03_Tests Unit.indd 118

21-03-2013 10:54:50

UNIT testS

2 Renewable energy sources are: a. ever-diminishing. b. continuously renewed by Nature. c. produced by man. 3 Coal, oil and natural gas are: a. produced by Nature in a short time cycle. b. ever-increasing. c. non-renewable energy sources. 4 A prime mover is: a. a primary energy source. b. an energy converter. c. a renewable energy source. 5 Solar panels produce mechanical energy from: a. natural power. b. fossil fuels. c. electrical energy. 6 The primary energy types derive from: a. another type of energy. b. kinetic energy. c. an energy source. 7 The greenhouse effect is generated because: a. the Sun’s heat escapes from the atmosphere. b. the Sun’s heat is trapped in the atmosphere. c. the Sun’s heat escapes into space. 8 The greenhouse effect a. makes our planet colder. b. makes our planet lighter. c. makes our planet warmer.

Ex 5 Choose the correct words to fill in the gaps. 1 Solar panels are prime movers …………………… collect sunlight. 2 Water wheels convert the natural power of water …………………… mechanical energy. 3 A hydro-turbine engine uses water …………………… drive its wheel. 4 A fuel is a material …………………… producing heat or other forms of energy. 5 The various types of energy are classified …………………… primary or secondary types. 6 The energy stored in fuels is released process.

……………………

who / what / which for / of / into to / of / for to / for / of has / as / like

a combustion through / into / as

119

03_Tests Unit.indd 119

21-03-2013 10:54:50

teacher’s book

Class

......................

Date

.................................

Student

..............................................................................................................

Unit 25 Test – Heat energy & heat engines Ex 1 Mark the following statements as True or False, then underline

the mistakes in the false sentences and write the corrections on the dotted lines. 1 T F The different types of energy can be completely converted into heat. 2 T F Heat can be completely converted into another type of energy. 3 T F A heat engine converts more than 40% of the fuel’s energy into mechanical work.

........................................ ........................................

........................................

4 T F The heat energy which is not used to move the car is dispersed into the surrounding air.

........................................

5 T F The less heat energy converted into mechanical work, the less efficient the engine.

........................................

Ex 2 Choose the correct option. 1 Combustion is: a. a physical reaction. b. a gaseous process. c. a chemical reaction. 2 Carbon monoxide is produced in the combustion process when: a. there is too much oxygen in the combustion chamber. b. there is the correct amount of oxygen in the combustion chamber. c. there is too little oxygen in the combustion chamber. 3 Electric motors transform: a. mechanical into electric energy. b. electric into mechanical energy. c. electric energy into heat. 4 The steam engine invented by James Watt was: a. an external combustion engine. b. an internal combustion engine. c. an electric engine. 5 The moving parts of internal combustion engines are operated by: a. a steam flow. b. a flow of electricity. c. a flow of exhaust gases.

120

03_Tests Unit.indd 120

21-03-2013 10:54:50

UNIT testS

Ex 3 Complete the text with the words given in scrambled order. inside – outside – working fluid – internal – external – mechanical work – exhaust – steam turbines Heat engines are given this name in this way because they convert thermal energy or heat into ……………………………...................

. They are classified into two groups: internal and

……………………………..............

combustion engines. In external combustion engines, the combustion process takes place in a boiler

……………………………..............

the engine.

In internal combustion engines, combustion takes place in a combustion chamber ……………………………..............

today’s

the engine. The steam engine was invented by James Watt in 1765 and

……………………………........................

are external combustion engines. Reciprocating engines and

gas turbines are …………………………….............. combustion engines. The moving parts of the engine, turbine blades and pistons, which transform thermal energy into work, are moved by the action of a working fluid. Steam is the

……………………………..............

that

moves the rotor blades in steam turbines; a flow of …………………………….............. gases from the combustion process drives the pistons of reciprocating engines and the rotor of a gas turbine.

Ex 4 Answer the questions by writing complete sentences. 1 How is thermal energy produced on a molecular level? 2 What are hydrocarbons chemically made up of? 3 Why are hydrocarbons excellent fuels? 4 What happens between oxygen and the hydrocarbons in the fuel in the combustion process? 5 Which gas is produced in a burning process when fuel oxidation is complete? 6 What kind of energy is produced in a combustion process? 7 Where does this energy come from? 8 What does a heat engine do with thermal energy?

Ex 5 Fill in the gaps. During the burning process, fossil fuels release gas contributes to the ……………………………..............

……………………………..............

……………………………..............

into the atmosphere. This

effect, through which the Sun’s

is trapped in the lower layers of the atmosphere, making the Earth’s

surface ever ……………………………............... .

121

03_Tests Unit.indd 121

21-03-2013 10:54:50

teacher’s book

Class

......................

Date

.................................

Student

..............................................................................................................

Unit 26 Test – Radio communication on board Ex 1 Fill in the table. Channel 16 is used for

………………………………………………........…………………………………..…………………………………

Channel 13 is

used worldwide for navigation.

Channel 70 is used for

………………………………………………........…………………………………..…………………………………

Channel 68 is

used in Italy for …………………………………………………………..........……………………….......

……………………………………………………..........…………………………

Ex 2 Write the full name for these acronyms. VHF

………………………………………………………………………………………..........…………………………………………………….....….......

ETA

………………………………………………………………………………………..........…………………………………………………….....….......

CRS

………………………………………………………………………………………..........…………………………………………………….....….......

ETD

………………………………………………………………………………………..........…………………………………………………….....….......

SAR

………………………………………………………………………………………..........…………………………………………………….....….......

RT

………………………………………………………………………………………..........…………………………………………………….....….......

VTMS

………………………………………………………………………………………..........…………………………………………………….....….......

MSI

………………………………………………………………………………………..........…………………………………………………….....….......

Ex 3 Answer the questions. 1 What is a ship’s call sign made up of and what is it? 2 Who assigns the call sign and when? 3 Why is the call sign recognised all over the world? 4 What is the MMSI number and when is it used? 5 What is the SMCP and why was it introduced? 6 When is the use of the SMCP particularly important and why?

122

03_Tests Unit.indd 122

21-03-2013 10:54:50

UNIT testS

Ex 4 Fill in the gaps with the given words. distance – hours – bow – North – miles – knots – bearing – degrees 1 Sandbank in position 20 degrees 34 minutes …………………….. , 061 degrees 24 minutes West. 2 My position is: …………………….. one-three-seven degrees true from Bushy Lighthouse; …………………….. two four decimal three miles.

3 Buoy 060 degrees on your port …………………….. . 4 My present course is 050 …………………….. to Dover Buoy. 5 My position is 5.6 ……………………..from Sulley Point. 6 My present speed is 13 decimal 5 …………………….. . 7 My ETA is 0500 …………………….. Local Time.

Ex 5 Indicate the correct message marker for each message. 1 Do you require a tug for berthing procedures? 2 Dangerous obstruction in fairway approaching Milton docks. 3 You must keep south of the fairway buoy. 4 I require a pilot at cross hands pilot station.

……………...................………. ……………...................………. ……………...................………. ……………...................……….

123

03_Tests Unit.indd 123

21-03-2013 10:54:51

teacher’s book

Class

......................

Date

.................................

Student

..............................................................................................................

Unit 27 Test – Radio messages Ex 1 Put the phrases in a routine ship-to-shore call in the correct order. 1..... 2..... 3..... 4..... 5..... 6.... a. OVER. b. On Ch 16, Position report. c. Suggest Channel 73. d. Lucky 499912345, Lucky 499912345. e. Swansea Coast Guard, Swansea Coast Guard, f. THIS IS

Ex 2 Underline the mistakes in the following sentences and write

the corrections on the dotted lines. 1 We use VHF channel 73 to establish contact. 2 After establishing contact we switch to a safety channel. 3 Channel 13 must be left free for Distress, Urgency and Safety Calls. 4 A ship is identified by her name, call sign or IMO number. 5 When sailing in foreign waters we identify our ship twice. 6 We use the code word OVER to signal the end of communication.

………………………..................... ……………………….....................

………………………..................... ………………………..................... ……………………….....................



……………………….....................

Ex 3 Answer the questions. 1 What is the standard request for a readability report? 2 What kind of reception is indicated by the number five in the readability code? 3 On which two channels are ships required to maintain a listening watch? 4 What is the order of priority in the four kinds of maritime radiotelephony communications? 5 What does the transmission of the signal MAYDAY indicate? 6 How often is this signal repeated?

Ex 4 Make up the ship’s call and message, using the following information

and repeating words where necessary.

The tanker Aegean Dolphin 299344678 is travelling through the Straits of Gibraltar. The ship has struck a submerged rock, the hull is holed and the engine room is flooded. The ship is fully loaded and now she is heavily leaning to one side. The captain sends a Mayday to the Coast Guard. OVER – ten nautical miles south of the Rock of Gibraltar, position: 36°2’N, 5° 20 W – Aegean Dolphin 299344678 – MAYDAY – holed and listing heavily, Engine Room flooded and taking on water – thirty-six people on board, seas rough

124

03_Tests Unit.indd 124

21-03-2013 10:54:51

UNIT testS

Distress call ……………………………………………………………………………………….....................…………………………………...................……………………… ……………………………………………………………………………………….....................…………………………………...................……………………… ……………………………………………………………………………………….....................…………………………………...................………………………

Distress message Distress signal

…………………………………………………….....................…………………………………...................………………

Name and MMSI/call sign

……………………….....................…………………………………...................………………………

Position

…………………………………………………….....................…………………………………...................………………



…………………………………………………….....................…………………………………...................………………

Nature of distress

…………………………………………………….....................…………………………………...................………………



…………………………………………………….....................…………………………………...................………………

Other information

…………………………………………………….....................…………………………………...................………………



…………………………………………………….....................…………………………………...................………………

End message

…………………………………………………….....................…………………………………...................………………

Ex 5 Fill in the gaps. An urgency message may only be sent on the authority of the other person responsible for the vessel. The Urgency signal

………………………...............

………………………...............

, skipper or

is repeated

three times, indicating that the calling station needs to transmit a very urgent message about the

………………………...............

………………………...............

capability of the vessel or about a person’s safety. The safety signal

is usually transmitted to

important navigational or

………………………...............

………………………...............

stations and communicates

warnings.

125

03_Tests Unit.indd 125

21-03-2013 10:54:51

teacher’s book

Class

......................

Date

.................................

Student

..............................................................................................................

Unit 28 Test – Reciprocating engines Ex 1 Fill in the gaps. The

……………………......................

or piston engine is the most common type of

combustion engine. In piston engines

……………………......................

……………………......................

energy is produced in a four-step

cycle. This consists of intake and compression, combustion and

……………………......................

of waste

gases, produced in the combustion process. This ……………………...................... can either be performed in two or in four piston ……………………....................... . There are two types of reciprocating engine: the petrol engine and the diesel engine. They are also known as ……………………......................-ignition engines and In petrol engines the fuel-and-air

……………………......................

……………………......................-ignition

is set on fire by a

engines.

……………………......................

at

the end of the compression stroke. In ……………………...................... engines there is no need for spark plugs, since the atomised fuel burns as soon as it enters the

……………………......................

and comes

into contact with the very hot compressed air.

Ex 2 Mark the following sentences as True or False, then underline

the mistakes in the false sentences and write the corrections on the dotted lines. 1 T F

Piston engines burn a mixture of fuel and air in a closed cylinder.

……………………..............

2 T F 3 T F

When air is compressed, the air-temperature is decreased.

……………………..............

In a petrol engine, the air-temperature is higher than in a diesel engine.

……………………..............

4 T F 5 T F

Petrol engines operate in a four-stroke cycle.

……………………..............

In most petrol engines, fuel and air are mixed together outside the combustion chamber.

……………………..............

6 T F

Diesel engines intake only air.

……………………..............

Ex 3 Complete the crossword. ACROSS 1. In a four-stroke piston engine, three piston strokes are like this. 2. Shaft that controls the opening of the valves. 3. This is the largest component of a reciprocating engine. 4. This is the most important piece of a reciprocating engine. 5. Number of the up-and-down movements of the piston in a cycle. 6. In a petrol engine, the mixture is ignited by an electric…

126

03_Tests Unit.indd 126

21-03-2013 10:54:51

UNIT testS

DOWN 1. A tube in which the pistons move up and down. 2. Used to fill the gap between the piston and the cylinder wall. 3. It converts the pistons’ reciprocating movement into rotary motion. 4. Fuel and air were mixed here. 5. Heavy disc at one end of an engine shaft. 6. They spray diesel fuel into the combustion chamber.

1 2 1

3

4

5

2

R 3

6

C

H E 4

5

6

Ex 4 Talk about the diesel engine and answer the questions

by writing complete sentences. 1 In the working cycle of a 4-stroke diesel engine, in what steps or phases is mechanical power produced? 2 Which part of the engine transforms heat into mechanical work and when? 3 In the working cycle of a 4-stroke diesel engine, how many times does the piston reciprocate to complete a cycle? 4 What is compressed in the combustion chamber of a diesel engine? 5 Where and when does the fuel mix with air in a diesel engine? 6 What does the “direct fuel injection system” help to reduce?

127

03_Tests Unit.indd 127

21-03-2013 10:54:51

teacher’s book

Class

......................

Date

.................................

Student

..............................................................................................................

Unit 29 Test – Turbine engines Ex 1 Answer the questions by writing complete sentences. 1 What are the main advantages of steam turbines over diesel engines? 2 Indicate at least two disadvantages arising from the application of turbine engines to ship propulsion. 3 What are the two essential functional parts of a steam turbine engine? 4 What is the function of a steam distributor? 5 In which part of the engine is mechanical energy produced?

Ex 2 In what parts of a gas turbine do these working steps occur? Fill in the gaps. 1 The air kinetic energy is increased in the ……………………...................... by adding pressure energy. 2 The fluid receives heat energy as it burns with the fuel in the ……………………....................... . 3 The heat energy of the hot gases is converted back into kinetic energy

by the ……………………...................... blades. 4 The efflux of high velocity gases which is generated is partly used to operate the ……………………......................, while the remaining energy can be used for useful work to operate machinery.

Ex 3 Complete the text with the missing words. Nowadays, steam turbines are used in ……………………...................... plants, such as electric ……………………......................

in many

stations, and very few are still found on board ship. Gas turbines are used

……………………......................

vessels, in some container ships and fast ferries.

Both gas turbines and piston engines have a after the

……………………......................

.............-step

working cycle, but the steps follow one

in the cylinders of a diesel engine, while they are performed at

the same time in the different parts of a gas turbine. In fact, the gas turbine engine eliminates the

……………………......................

idle strokes, because combustion occurs continuously.

Ex 4 Underline the mistakes in the following sentences and write

the corrections on the dotted lines. 1 A steam turbine is an internal combustion engine. 2 The steam flow enters the turbine through the moving elements of the engine. 3 After entering the engine, steam has a high pressure and a low velocity. 4 As steam expands, its velocity is reduced. 5 Impulse turbines have alternate rows of stationary and moving blades.

6 Steam expands in the stationary parts of the engine.

……………………......................

……………………......................

……………………...................... ……………………......................

……………………...................... ……………………......................

128

03_Tests Unit.indd 128

21-03-2013 10:54:51

UNIT testS

Ex 5 Choose the correct option. 1 Reaction hydraulic turbines work on the same principle as: a. the steam flow. b. the water wheel. c. the windmill. 2 The sails of a windmill rotate: a. in the same direction as the wind. b. in the opposite direction to the wind. c. like the blades of a water wheel. 3 The blades of the impulse hydraulic turbine rotate: a. in the same direction as the water current. b. in the opposite direction to the water current. c. like the sails of a windmill. 4 Impulse turbines work on the same principle as: a. the steam flow. b. the water wheel. c. the windmill. 5 A gas turbine is: a. an internal combustion engine. b. an external combustion engine. c. an outside combustion engine. 6 The hot gases produced in the combustion process: a. are used to drive the turbine blades. b. are used to drive the compressor. c. are discharged outside the engine. 7 The working fluid of a gas turbine is: a. methane gas. b. air. c. hot expanding gases. 8 The working fluid of a steam turbine is: a. hot expanding gases. b. steam. c. air.

Ex 6 Complete the text about steam turbines. In the

……………………......................

turbine, steam expands totally in the

……………………......................

, where

the steam heat energy is converted into kinetic energy. Here steam loses pressure but acquires …………………….......................

.

In the reaction turbine, steam expands both in the ……………………...................... and in the moving blades. Therefore, steam ……………………...................... is constantly reduced as the steam flow passes through both sets of blades. Steam velocity, instead, is increased in the

……………………......................

blades.

129

03_Tests Unit.indd 129

21-03-2013 10:54:51

teacher’s book

Class

Date

......................

.................................

Student

..............................................................................................................

Unit 30 Test – The inert gas system Ex 1 Answer the questions by writing complete sentences. 1 What is an inert gas? 2 What type of cargoes do oil tankers and chemical carriers carry? 3 What is inert gas obtained from? 4 What happens in a scrubbing and cooling tower? 5 What is the function of a deck water seal? 6 What is the function of a pressure-vacuum breaker?

Ex 2 Fill in the gaps. In the

……………………......................

…………..............................

tanks which contain crude oil or petroleum by-products, a highly

mixture of air and hydrocarbon ……………………...................... is formed. This

flammable mixture may catch example, a sudden

……………………......................

……………………......................

for many accidental reasons, as, for

discharge. To

……………………......................

any accidental fire

or explosion from taking place in the cargo tanks on board oil ……………………...................... and chemical carriers, the atmospheric air in the cargo tanks ……………………........ replaced by inert gas. This gas contains such a ……………………......................

……………………......................

percentage of oxygen as to be unable to feed a

process.

Ex 3 Complete each sentence with a suitable verb in the correct form to express purpose. 1 Inert gas is used on board oil tankers ……………………...................... atmospheric air in the cargo tanks. 2 Compressors are used ……………………...................... the inert gas to the desired pressure. 3 Inert gas is used on board ……………………...................... the atmosphere inert in the cargo tanks. 4 Since inert gas contains too little oxygen and is not safe to breathe, it is necessary

……………………...................... inert gas by ventilation with fresh air, before technicians can inspect them.



Ex 4 Underline the mistakes in the following sentences and write

the corrections on the dotted lines.

1 The inert gas enters the deck seal under pressure when the system is not in operation. 2 When the gas pressure is too low, the oil rises up the cylinder of the pressure vacuum breaker and pushes the gas out into the atmosphere. 3 The gas is sent to the cargo tanks at a pressure lower than atmospheric pressure.

……………………..............

……………………..............

……………………..............

130

03_Tests Unit.indd 130

21-03-2013 10:54:51

UNIT testS

4 When the gas pressure is too high, the oil rises up the gas inlet tube of a pressure vacuum breaker and pushes the gas up into the pipeline.

……………………..............

Ex 5 Complete the crossword. 1 3

2

N

1

O E

P

2

43

Z

X

4

D

T

ACROSS 1. Industrial plants where inert gas is used for tank protection and pipeline cleansing. 2. A deck-water seal is a ... 3. It constantly monitors the oxygen content in the inert gas. 4. This filter absorbs the water moisture in the gas. DOWN 1. The gas flows to the cargo tanks through this line of tubes. 2. They bring the gas to a temperature of minus 60/70 °C. 3. One of the main components of inert gas. 4. This is what some goods become on contact with the air.

131

03_Tests Unit.indd 131

21-03-2013 10:54:51

teacher’s book

Class

......................

Date

Student

.................................

..............................................................................................................

Unit 31 Test – The GMDSS Ex 1 Answer the questions by writing complete sentences. 1 What does the acronym GMDSS stand for? 2 Why is it called a global system? 3 What is the GMDSS designed to ensure? 4 When did the GMDSS become fully operational? 5 What kinds of technology is the GMDSS based on? 6 Who can receive a distress call in the GMDSS system? 7 What is the INMARSAT? 8 Which are the Inmarsat regions? 9 What do we find in the Land Earth Stations located all around the globe? 10 Is there any Italian LES? 11 Which cargo vessels are requested to carry the GMDSS mandatory equipment? 12 Which passenger ships are requested to carry the GMDSS mandatory equipment?

Ex 2 Fill in the gaps. Digital Selective Calling (……………………) is used to automate the transmission and of distress alerts sent via VHF, MF and HF

…………………….

……………………......

. In every message the DSC transmitter-

receiver automatically includes the ship’s identity with the

……………………

number of the calling

ship. The DSC unit stores four different types of message. These may be distress, safety or routine calls. At the coast station, ship-to-shore distress handling and are routed to the nearest ship, DSC receivers sound an

……………………......

……………………

……………………

…………………….....

,

receive priority

Coordination Centre (RCC). On board

when a distress call is received.

Ex 3 Complete the table about the GMDSS mandatory communication equipment. 1 The special buoy which automatically transmits the ship’s identity, position and alarm call on the satellite radio frequency.

…………………………..........

2 A portable Radar Transponder (receiver and transmitter) designed to be used in lifeboats.

…………………………..........

3 The overall term for weather reports, navigational warnings and Search and Rescue information which can be transmitted by navigational telex (NAVTEX).

…………………………..........

4 This means of communication is designed to operate in the VHF marine band in voice mode, allowing communications between searching vessels and survivors in lifeboats.

…………………………..........

132

03_Tests Unit.indd 132

21-03-2013 10:54:51

UNIT testS

Ex 4 Fill in the table with the GMDSS sea areas.

Sea Area 1 This is the sea area which lies within the coverage of an Inmarsat geostationary satellite. 2 This is the sea area which lies above 70° N and below 70° S. 3 This is a sea area approximately within 100-150 nautical miles.

…………………… ……………………

4 This is the sea area over 150 miles from the coast where ships must carry an Inmarsat earth station. 5 This is the sea area which lies within the radiotelephone coverage of at least one VHF coast station.



6 This sea area lies within the radiotelephone coverage of at least one MF coast station.

……………………

……………………

……………………

……………………

133

03_Tests Unit.indd 133

21-03-2013 10:54:51

teacher’s book

Class

......................

Date

.................................

Student

..............................................................................................................

Unit 32 Test – Integrated navigation Ex 1 Answer the questions. 1 What is an Integrated Bridge System? 2 What is the role of the primary computer in an Integrated Bridge System? 3 What kind of information is continuously updated? (Give at least three examples) 4 Why can the number of workstations and monitors vary? 5 What do IMO safety requirements recommend in the case of failure of an instrument or equipment? 6 What does ABS stand for and what is it?

Ex 2 Fill in the table. A

……………………………………..

gives gyrocompass bearings.

…………………………………………

measure water surface speed.

…………………………………………

measure SOG.

…………………………………………

measure the distance between the keel and the seabed.

…………………………………………

measure wind direction and speed.

…………………………………………

indicates stationary or moving objects near the ship.

…………………………………………



indicates the ship’s position using information from a satellite.

…………………………………………

Navigational telex.

Ex 3 Underline the mistakes in the following sentences and write

the corrections on the dotted lines. 1 ARPA stands for Automatic Range Plotting Aids.

……………………….....................

2 An ARPA target is measured by range and speed from one’s own ship.

……………………….....................

3 The ARPA system sounds an echo sounder when there is any danger of collision with another ship.

……………………….....................

4 The system calculates the necessary and possible manoeuvres needed to cause a collision.

……………………….....................

5 These manoeuvres are known as trick manoeuvres. 6 The system chooses the most suitable manoeuvre to avoid collision.

……………………….....................

……………………….....................

134

03_Tests Unit.indd 134

21-03-2013 10:54:52

UNIT testS

Ex 4 Fill in the gaps. The essential task of the

…………………………………………

(OOW) is to ensure the ship’s safe navigation.

This means that bridge workstations display a series of …………………………………………

…………………………………………

and

alarms. The OOW should always “…………………………………………” an alarm and

take action to adjust the indicated problem. The ship’s movement is also monitored by visual observation from the

…………………………………………

station or position, which allows the OOW a

“commanding view”. Integrated Bridge Systems also have a route planning workstation which today is usually fitted with an ECDIS, specifically designed to display

………………………………………….

.

Ex 5 Reorder the steps in planning a route on an ECDIS.

(No. 6 has already been done to help you)

1..... 2..... 3..... 4..... 5..... 6e 7..... 8..... 9..... a. Enter a safety draft. b. Establish a safety domain. c. Visualise your route. d. Check your whole route in detail. e. Create your passage plan. (No. 6) f. Enter your own ship’s draft and establish a safety contour based on your draft. g. Save your route and export it to the workstation. h. Check that you have the necessary up-to-date ENC charts. i.

Enter beam clearance.

135

03_Tests Unit.indd 135

21-03-2013 10:54:52

teacher’s book

Key to tests Unit 1 – The main parts of a ship Ex 1 Complete the crossword. One definition has been inserted to help you. (4 marks, 0.5 for each answer) 1

B

2

3

B O W

O

A

T 4

T

5

S

S T

6

M

A

R 7

H U L L

R B

I

O

N

8

M A

E R N

E

P O R T

I

N D E C K

R 9

A M I

D S H

I

P

S

Ex 2 Write the names of the parts of a ship to label the diagram. Item 5 has been inserted as an example. (8 marks) 1 2

8

3 4

4

6

6

9

9

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

5 E.R. 9

4

4

6

6

7

9

Bridge superstructure Poop Forecastle ’Tween decks Engine Room

Holds Fore peak tanks After peak tanks Double bottom tanks

Ex 3 Refer to the ship diagram in Ex 2 and complete the sentences using once each of the following words. (6 marks) 1 The bridge superstructure is aft of the forecastle. 2 Towards the bow is forward. 3 The bridge superstructure is above the main deck. 4 The engine room is located amidships. 5 The holds are situated below the ’tween decks.

6 When you go across the ship from side to side you go abeam. Ex 4 Underline the mistakes in the following sentences and write the corrections on the dotted lines. (6 marks) 1 The hull is divided horizontally by bulkheads. decks 2 In a liquid cargo ship, the hull is divided into holds. tanks 3 The double bottom tanks are used to contain fresh water and ballast. fuel 4 The superstructure is the permanent housing below deck. above 5 The hull is divided vertically by decks. bulkheads 6 The part below the surface of the water under the waterline is known as the upper works. bottom Ex 5 Answer the questions by writing complete sentences. (6 marks) 1 The fore part of the hull is the bow, the central part is the amidships and the aft part is the stern. 2 The central line is an imaginary vertical plane which divides the hull into two halves/ sides. 3 The right side is called the starboard, the left side is called the port. 4 The waterline is a line on the ship’s sides parallel to the surface of the water. 5 The part of the hull above the waterline is called the upper works, the part below the waterline is the bottom. 6 On dry cargo ships the cargo space is divided into holds.

Unit 2 – Ships’ measurements and specifications Ex 1 Label the diagrams about the ship’s dimensions. (8 marks) 1 Length between perpendiculars 2 Length at the waterline 3 Length overall/overall length 4 Freeboard 5 Air draft 6 Beam/extreme breadth 7 Draft 8 Depth

136

04_KeyTest.indd 136

21-03-2013 11:12:50

key to tests

Ex 2 Write the definitions. (6 marks) 1 Displacement

It refers to the weight of the ship. 2 Deadweight

Weight of the cargo that a ship can carry/The ship’s maximum carrying capacity. 3 Light displacement

Weight of the unloaded ship. 4 Tonnage

Measure of the internal volume of the ship. 5 Gross tonnage

Volume of all closed spaces on board ship. 6 Net tonnage

Volume of the earning spaces on board ship (holds and passengers’ cabins). Ex 3 Choose the correct option. (5 marks) 1c, 2a, 3c, 4b, 5a Ex 4 Underline the mistakes in the following sentences and write the corrections on the dotted lines. (8 marks) 1 The longest dimension for measuring a ship is the length between perpendiculars. shortest 2 The extreme breadth is sometimes indicated as the draft. beam 3 The depth is the horizontal distance between keel and the main deck. vertical 4 The freeboard is the vertical distance between the load line and the main deck. waterline 5 Deadline is the ship’s maximum carrying capacity. Deadweight 6 Gross tonnage refers to the ship’s earning capacity. Net 7 If the ship needs the assistance of a pilot, she has to pay towage fees. tug 8 The International Tonnage Certificate is determined by an IALA formula. IMO Ex 5 Complete the specifications chart with the following items. (3 marks, 0.5 for each answer) Ocean Princess 3 Builder Cuthbert & Sons Length oa 79.40 m Breadth 13.65 m Draft 4.00 m DWT (Deadweight) 1,600 t GT (Gross tonnage) 1,250 Main engines output 11,000 kW Service speed 12.5 knots

Unit 3 – Ship classification Ex 1 Answer the questions by writing complete sentences. (10 marks) 1 They are used for commercial transportation providing a profit for the shipping companies. 2 The two main categories of merchant ships are passenger ships and cargo ships. 3 There are two kinds of passenger ships in use today: the cruise ship and the ferry. 4 They can be divided into two basic types: liquid or dry cargo ships, depending on the type of cargo they carry. 5 Refrigerated ships carry perishable goods like meat, fruit or dairy produce, because they have refrigerated holds. 6 They are often carried in bulk on dry bulk carriers. 7 Dredgers are used to drag the sea bottom. 8 “Unrestricted navigation” means that a ship can sail on the high seas and at any period of the year. 9 An OBO ship can carry both dry bulk cargo, such as grain or ore, and crude oil. 10 Crude oil is carried on crude oil tankers. Ex 2 Complete the following definitions using the words given in scrambled order. (10 marks) 1 Boats are small open vessels. 2 Boats are suitable for inland navigation. 3 Boats are suitable for sailing distances less than 6 nautical miles. 4 Boats are used for lifeboats, coastal fishing, water sports. 5 Ships are of a considerable size. 6 Ships are propelled by an engine. 7 Ships are equipped to carry goods, passengers, vehicles on the open sea. 8 Ships can sail variable distances from the coast. Ex 3 Underline the mistakes in the following sentences and write the corrections on the dotted lines. (6 marks) 1 Buoyancy is the ship’s float capability to sink. 2 Stability is the ship’s capability to lose her balance regain after being inclined. 3 Impermeability is the ship’s capability to change her Manoeuvrability course.

137

04_KeyTest.indd 137

21-03-2013 11:12:50

teacher’s book

4 Sea-kindliness means that the rolling movements of the ship are fast. 5 Variability is the ship’s ability to sail at a given speed. 6 Seaworthy means that the ship is unsuitable for navigation.

slow Movability suitable

Ex 4 Fill in the table. (4 marks) 1 The Italian classification authority

Registro Italiano Navale 2 The British classification authority

Lloyd’s Register of Shipping 3 International Convention for Safety of Life at Sea

SOLAS 4 Navigation notation indicates

the distance ships can sail from the coast 5 The ship’s identity card

Certificate of Registry

6 Distinctive number or letters is also known as

call sign 7 International Tonnage Certificate

the ship’s gross and net tonnage 8 The Load Line Certificate indicates the minimum freeboard after loading

UNIT 4 – Shipbuilding Ex 1 Rewrite the following sentences in the passive form. (6 marks) a First the keel is built. b Finally, the superstructure is installed. c After this, work is begun on building the ship. d First of all, the working plans are approved by the classification society. e Then the side framing and bulkheads are erected. f Next, the bottom with its plating is laid out. Ex 2 Now put the sentences in the correct order to indicate the basic building steps. (3 marks) 1d, 2c, 3a, 4f, 5e, 6b Ex 3 Complete the text with the missing verbs given in scrambled order. (6 marks) Ships are built in shipyards. Shipyards are located near the sea to allow vessels to be launched from the building ways. Usually, ships are launched when about two-thirds are completed.

Shortly before launching, the propeller and the engines are installed. As the ship is launched, she is christened by breaking a bottle of champagne on her hull. Then the ship is towed to the outfitting pier, where the outfitting work is carried out. Next the ship is taken for a trial trip, then she is finally delivered to the owner. Ex 4 Match each term with its definition. (7 marks) 1g, 2e, 3d, 4f, 5c, 6b, 7a Ex 5 Answer the questions by writing complete sentences. (8 marks) 1 A naval architect draws the ship’s design according to the owner’s requirements. 2 The classification society registers and classifies the ship after ascertaining that she is seaworthy and suitable to carry the number of passengers or the cargo she has been designed to carry. 3 Outfitting work includes completing the installation of the propulsion and auxiliary machinery, with the electric system and the installation of navigating and radio equipment. 4 The owner decides upon the vessel type, its cargo and passenger capacity, its speed and maximum draft. 5 The qualified surveyors make constant controls during the building process to make sure that the ship is being built to the standards of the classification society. 6 Ships are built and repaired in shipyards. 7 Double bottoms are tested for tightness before the vessel is launched. 8 During the trial trip, the ship and her equipment are thoroughly tested. The ship is operated at varying speeds to check the maximum power and measure fuel consumption.

UNIT 5 – Visual & sound signals and communication codes Ex 1 Complete the following definitions. (6 marks) 1 IMO stands for

International Maritime Organisation. 2 An Aldis lamp is used to send

visual signals.

3 To make a sound signal we use

a siren, whistle or bell.

138

04_KeyTest.indd 138

21-03-2013 11:12:50

key to tests

4 Each letter or number is made up of a series of dots and dashes in the

Morse code.

Ex 5 Listen to your teacher and complete the following document. (6 marks) Name of ship

Call sign

numbers.

A WHALE

BUAU7

6 The meaning of each flag is indicated in the

A.B. DUBLIN

V2BL4

AZURE RHAPSODY

CQVP

5 Pennant-shaped flags are used to signal

International Code of Signals.

Ex 2 Mark the following sentences as True or False, then underline the mistakes in the false sentences and write the corrections on the dotted lines. (6 marks) 1 (T) 2 (F) Nowadays the Engine Officer is usually responsible for the radio department on board ship. Deck Officer 3 (F) In the past, messages were transmitted by radio telegraphy using the flag code. Morse code 4 (T) 5 (F) The phonetic code for R is ROGER. ROMEO 6 (F) The main language used for radio communications is Italian. English Ex 3 Answer the questions. (6 marks) 1 To communicate with other ships or shore stations where people may speak a different language. 2 It is now regulated by the IMO, the International Maritime Organisation. 3 The code gives information on the various ways of signalling (instruments and methods) and contains tables indicating, for example, the Morse code, the different kinds of flags and phonetic tables. 4 These can be used for transmitting letters, numbers or even coded messages. 5 The “O” flag also stands for “Man Overboard”. 6 Today, English is the language used for communications between ships of different nationalities. Ex 4 Write the full form of these numbers. (6 marks) a 3,422 three thousand four hundred and

twenty-two b 1.45 one point four five c 226 two hundred and twenty-six d 0.37 zero or nought point three seven e 22,402 twenty-two thousand four hundred and two f 1,436,000 one million four hundred and thirty-six thousand

UNIT 6 – The IALA Buoyage System & ship navigation lights Ex 1 Answer the questions by writing complete sentences. (8 marks) 1 The acronym IALA stands for International Association of Lighthouse Authorities. 2 In 1976 the IALA unified the world’s buoyage system, putting an end to the 30 dissimilar systems existing at the time. 3 The present system consists of six types of buoys or marks: lateral marks, cardinal marks, isolated danger marks, safe water marks, special marks and wreck marks. 4 They can have different shapes, different colours and top marks. 5 You find buoys near the coast, on the edges of channels and fairways at the entrance to ports, because their general purpose is to ensure the safety of ships navigating near the coast. 6 Yes, safe water marks have vertical stripes. 7 Special marks indicate an area that is used for special purposes, for example, a waterskiing area, or the position of pipelines and sewerage pipes. 8 Lateral marks indicate the port-hand side and the starboard-hand side of a channel or harbour. Ex 2 Which is Which? Indicate the correct type of buoy for each purpose. (4 marks) 1 They indicate the position of a hazard to shipping. Isolated danger marks 2 They indicate the edges of a channel.

Lateral marks

3 They indicate that there is deep water around them. Safe water marks 4 They indicate the safe side on which to pass a danger. Cardinal marks Ex 3 Which is Which? Indicate the correct type of buoy for each type of topmark. (6 marks) 1 They can have a red sphere as a topmark.

Safe water marks

2 They have a red can as a topmark. Port-hand

marks

139

04_KeyTest.indd 139

21-03-2013 11:12:50

teacher’s book

3 Their topmark is two black cones with their bases together. East cardinal mark 4 They have two black spheres as a topmark.

Isolated danger mark

5 (F) Longitude is indicated as North or South of Greenwich. East or West 6 (F) Parallels are larger as they get nearer to the poles. smaller. They

are larger as they get to the Equator

5 They have a green cone as a topmark.

Starboard-hand mark

6 Their topmark is two black cones pointing downwards. South cardinal mark Ex 4 Choose the correct option. (6 marks) 1c, 2a, 3c, 4b, 5c, 6b Ex 5 Complete the paragraph about ships at night. (6 marks) Vessels which navigate at night must have navigation lights, so that other vessels can see if there is a danger of collision and take action to avoid it. All vessels show a green light on the right side of the ship (starboard) and a red light on the left (port) side. They must show a white stern light (behind or astern). The red and green lights mentioned are called sidelights. Ships must also show at least one masthead light on the high mast. Ships which are more than 50 m long must have two masthead lights.

UNIT 7 – Geographical coordinates Ex 1 Answer the questions by writing complete sentences. (10 marks) 1 We use geographical coordinates to locate a place on the Earth’s surface. 2 The Equator divides the Earth into two hemispheres. 3 Europe is located in the northern hemisphere. 4 The Equator is the Prime Parallel. 5 The meridian running through Greenwich in London is the prime meridian. 6 The latitude of a place is its distance from the equator. 7 The longitude of a place is its distance from Greenwich meridian. 8 The latitude of the North Pole is 90° North. 9 The longitude of Greenwich is 0°. 10 The 180° meridian is called the Antimeridian and it is located in the Pacific Ocean; for example, it runs through the Fiji Islands. Ex 2 Mark the following sentences as True or False, then underline the mistakes in the false sentences and write the corrections on the dotted lines. (6 marks) 1 (T) 2 (T) 3 (F) There are 180 meridians. 360 4 (T)

Ex 3 Choose the correct option. (6 marks) 1a, 2c, 3a, 4b, 5a, 6b Ex 4 Fill in the table. (8 marks)

Nautical mile

Unit of measurement for distances at sea

1,853 metres

Length of a nautical table Number of time zones

24

Degrees of longitude of each time zone

15°

Time zone 0 is

Greenwich

The speed of a ship is measured in

Knots

1 nm/h

1 knot

It measures the ship’s speed

Log/speedometer

UNIT 8 – Navigational aids and instruments Ex 1 Mark the following sentences as True or False, then underline the mistakes in the false sentences and write the corrections on the dotted lines. (10 marks) 1 (T) 2 (F) Magnetic or true north is the point of the Earth’s axis where all meridians converge. Geographic 3 (T) 4 (F) The continuous fluctuations in the Earth’s magnetic field cause the geographic poles to shift their position. magnetic 5 (F) The gyrocompass always indicates the magnetic north. true/geographic 6 (F) A magnetic compass always indicates the geographic north. magnetic 7 (T) 8 (T) 9 (T) 10 (F) When in a given area the magnetic north is east of true north, the variation is negative. positive

140

04_KeyTest.indd 140

21-03-2013 11:12:51

key to tests

Ex 2 Fill in the table. (8 marks) 1 RADAR stands for... 2 Type of radio frequencies used by Radar systems.

position extremely accurately anywhere on the Earth’s surface. The receiver works out the time delay for the signal to arrive and uses data from 3 satellites to indicate our position as a geographical point in latitude and longitude.

3 Ships use the time elapsed between emission and return of the pulse signal to calculate...

UNIT 9 – The Deck Department

Radio Direction And Ranging. Microwave Radio Frequencies the target distance.

4 The angle formed by the distance of a star or planet above the horizon.

Altitude

5 Sonar stands for...

Sound Navigation and Ranging. 6 Speed of sound in water is around...

1,500 metres per second.

7 Bathymetric curves indicate...

the shape of the seabed.

8 Echo sounders are often used to locate shoals of fish on board...

fishing boats.

Ex 3 Fill in the name of each instrument. (7 marks) 1 Instrument used for determining direction which always points to geographic north.

Gyrocompass

2 Instrument used for measuring distance and position of target objects.

RADAR

3 Instrument used for scanning the various levels of the seabed and producing maps of the underwater relief.

Sonar

4 Instrument used for determining direction by means of a magnetic needle that points to magnetic north.

Magnetic compass

5 Instrument used for measuring the sea depth and also locating the presence of shoals of fish.

Echo sounder

6 Instrument used for finding a ship’s speed through the water and the distance covered.

Log/solcometer

7 Instrument used for measuring altitudes and other angles.

Gyrocompass

Ex 4 Try to fill in the 5 gaps in the text. (5 marks) Nowadays satellites are gradually replacing transmitting stations on the Earth. Each satellite emits microwave radio signals indicating its position which are picked up by a GPS receiver. GPS stands for Global Positioning System and it currently has 31 satellites orbiting around the Earth. This system allows us to calculate our

Ex 1 Complete the table showing how a ship’s crew is organized. (4 marks, 0.5 for each answer) 1 Captain / Master Highest authority on ship 2 Chief / First Officer / Mate Head of a department 3 Second Officer / Mate Assists the department head 4 Third Officer / Mate Next in ranking 5 Boatswain / Bosun Supervises ratings 6 Able Seamen Ratings (full name for AS) 7 Ordinary Seamen Ratings (full name for OS) 8 Cadet Officers Officers in training Ex 2 Match the documents on the left with their description on the right. (7 marks) 1d, 2g, 3f, 4e, 5c, 6b, 7a Ex 3 Choose the correct option. (4 marks) 1b, 2a, 3c, 4b Ex 4 Underline the mistakes in the following sentences and write the corrections on the dotted lines. (5 marks) 1 The Second Mate plans the daily maintenance programme. Chief Officer 2 The Bosun checks that the First Officer carries out these orders. crew 3 ABs carry out painting duties such as maintaining the ship’s navigational course. 4 OS is the highest rank in the lowest Deck Department. 5 ABs often have to wash and OSs sweep the deck. Ex 5 Answer the questions by writing complete sentences. (8 marks) 1 A winch is used to pull in or let out rope. 2 Because they are strong, elastic and resistant to the action of water. 3 A capstan is used to wind the ship’s anchor cable.

141

04_KeyTest.indd 141

21-03-2013 11:12:51

teacher’s book

4 Capstans are replaced by a hydraulically or pneumatically operated windlass on board large ships. 5 Bollards are short vertical posts on the quay. 6 Dry goods are transferred by derricks, cranes and conveyor belts. 7 A cargo ship is gearless when it is not fitted with cargo gear. 8 RO/RO ships load cargo over ramps through stern, bow or side ports.

Ex 3 Write the function of each piece of machinery. (8 marks) 1 Oil or water coolers

Ex 6 Put the mooring instructions in the correct order. (2 marks, 0.5 for each answer) 1d, 2c, 3b, 4a (The instructions below are in the correct order.) 1 Single up forward, single up aft. 2 Let go forward! Let go aft! 3 All gone and clear. 4 Finished with manoeuvring stations.

They transmit engine power to the propeller.

UNIT 10 – The Engine Department Ex 1 Complete the table showing how the Engine Department is organized. (3 marks, 0.5 for each answer) Head of the Engine Department Chief Engineer The person the head of the Engine Department is responsible to The Chief

Engineer is responsible to the Master

The two Officers below the head in ranking



Two Engine Department ratings



Second Engineer, Third Engineer Firemen, Greasers

Ex 2 Answer the questions by writing complete sentences. (5 marks) 1 The Chief Engineer is responsible for the safe and efficient operation of the ship’s engines and auxiliary machinery. 2 The Chief Engineer is responsible for safety and prevention of pollution in the engine room. 3 The Third Engineer is responsible for repair and maintenance/looks after the repair and maintenance of all electrical equipment. 4 Engineer Cadets are training in the Engine Room to complete their education under the senior ranks. 5 Auxiliary machinery refers to all machinery on board, except for the main engines and boilers.

They cool oil or water.

2 Feed-water heaters (economisers)

They heat the boiler feed water. 3 The ballast pumping system

It pumps water in and out of ballast tanks. 4 Evaporators

They produce fresh water. 5 Engine shafts 6 Lifeboats

They provide safety. 7 Automatic pilot

It provides remote control of the rudder. 8 Electricity generators

They supply the ship with electrical power (and lighting). Ex 4 Underline the mistakes in the following sentences and write the corrections on the dotted lines. (6 marks) 1 The Master is the head of the Engine Department. Chief Engineer 2 Engineer Officers regularly update the Navigation Logbook. Engine Room 3 The Engine Logbook contains information on the operation of engines, boilers and secondary machinery. auxiliary 4 Firemen are responsible for general oiling duties. Greasers 5 In the Logbook we find machinery parameters such as frying oil and lubricating oil consumption. fuel 6 The auxiliary engines provide the ship’s propulsion. main Ex 5 Complete the table about the Engine Control Room (ECR) equipment. (8 marks) Generator panel Shows electrical parameters such as voltage and load. Engineers can decide on how many electricity generators to keep in operation. Electrical switchboard Controls the power supply to the various machinery. Voltmeter and ammeter Show voltage and current flow for all major equipment. Alarm panel Monitors tank levels, temperature and pressure of machinery.

142

04_KeyTest.indd 142

21-03-2013 11:12:51

key to tests

Allows engineers to take action when an alarm sounds. Main engine controls Indicate fuel oil and lubricating oil consumption, speed, direction. These data are recorded in the Engine Room Logbook.

UNIT 11 – Describing technical diagrams Ex 1 Look at the pictures and complete the sentences with the following verbs in the correct form. Use each verb once. (7 marks) Picture 1 a The diagram represents a piston pump. b The pump chamber is fitted with discharge and suction valves at the top and bottom. Picture 2 The battery and the lamp are connected by two lengths of copper wire. Picture 3 A centrifugal pump consists of an impeller which rotates inside a casing. Picture 4 a The diagram shows the double-bottom of ship. b It contains a number of tanks. c The double bottom is divided into a number of tanks. Ex 2 Fill in the gaps. (10 marks) The lubricating oil system The used lubricating oil drains to the crankcase and then passes into the drain tank through filters. The drain tank is fitted with a purifier system which consists of a heater and a centrifuge. First the oil is heated in the heater, then it passes through the centrifuge to be purified. After purification, the oil is returned to the drain tank at a point next to the suction strainer. Pressure pumps draw the oil through the suction strainer and discharge it into the cooler. From the cooler the oil passes through the distribution branches to various parts of the engine. Ex 3 What happens to the lubricating oil when it passes through the different parts of the system? Complete the sentences. (2 marks, 0.5 for each answer)

1 When it passes the oil is filtered. 2 When it passes heated. 3 When it passes cooled. 4 When it passes purified.

through filters and strainers, through a heater, the oil is through a cooler, the oil is through a cooler, the oil is

Ex 4 Use the given words to fill in the text about the fuel oil system of a marine engine. (7 marks) Pumps draw the oil at low pressure from the service tanks and discharge it into the heater. A viscosity regulator is fitted at the heater discharge. Then the oil passes through a fine strainer before going to the main fuel pump suctions of the engine. A pressure control valve is fitted in the system and any excess oil is returned to the service oil tanks. Ex 5 Answer the questions by writing complete sentences. (4 marks) 1 The viscosity regulator controls the oil temperature to maintain the oil viscosity within close limits. 2 The change-over valve allows the operation of the engine either on heavy-oil or on diesel oil.

UNIT 12 – Pumps Ex 1 Answer the questions by writing complete sentences. (4 marks) 1 A pump is a hydraulic machine used to move liquids or to give them pressure or kinetic energy. 2 The pressure head is the pressure energy that the pump adds to the liquid. 3 The other hydraulic measure used in pump operation is the quantity of liquid delivered. 4 Power for the pump can be provided by an electric motor or a piston engine. Ex 2 Fill in the gaps using the following words. (8 marks) Pumps are used on board ship to move liquids or to give them pressure or kinetic energy. There are three common types of pumps: reciprocating pumps, gear-wheel pumps and centrifugal pumps; each of these is used for a different purpose. Before choosing which pump to use we have to consider a number of factors. Firstly, the

143

04_KeyTest.indd 143

21-03-2013 11:12:51

teacher’s book

quantity of liquid to be moved and the pressure head; next, the viscosity of the liquid and finally whether or not the liquid is corrosive or contains solid particles in suspension. Ex 3 Fill in the gaps with the correct prepositions. (8 marks) 1 The interlocking gear-wheels rotate inside a casing. 2 Liquid is discharged through the delivery outlet. 3 Liquid is forced to circulate by the vanes of the impeller. 4 The piston moves up and down within the chamber. 5 Liquid is drawn into the vacuum from the suction tube. 6 Pressure is created on the liquid which is forced out of the delivery tube. Ex 4 Choose the correct option. (2 marks, 0.5 for each answer) 1c, 2a, 3a, 4c Ex 5 Fill in the missing words to complete the descriptions of the three main kinds of pumps. Note that the same number indicates the same word which is repeated. (8 marks) CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS They are used for: high 1 flow rates. They give the liquid a: low 2 differential pressure. They are suitable for: low 3 viscosity liquids. They provide an: even and 5 continuous delivery. They 7 can be used for liquids containing solid particles in suspension. RECIPROCATING PUMPS They are used for: low 1 flow rates. They give the liquid a: high 2 differential pressure. They are suitable for: medium 3 viscosity liquids. They provide an: 6 uneven delivery especially for the single-acting kind. GEAR-WHEEL PUMPS They are used for: low 1 flow rates. They give the liquid a: low 2 differential pressure. They are suitable for: high 3 viscosity liquids like 4 lubricating and fuel oils.

They provide an: even and 5 continuous delivery. They 8 must/should not be used for liquids containing solid particles in suspension.

UNIT 13 – Boilers Ex 1 Fill in the gaps by using the given words. (10 marks) Water-tube boilers consist of a fire-proof casing with a furnace at the bottom, a steam drum at the top and water-drums at a lower level. The drums are connected by banks of tubes. Other large tubes, called the downcomer tubes, are located outside the furnace. They feed the water drums with cool water, so that convection currents make the water move around the system. The water drums and banks of tubes are placed in the main flow of hot gases rising from the furnace: so the heat of the hot gases is transferred to the water in the tubes, generating steam. The difference in density allows the dry steam to collect in the steamdrum. Superheaters, located between the steamdrum and the water-drums, make the steam drier and more efficient. Ex 2 Underline the mistakes in the following sentences and write the corrections on the dotted lines. (4 marks) 1 In a boiler, the furnace is located at the bottom because hot gases rise descend. 2 Water is cooled down when it comes into contact with the heated hot gases. 3 Downcomer tubes provide a cool/cold reservoir of relatively hot water. 4 Economisers heat the feed-water before after it enters the boiler. Ex 3 Choose the correct option. (2 marks, 0.5 for each answer) 1a, 2c, 3b, 4b Ex 4 Answer the questions by writing complete sentences. (6 marks, 2 marks for each answer: 1 mark for content, plus 1 mark for grammar and syntax correctness) 1 Boilers are used to produce steam for auxiliary services like distilling plants, the galley and the laundry. Steam can also be

144

04_KeyTest.indd 144

21-03-2013 11:12:51

key to tests

used for driving items of auxiliary machinery like the steam turbines, which operate the cargo pumps on board crude oil tankers. 2 Steam is generated when the heat from the hot gases produced in the furnace is transferred to the water in the tubes. 3 Water is made to move around the system under the effect of convection currents. Ex 5 Match each name with its definition. (8 marks) 1c, 2g, 3h, 4e, 5b, 6a, 7d, 8f

UNIT 14 – Condensers & evaporators Ex 1 Fill in the gaps by using the given words. (12 marks) Most of the heat energy in exhaust steam can be saved by condensing it and sending it back to the boiler as hot feed-water. Rapid condensation is provided by a condenser. The main component of a condenser is a cooling surface, made up of thin copper-nickel alloy tubes. Two separate circuits are involved in steam condensation. The first is the cooling water circuit, the second is the condensate circuit. In the first circuit, a circulating pump provides a fast flow of seawater through the bank of tubes. In the second circuit, steam enters through a steam inlet and, by flowing over the tubes, transmits some of its heat to the liquid in the tubes. A rapid drop in steam temperature occurs, so that steam condenses and is collected in the hot well as the condensate. A condensate pump removes the condensate from the hot well and sends it into the boiler. Since there is no contact between the condensate and the coolant, pure distilled water is produced, which is ideal for feeding the boilers. Ex 2 Answer the questions by writing complete sentences. (6 marks) 1 A condenser produces pure distilled water. 2 A marine condenser uses seawater as the cooling liquid. 3 Seawater is sent into the condenser by a circulating pump. 4 The condensate is removed from the hot well by a condensate pump. 5 The condensate is finally sent into a boiler as boiler feed-water. 6 Today condensers are used for condensing refrigerant gas in air conditioning systems, and as components of refrigeration plants

and to maintain a low temperature in the cargo holds where perishable goods – such as meat, fish, fruit and vegetables – are stowed. Ex 3 Mark the following sentences as True or False, then underline the mistakes in the false sentences and write the corrections on the dotted lines. (12 marks) 1 (T) 2 (F) Heat exchangers perform an exchange of heat between solids at different fluids temperatures. 3 (F) Condensers and evaporators operate the same heat transfer inverse/opposite operation. 4 (F) In the evaporator the liquid condenses by extracting heat evaporates from an external fluid. 5 (T) 6 (T) 7 (T) 8 (F) First the seawater is heated to boiling point and turned into evaporator steam in the condenser. 9 (F) Then the steam rises into the evaporator where it is condensed condenser producing the distillate. 10 (T) 11 (F) Air ejectors (or vacuum pumps) are used to increase the pressure in the evaporation reduce chamber. 12 (T)

UNIT 15 – The steam engine plant Ex 1 Underline the five wrong words in the text and write the correct ones on the dotted lines. (5 marks) There are two types of engines commonly used nowadays: electric motors and heat engines. The former produce mechanical energy from light, the latter convert heat into mechanical energy. Heat engines need a source of mechanical energy. They need a working liquid, whose heat they absorb and convert into useful job. In a steam engine plant the heat engine is a turbine and the working fluid is water.

electricity – thermal – fluid – work –steam

Ex 2 Complete the sentences. (5 marks) 1 The engine is an energy converter. 2 Water converts into steam when it reaches boiling point.

145

04_KeyTest.indd 145

21-03-2013 11:12:51

teacher’s book

3 At an oil refinery, crude oil is converted into many different oil products. 4 Steam is converted/converts into water in the condenser. 5 Thermal energy is converted into mechanical work by heat engines. Ex 3 Study the diagram representing a steam engine plant and identify the components. (4 marks, 0.5 for each answer) P3 Condensate pump Economiser F Condenser A Main feed pump P1 Superheater C Turbine G Main circulating pump P2 Hot well B Boiler furnace D Ex 4 Fill in the gaps. (7 marks) The main parts of a steam engine plant are the boiler, the engine and the condenser. Mechanical work is produced by using the heat energy of steam as the working fluid. First, water is heated and transformed into steam. Then some of the heat energy of steam is used to operate the turbine. Next the remaining heat is cooled down and the steam is turned back into water again. Ex 5 Choose the correct option. (4 marks) 1c, 2b, 3c, 4a Ex 6 Answer the questions by writing complete sentences. (5 marks) Suggested answers: 1 The main function of a marine steam engine plant is to produce mechanical energy to operate machinery. 2 In a steam engine plant, steam operates the moving parts in the engine. 3 It is defined as the “working fluid” because it is the source of the heat energy. 4 The basic areas of steam operation in this plant are generation, expansion, condensation and feed. 5 The steam receives its heat energy in the boiler.

UNIT 16 – Nautical charts Ex 1 Answer the questions by writing complete sentences. (6 marks) 1 Ptolemy’s world maps (already) show the Earth as a spherical surface. They also show

the network of parallels and meridians appearing on modern maps. 2 Because he used the Ptolemaic chart as a basis for calculating his position. 3 Gerhardus Mercator is considered to be the father of modern cartography. 4 In 1556 he produced a world chart by a type of projection which goes under his name. His projection method is still preferred nowadays for drawing up nautical charts. 5 He plots the ship’s course and current position on the working chart. 6 Great circles are the Equator and all meridians. Ex 2 Fill in the table with the items given below in scrambled order. (6 marks, 0.5 for each answer) Rhumb line A line joining two points on the Earth’s surface which intersects the meridians at a constant angle. Great circle track A line following the shortest route between 2 points on the surface of a sphere. Great circle The largest circle on the Earth’s surface which passes through its centre. Small circle The arc of a small circle which is NOT the shortest route between two points. Rhumb line Not used for ocean crossings. Great circle track Used for ocean crossings. Ex 3 Underline the mistakes in the following sentences and write the corrections on the dotted lines. (6 marks) 1 As the Earth is spherical, it cannot be represented on a spherical surface flat without some distortion. 2 The line of a chart refers to the ratio between real dimensions and the scale size of the arc of the chart. 3 Nautical charts use Mercator gnomonic and astronomic projections. 4 The Mercator is a hexagonal cylindrical projection. 5 The physical constant used with mathematical Mercator charts is called j c. 6 Gnomonic charts cannot include more than one ocean because hemisphere of distortion. Ex 4 Complete the table by placing the expressions in the correct place to identify the characteristics of each type of chart. (4 marks)

146

04_KeyTest.indd 146

21-03-2013 11:12:51

key to tests

MERCATOR CHARTS 1 the most widely used in navigation 2 position, distance and direction are easily

determined 3 conformal 4 true shape of features is maintained 5 rhumb lines are plotted as straight lines

GNOMONIC PROJECTIONS 1 not useful as a working chart 2 distance and direction cannot be measured

directly 3 great circle routes are plotted as straight lines Ex 5 Fill in the gaps. (8 marks) Hydrographic surveyors compile nautical charts by using sonar technology and considering both the sea area and the shoreline. To show all this information, nautical charts make use of conventional symbols. The IHO ensures that nautical charts are standardized in various parts of the world. Any corrections or updates to the chart are reported in bulletins called Notice to Mariners. Many charts today are produced as ENCs to be used in Electronic Chart Display and Information Systems, which are an essential part of integrated navigation and bridge systems.

UNIT 17 – Piloting & plotting Ex 1 Underline the mistakes in the following sentences and write the corrections on the dotted lines. (6 marks) 1 When we take a bearing, we are actually measuring the time between north and our landmark. angle 2 We use a magnetic sounder to read the values of the angle and take a bearing. compass 3 The compass sounding is what the ship’s compass reads at any time. heading 4 Before plotting compass bearings on a nautical chart with a LOP, we need to apply corrections for variation and differentiation. deviation 5 If magnetic variation is to the West, it is indicated with the (+) sign. East 6 To calculate magnetic deviation, we need to use the ship’s own landmark deviation tables. compass Ex 2 Reorder the steps in taking a sextant bearing. (6 marks) 1c, 2e, 3a, 4d, 5f, 6b

This method is called by bearing and distance. 1 Find out the height of the landmark on the nautical chart. 2 Use the sextant to measure the angle a between the top and the bottom of the landmark. 3 Apply the formula to get the distance from the object. 4 Use this distance to draw a circular LOP on the nautical chart.  5 Now take a compass bearing to get a second line of position. 6 Where this second LOP crosses the circular LOP, it is our exact position or fix. Ex 3 Choose the correct option. (4 marks) 1c, 2a, 3c, 4b Ex 4 Fill in the gaps by using the given words. (10 marks, 0.5 for each answer) First we locate our landmark on the chart, then we take a compass bearing of it. This compass reading will show the degrees and minutes of the angle formed by our landmark and the compass north. Then we transfer this compass reading to the chart. This is how we do. We place one arm of our parallel ruler on the chart compass rose, on the line indicating the degrees and minutes shown by our compass reading. Then we place the other arm of the parallel ruler on our landmark and draw a line. This line is our first LOP. Next we draw a second LOP by choosing another landmark and following the same procedure. The point of intersection of the two LOPS is the fix. This is the point on the chart where our ship is. We indicate the fix by drawing a circle around it and writing the time alongside. After that, we plot our course, drawing a straight line from our fix to our chosen destination. We place an edge of the parallel ruler on the course line and the other edge over the centre of the compass rose, where we read the magnetic degrees of our course. These degrees represent our course magnetic heading. Finally we write this heading above the course line. Ex 5 Answer the questions by writing complete sentences. (4 marks) 1 When we have nothing more than a single landmark to fix the ship’s position, we can take two sightings of the same landmark at two different times.

147

04_KeyTest.indd 147

21-03-2013 11:12:51

teacher’s book

2 It is called a running fix because the ship has “run” a certain distance during the time interval between the two LOPs. 3 They are used to read the degrees of LOPs and course lines on the chart compass rose and to plot on the chart lines of position and course lines which are parallel to the compass readings. / They are used to plot lines of position and course lines on nautical charts. 4 When you are plotting the course line, you write a “C” to indicate the compass course, referred to magnetic north, and a “T” to indicate a true course, referred to geographic north.

UNIT 18 – Business logistics Ex 1 Write the Italian words regarding logistics. (3 marks) 1 beni di consumo goods / commodities 2 consumare to consume 3 immagazzinamento storage 4 efficienza di produzione production efficiency 5 tenore di vita standard of living 6 fonti di produzione sources of production Ex 2 Complete the definitions by using the given words. (3 marks, 0.5 for each correct gap-filling) 1 A limited movement storage system means that people had to live close to the production source and consume a narrow range of goods. 2 The principle of comparative advantage is the principle at the basis of today’s international trade. 3 Historically, transportation and inventory of goods were traditionally managed separately. 4 Business logistics has introduced the new concept of coordinated management to the activities in question 3. 5 The professional organization of logistics managers is known as the Council of Logistics Management. 6 The supply chain management/process regards the logistic interactions that take place within a firm or between separate firms. Ex 3 Write the names of the missing components of a typical logistics system.

(7 marks, 0.5 for each correct item) 1 customer service; 2 demand forecasting; 3 distribution communications; 4 inventory control; 5 material handling; 6 order processing; 7 parts and service support; 8 plant and warehouse site selection; 9 purchasing; 10 packaging; 11 return goods handling; 12 salvage and scrap disposal; 13 traffic and transportation; 14 warehousing and storage. Ex 4 Underline the mistakes in the following sentences and write the corrections on the dotted lines. Note that in one sentence there are two mistakes. (5 marks) 1 The various functional activities such as transportation, etc. are repeated very few times along the supply channel. several 2 The physical supply channel is the source and space gap between a firm’s immediate material sources and its time processing points. 3 As well as transportation and inventory control, there are a number of “sustainable” activities involved in the logistics “support” mix for each firm. 4 Packaging must protect goods during handling and purchasing. storage 5 Commodities like coal and gravel especially need special do not need/ warehousing although always inventories are never made. Ex 5 Answer the questions by writing complete sentences. (12 marks, 2 marks for each answer: 1 mark for content, plus 1 mark for grammar and syntax correctness) 1 Logistics is so important because it provides the bridge between production and market locations that are separated by time and distance. 2 The supply chain finishes with the final disposition of a product. 3 Inventories are an essential logistic activity because they provide a buffer between supply and demand maintaining product availability for customers. 4 The term “materials management” refers to

148

04_KeyTest.indd 148

21-03-2013 11:12:51

key to tests

the physical supply channel or the time and gap between a firm’s immediate material sources and its processing points. 5 A “reverse logistics channel” is important because products become obsolete, damaged or non-functioning and are returned for repair or disposal. 6 “Outsourcing” means sourcing from low cost offshore locations.

UNIT 19 – The moving air Ex 1 Fill in the gaps by using the given words. (10 marks) Meteorologists are trying to find a physical model to explain the movement of air masses around the Earth. Air masses are those parts of the atmosphere which are homogenous in temperature, humidity and pressure. They form over large areas where environmental conditions are stable. Air masses can be warm or cold and dry or humid, depending on where they form; for example, over a tropical desert area they will be warm and dry. The fact that these air masses move over the surface of the Earth balances our climate redistributing the Sun’s heat from warmer to colder places. The most accepted model today is known as convection circulation of the air. Ex 2 Choose the correct option. (5 marks) 1c, 2a, 3c, 4b, 5a Ex 3 Answer the questions by writing complete sentences. (5 marks) 1 The factors determining the movements of atmospheric air are temperature differences, humidity and pressure and their reciprocal effects. 2 Air pressure varies with temperature because cold air is heavier than warm air and has a higher pressure. 3 It varies with humidity because the more water vapour there is in the air, the lighter it is. 4 Isobars are points/areas with the same atmospheric pressure. 5 They are shown as rings around the high and low-pressure centres. Ex 4 Choose the correct option. (6 marks) 1b, 2a, 3b, 4b, 5a, 6c Ex 5 Complete the definitions. (4 marks, 0.5 for each answer) Main winds blow all year round in the same direction.

The Polar Winds, the West Winds and the Trade Winds are the main winds. Monsoons are periodic winds. Monsoons blow for six months from the sea and for six months from the land to the sea. The Bora, the Föhn, the Mistral and the Sirocco are variable winds, since they only blow periodically. A cold front is formed when cold air approaches and replaces rising warm air. A warm front is shown by a line with red semicircles. A line with blue triangles shows a cold front.

UNIT 20 – Logistic services Ex 1 Fill in the missing words in Pfohl’s definition of “logistics”. (4 marks) “Logistics must ensure that a recipient is supplied from a point of origin in accordance with his requirements with the correct product (in quantity and variety), in the right condition, at the right time and in the right place at minimum cost.” Ex 2 Fill in the table. (6 marks) Logistic service providers

Specialized companies for moving products

Another name for storage points

Transport, trans-shipping, storage Warehousing

The quickest transport system

By air

Transhipment locations

Hubs Ocean shipping

TTS

Suitable for intercontinental movement of bulk cargoes

Ex 3 Use the following adjectives to write two comparative and two superlative true sentences about the different kinds of carriers. (4 marks) Adjectives: expensive – slow – fast – cheap Kinds of carriers: air freight – rail freight –

sea freight

Ex 4 Answer the questions by writing complete sentences. (10 marks) 1 Ocean shipping is suitable for the intercontinental shipment of bulk cargo, bulky goods and dangerous materials. 2 A refrigerated ship carries products like meat or dairy produce. These kinds of goods are perishable and need to be carried in refrigerated holds. 3 Ferries carry cars and passengers. 4 Standard container units are more than 3 cubic metres with a loading capacity of 5 tons.

149

04_KeyTest.indd 149

21-03-2013 11:12:51

teacher’s book

5 A container unit has a loading capacity of 5 tons. 6 They are easily stowed and loaded and unloaded. (2 marks) 7 The disadvantages are the cost of the specially designed container ships and the necessity for special port facilities. (2 marks) 8 Liner merchant ships are ships which run regular services at stated times on a pre-determined trade route and charge previously advertised tariff rates. Ex 5 Underline the mistakes in the following sentences and write the corrections on the dotted lines. (6 marks) 1 Liners do not operate on a fixed schedule but can be hired for transport anywhere in the world. Tramps 2 The Extra Cargo Shipping Instructions provide the carrier with details of the goods and instructions on handling. Export 3 The bill of lading is issued by the sender and accompanies the goods to the port of discharge. carrier 4 The bill of lading is a record of what kind of containers are being transported. goods 5 The owner is responsible for providing the special cranes for unloading/loading containerized ships. port authority 6 Combined transport aims to transfer shipped goods with the greatest number of transhipment operations. smallest

UNIT 21 – Moving waters Ex 1 Choose the correct option for each sentence. (3 marks, 0.5 for each answer) 1 Three quarters of the Earth’s surface is covered by water. 2 There is more water in the Southern Hemisphere. 3 The greatest quantity of water is in the Southern Hemisphere. 4 The large extensions of water between continents are called oceans. 5 Lands enclose parts of oceans forming smaller basins called seas. 6 Seas are connected to oceans.

Ex 2 Complete the crossword. (8 marks)    

2

N

 

O

 

R

 

T

 

H  

3

   

T

E

 

 

2

M O

  M

3

P

D   E

R

 

N

N

 

S

B

S  

W A

 

  4

1

1

A

L  

R M  

I

O

 

N

 

I  

R

A  

T Y

N  

U

4

R  

R E D

I L

 

T

 

T

I

C

Y

Ex 3 Match the two parts of each sentence. (8 marks) 1d, 2f, 3g, 4a, 5h, 6b, 7c, 8e Ex 4 Answer the questions by writing complete sentences. (4 marks) 1 The differences in temperature, salinity and density determine the formation of water masses which are different from each other. 2 They form the main ocean currents. 3 The main ocean currents transport equatorial warm waters to the polar regions and cold polar waters to the equatorial regions, forming a system called the global conveyor belt. 4 The Gulf Stream is a warm ocean current, while the Labrador Current is a cold ocean current. Ex 5 Fill in the gaps. (7 marks) The combined action of the Moon and the centrifugal force of the Earth cause tides to occur. Spring tides usually happen when the Moon is full and the Sun and the Moon are aligned. On the contrary, when the Sun and Moon are perpendicular to each other, their forces do not pull together and neap tides occur. Every day the cycle of high and low tides is repeated with a period of slack water occurring between tides.

UNIT 22 – The dead reckoning plot Ex 1 Answer the questions. (11 marks, 2 marks for each answer: 1 mark for content, plus 1 mark for grammar and syntax correctness; 1 mark for answer 4)

150

04_KeyTest.indd 150

25-03-2013 10:36:31

key to tests

1 To plan his ship’s course, a navigator uses nautical charts, radio bulletins and weather maps referring to the areas where the ship will be sailing. 2 The track is the ship’s planned course. 3 The planned track line is divided into segments because there are points where the ship has to change direction. 4 These segments are called the legs of the track. (1 marks) 5 Junction points are points where the ship changes direction. 6 The track looks like a broken line on the chart. Ex 2 Complete the text with the missing words. (8 marks) The term “dead reckoning” comes from deduced reckoning, which was shortened to ded reckoning by sailors. It was a method established in the 18th century (and used up to the early 20th century) to calculate the ship’s position by making lots of trigonometric calculations. Ded reckoning was then modified to “dead reckoning”, which is the term still used today. Nowadays it indicates a technique/method to geometrically determine a ship’s approximate position by applying a vector representing true course and speed to the last fix. Ex 3 Fill in the table. (6 marks) SOA stands for

Speed of Advance

TR DFT (Drift) A circle

labels each leg of the track

Leeway A semicircle

speed in knots of the current represents a fix

movement of vessel due to winds represents DR position

Ex 4 Underline the mistakes in the following sentences and write the corrections on the dotted lines. (5 marks) 1 Plot a DR position for the speed you obtain a fix. time 2 Plot a new wind line from each fix as soon as this is plotted on the chart. course 3 Plot a new DR position at the time of every course and/or compass change. speed 4 Plot a corrected DR position if the predicted course line proved wrong and continue from the first plotted fix. last 5 Plot a DR position every month. hour

UNIT 23 – Petroleum Ex 1 Answer the questions. (12 marks, 2 marks for each sentence: 1 mark for content, plus 1 mark for grammar and syntax correctness; 1 mark only for very easy answer 1 and 4) 1 The main components of petroleum are hydrogen and carbon. (1 marks) 2 Crude oil deposits are called oilfields. 3 To extract petroleum they drill an oil well. 4 The lightest hydrocarbon is natural/ methane gas, which has only one carbon atom in its molecule. (1 marks) 5 Petroleum distillation is carried out in an oil refinery / in a fractionating tower. 6 The heaviest petroleum distillates are heavy oil and lubricating oils. 7 Heavier hydrocarbons have a higher number of carbon atoms in their molecules. Ex 2 Link and rewrite the pair of sentences using the relative pronoun which. (4 marks) 1 Fossil fuels, which are the main industrial fuels, are formed of hydrogen and carbon. 2 The combustible components of fossil fuels are hydrocarbons, which are formed of hydrogen and carbon. 3 Petrol, diesel oil and kerosene, which are the main industrial fuels, are petroleum distillates. 4 Crude oil was formed from the chemical transformation of organic remains which deposited at the bottom of salty marshes and lagoons. Ex 3 Fill in the gaps. (5 marks) Crude oil is composed of a mixture of oils which can be separated out into a number of products, such as petrol, diesel oil, kerosene and lubricants. The main method of separation is fractional distillation. Since the different oils have different boiling temperatures, they are isolated in fractions of different boiling ranges. This separation process is carried out in a fractionating tower. Ex 4 Underline and correct the mistakes in these sentences by changing the adjectives. (3 marks, 0.5 each) 1 The temperature is lower at the bottom than at the top of the tower. higher 2 The hydrocarbons with the highest boiling point are condensed at the lowest top of the tower. 3 The hydrocarbons that remain at the base of the column are the heaviest lightest hydrocarbons.

151

04_KeyTest.indd 151

25-03-2013 10:36:43

teacher’s book

4 The heavier hydrocarbons rise to the top. lighter 5 The lighter hydrocarbons evaporate at higher temperatures. lower 6 The heavier hydrocarbons have fewer carbon atoms in their molecules. lighter Ex 5 Fill in the table. (6 marks) 1 In this process the heavy oils are heated to a temperature of 450°C to break their molecules. Cracking 2 It takes place when the fuel burns before the piston reaches the cylinder bottom. Detonation 3 The various kinds of petrol are distinguished by their... octane value 4 In this process the molecular chains of petrol are modified to increase its octane value. Reforming 5 It is a well-known aromatic hydrocarbon. Benzene 6 They are added to petrol to Aromatic increase the octane value. hydrocarbons

UNIT 24 – Kinds of energy & energy sources Ex 1 Mark the following sentences as True or False, then underline the mistakes in the false sentences and write the corrections on the dotted lines. (6 marks) 1 (F) Energy exists in two forms, as either mechanical or kinetic potential energy. 2 (F) Kinetic energy is the energy of position. movement 3 (F) Kinetic energy is stored energy. Potential 4 (T) 5 (F) The chemical energy of the potential fuel is kinetic energy. 6 (T) Ex 2 Fill in the gaps by using the given words. (8 marks) There are different types of energy and each of them can be converted into another type: from chemical into thermal, into mechanical, etc. While energy can continuously be transformed, some of the primary energy sources cannot/ can’t continuously be replaced by Nature. These are known as non-renewable energy sources and consist of fossil fuels: coal, oil, natural gas. Fossil fuels are found in deposits which were created over many thousands of

years, from the chemical transformation of unicellular plants and animals under the ground. Ex 3 Answer the questions by writing complete sentences. (6 marks) 1 Energy is the capacity for doing work. 2 Electrical energy is a secondary form of energy. 3 We need energy sources to produce useful power and run machinery. 4 A heat engine is a prime mover/an energy converter. 5 Carbon dioxide is the best known of greenhouse gases. 6 It is given off when fossil fuels burn with oxygen. Ex 4 Choose the correct option. (4 marks, 0.5 for each answer) 1c, 2b, 3c, 4a, 5a, 6c, 7b, 8c Ex 5 Choose the correct words to fill in the gaps. (6 marks) 1 Solar panels are prime movers which collect sunlight. 2 Water wheels convert the natural power of water into mechanical energy. 3 A hydro-turbine engine uses water to drive its wheel. 4 A fuel is a material for producing heat or other forms of energy. 5 The various types of energy are classified as primary or secondary types. 6 The energy stored in fuels is released through a combustion process.

UNIT 25 – Heat energy & heat engines Ex 1 Mark the following statements as True or False, then underline the mistakes in the false sentences and write the corrections on the dotted lines. (5 marks) 1 (T) 2 (F) Heat can be completely converted cannot into another type of energy. 3 (F) A heat engine converts more than 40% of the fuel’s energy into less mechanical work. 4 (T) 5 (T) Ex 2 Choose the correct option. (5 marks) 1c, 2c, 3b, 4a, 5c Ex 3 Complete the text with the words given in scrambled order. (8 marks) Heat engines are given this name in this way

152

04_KeyTest.indd 152

21-03-2013 11:12:52

key to tests

because they convert thermal energy or heat into mechanical work. They are classified into two groups: internal and external combustion engines. In external combustion engines, the combustion process takes place in a boiler outside the engine. In internal combustion engines, combustion takes place in a combustion chamber inside the engine. The steam engine was invented by James Watt in 1765 and today’s steam turbines are external combustion engines. Reciprocating engines and gas turbines are internal combustion engines. The moving parts of the engine, turbine blades and pistons, which transform thermal energy into work, are moved by the action of a working fluid. Steam is the working fluid that moves the rotor blades in steam turbines; a flow of exhaust gases from the combustion process drives the pistons of reciprocating engines and the rotor of a gas turbine. Ex 4 Answer the questions by writing complete sentences. (8 marks) 1 Thermal energy is produced by the constant motion of atoms and molecules that compose matter. 2 They are made up of hydrogen and carbon. 3 Their chemical composition makes hydrocarbons particularly suitable for releasing a great amount of thermal energy when they burn with oxygen. This quality gives them a high heating value. / Because they release a great quantity of heat energy when they burn. This is why they have a high heating value. 4 Hydrogen and carbon combine with oxygen and form new chemical compounds. 5 When the oxidation is complete, carbon dioxide is formed. 6 In a combustion process thermal energy or heat is produced. 7 This energy comes from the chemical energy stored in the fuel. 8 A heat engine converts thermal energy into mechanical energy. Ex 5 Fill in the gaps. (4 marks) During the burning process, fossil fuels release carbon dioxide into the atmosphere. This gas contributes to the greenhouse effect, through which the Sun’s heat is trapped in the lower layers of the atmosphere, making the Earth’s surface ever warmer.

UNIT 26 – Radio communication on board Ex 1 Fill in the table. (4 marks) Channel 16 is used for distress, safety and calling. Channel 13 is



used worldwide for bridge-to-bridge navigation.

Channel 70 is used for Digital Selective Calling. Channel 68 is



used in Italy for Maritime Safety

Information.

Ex 2 Write the full name for these acronyms. (8 marks) VHF ETA CRS ETD SAR RT VTMS MSI

Very High Frequency Estimated Time of Arrival Coastal Radio Stations Estimated Time of Departure Safety And Rescue Radio Telephony Vessel Traffic Management Services Maritime Safety Information

Ex 3 Answer the questions. (6 marks) 1 It is made up of numbers and letters and is the ship’s unique identification code. 2 The call sign is assigned to the ship by the country’s registration authority when the ship is enrolled in the national register of shipping. 3 Because the ship is also registered with the ITU. 4 It is a nine digit number and is used as an alternative to the call sign to identify the ship. It is automatically transmitted during Digital Selective Calling. 5 The SMCP is a standardised safety language and was introduced to facilitate communication between ships of different nationalities. 6 It is particularly important in times of distress and danger, to avoid misunderstandings which could lead to disaster. Ex 4 Fill in the gaps with the following words. (8 marks) 1 Sandbank in position 20 degrees 34 minutes North, 061 degrees 24 minutes West. 2 My position is: bearing one-three-seven degrees true from Bushy Lighthouse; distance two four decimal three miles. 3 Buoy 060 degrees on your port bow. 4 My present course is 050 degrees to Dover Buoy. 5 My position is 5.6 miles from Sulley Point. 6 My present speed is 13 decimal 5 knots. 7 My ETA is 0500 hours Local Time.

153

04_KeyTest.indd 153

21-03-2013 11:12:52

teacher’s book

Ex 5 Indicate the correct message marker for each message. (4 marks) 1 Do you require a tug for berthing procedures? QUESTION 2 Dangerous obstruction in fairway approaching Milton docks. WARNING 3 You must keep south of the fairway buoy. INSTRUCTION 4 I require a pilot at cross hands pilot station. REQUEST

6 The signal is repeated as often as necessary until an answer is received.

UNIT 27 – Radio messages

MAYDAY

Ex 1 Put the phrases in a routine ship-toshore call in the correct order. (6 marks) 1e, 2f, 3d, 4b, 5c, 6a

Name and MMSI/call sign

Swansea Coast Guard, Swansea Coast Guard, THIS IS Lucky 499912345, Lucky 499912345. On Ch 16, Position report. Suggest Channel 73. OVER.

TEN NAUTICAL MILES SOUTH OF THE ROCK OF GIBRALTAR, POSITION: 36°2’N, 5° 20 W

Ex 2 Underline the mistakes in the following sentences and write the corrections on the dotted lines. (6 marks) 1 We use VHF channel 73 to establish contact. 16 2 After establishing contact we switch to a safety channel. working 3 Channel 13 must be left free for Distress, Urgency and Safety Calls. 16 4 A ship is identified by her name, call sign or IMO number. MMSI 5 When sailing in foreign waters we identify our ship twice. three times 6 We use the code word OVER to signal the end of communication. OUT Ex 3 Answer the questions. (6 marks) 1 The standard request for a readability report is “How do you read me?” 2 Number five indicates excellent reception. 3 Ships are required to maintain a listening watch on Channels 16 and DSC distress Channel 70. 4 The order of priority of maritime radiotelephony communications is Distress calls, Urgency calls, Safety calls and General or routine communications. 5 The transmission of the signal MAYDAY indicates that the vessel or the people on board that vessel are in grave and imminent danger and require immediate assistance.

Ex 4 Make up the ship’s call and message, using the following information and repeating words where necessary. (6 marks) Distress call (3 marks) MAYDAY, MAYDAY, MAYDAY. THIS IS AEGEAN DOLPHIN, AEGEAN DOLPHIN, AEGEAN DOLPHIN 299344678. Distress message (3 marks, 0.5 for each answer) Distress signal

AEGEAN DOLPHIN, AEGEAN DOLPHIN, AEGEAN DOLPHIN 299344678 Position

Nature of distress

HOLED AND LISTING HEAVILY, ENGINE ROOM FLOODED AND TAKING ON WATER Other information

THIRTY-SIX PEOPLE ON BOARD, SEAS ROUGH End message

OVER

Ex 5 Fill in the gaps. (6 marks) An urgency message may only be sent on the authority of the Master, skipper or other person responsible for the vessel. The Urgency signal PAN PAN is repeated three times, indicating that the calling station needs to transmit a very urgent message about the operational capability of the vessel or about a person’s safety. The safety signal SECURITÉ is usually transmitted to all stations and communicates important navigational or meteorological warnings.

UNIT 28 – Reciprocating engines Ex 1 Fill in the gaps. (12 marks) The reciprocating or piston engine is the most common type of internal combustion engine. In piston engines mechanical energy is produced in a four-step cycle. This consists of intake and compression, combustion and exhaust of waste gases, produced in the combustion process. This cycle can either be performed in two or in four piston strokes. There are two types of reciprocating engine:

154

04_KeyTest.indd 154

21-03-2013 11:12:52

key to tests

the petrol engine and the diesel engine. They are also known as spark-ignition engines and compression-ignition engines. In petrol engines the fuel-and-air mixture is set on fire by a spark plug at the end of the compression stroke. In diesel engines there is no need for spark plugs, since the atomised fuel burns as soon as it enters the chamber and comes into contact with the very hot compressed air. Ex 2 Mark the following sentences as True or False, then underline the mistakes in the false sentences and write the corrections on the dotted lines. (6 marks) 1 (T) 2 (F) When air is compressed, the air-temperature is decreased. increased 3 (F) In a petrol engine, the air-temperature is higher than in a diesel engine. lower 4 (F) Petrol engines either in a operate in a four-stroke two- or a cycle. four-stroke cycle 5 (T) 6 (T) Ex 3 Complete the crossword. (6 marks, 0.5 for each word) 1

C 2 3 Y P C 4 1 I D L E C I R 2 5 F I C A M S H A F T L N T N R 3 6 C Y L I N D E R B L O C K W N E U N S J R R R H H E E I A E 4 5 E C P I S T O N F O U R L T T G T O O S 6 S P A R K R S

Ex 4 Talk about the diesel engine and answer the questions by writing complete sentences. (6 marks) 1 In the working cycle of a four-stroke diesel engine, mechanical power is only produced during the combustion phase/stroke. 2 Heat is transformed into mechanical work by the piston when it is pushed down by the expanding/exhaust gases.

3 In the working cycle of a four-stroke diesel engine, a piston must reciprocate twice to complete the thermal cycle. 4 A diesel engine intakes and compresses only air. 5 In a diesel engine, the diesel fuel mixes with air directly in the combustion chamber at the end of the compression phase, when the compressed air has become very hot. 6 It helps to reduce fuel consumption and CO2 emission levels.

UNIT 29 – Turbine engines Ex 1 Answer the questions by writing complete sentences. (6 marks) 1 Turbines are smaller and lighter than diesel engines; they can produce more power than a diesel engine of the same size. 2 Steam turbines are one-way engines, this means that when they are used for ship propulsion a separate turbine is necessary to make the ship go astern. In addition, since they rotate at a very high speed, very large reduction gears are necessary to connect the engine shaft to the propeller shaft. Finally, steam turbines consume more fuel than diesel engines. (2 marks) 3 The two essential functional parts of a steam turbine are a stationary element called a steam distributor, and a rotary element called a rotor. 4 The steam distributor transforms the heat energy of steam into kinetic energy, because steam expands (totally or partially) in this part of the turbine. 5 Mechanical energy is produced in the moving blades of a steam turbine, which transform the steam energy into rotary motion. Ex 2 In what parts of a gas turbine do these working steps occur? Fill in the gaps. (2 marks, 0.5 for each answer) 1 The air kinetic energy is increased in the compressor by adding pressure energy. 2 The fluid receives heat energy as it burns with the fuel in the combustion chamber. 3 The heat energy of the hot gases is converted back into kinetic energy by the turbine blades. 4 The efflux of high velocity gases which is generated is partly used to operate the compressor, while the remaining energy can be used for useful work to operate machinery. Ex 3 Complete the text with the missing words. (6 marks)

155

04_KeyTest.indd 155

21-03-2013 11:12:52

teacher’s book

Nowadays, steam turbines are used in industrial plants, such as electric power stations, and very few are still found on board ship. Gas turbines are used in many naval vessels, in some container ships and fast ferries. Both gas turbines and piston engines have a four-step working cycle, but the steps follow one after the other in the cylinders of a diesel engine, while they are performed at the same time in the different parts of a gas turbine. In fact, the gas turbine engine eliminates the three idle strokes, because combustion occurs continuously.

2 Oil tankers and chemical carriers carry highly flammable cargoes. 3 Inert gas is obtained from exhaust gases, which are cooled and purified in a special plant. 4 In the scrubbing and cooling tower the exhaust gases are washed under jets of seawater to cool them and remove the nitric and sulphur oxides. (2 marks) 5 The deck water seal prevents the back-flow of gases into the engine room when the system is not in operation. (2 marks) 6 The pressure-vacuum breaker controls the gas pressure in the system.

Ex 4 Underline the mistakes in the following sentences and write the corrections on the dotted lines. (6 marks) 1 A steam turbine is an internal external combustion engine. 2 The steam flow enters the turbine through the moving stationary elements of the engine. 3 After entering the engine, steam has a high pressure and Before a low velocity. 4 As steam expands, its velocity increased is reduced. 5 Impulse turbines have alternate rows of stationary and moving Reaction blades. 6 Steam expands in the moving stationary parts of the engine.

Ex 2 Fill in the gaps. (10 marks) In the cargo tanks which contain crude oil or petroleum by-products, a highly flammable mixture of air and hydrocarbon vapours is formed. This flammable mixture may catch fire for many accidental reasons, as, for example, a sudden static discharge. To prevent any accidental fire or explosion from taking place in the cargo tanks on board oil tankers and chemical carriers, the atmospheric air in the cargo tanks is replaced by inert gas. This gas contains such a low percentage of oxygen as to be unable to feed a combustion process.

Ex 5 Choose the correct option. (4 marks, 0.5 for each answer) 1c, 2b, 3a, 4b, 5a, 6a, 7c, 8b Ex 6 Complete the text about steam turbines. (6 marks) In the impulse turbine, steam expands totally in the nozzle, where the steam heat energy is converted into kinetic energy. Here steam loses pressure but acquires velocity. In the reaction turbine, steam expands both in the stationary and in the moving blades. Therefore, steam pressure is constantly reduced as the steam flow passes through both sets of blades. Steam velocity, instead, is increased in the moving blades.

UNIT 30 – The inert gas system Ex 1 Answer the questions by writing complete sentences. (8 marks) 1 An inert gas is a gas that does not allow a chemical reaction to take place.

Ex 3 Complete each sentence with a suitable verb in the correct form to express purpose. (4 marks) 1 Inert gas is used on board oil tankers to replace atmospheric air in the cargo tanks. 2 Compressors are used to compress the inert gas to the desired pressure. 3 Inert gas is used on board to make the atmosphere inert in the cargo tanks. 4 Since inert gas contains too little oxygen and is not safe to breathe, it is necessary to remove inert gas by ventilation with fresh air, before technicians can inspect them. Ex 4 Underline the mistakes in the following sentences and write the corrections on the dotted lines. (4 marks) 1 The inert gas enters the deck seal under pressure when the system is not in operation. is 2 When the gas pressure is too low, the oil rises up the cylinder of the pressure vacuum breaker and pushes the gas out into the atmosphere. high 3 The gas is sent to the cargo tanks at a pressure lower than atmospheric pressure. higher

156

04_KeyTest.indd 156

21-03-2013 11:12:52

key to tests

4 When the gas pressure is too high, the oil rises up the gas inlet tube of a pressure vacuum breaker and pushes the gas up into the pipeline.

low

Ex 5 Complete the crossword. (4 marks, 0.5 for each word) 1 3

N

1

R E F

I

P I

N E R

I

E

T

S

2

C

P

O O

E

L

2

N O N R E T U R N V A L V E O

I

R

G

N

S

43

O X Y G E N A N A L Y Z E R X N I

4

D E M I

S T E R F

I

L T E R

I S E D

UNIT 31 – The GMDSS Ex 1 Answer the questions by writing complete sentences. (12 marks) 1 It stands for Global Maritime Distress and Safety System. 2 It is called a global system because it operates everywhere in the world. 3 It is designed to ensure the transmission of distress communications from ships sailing everywhere in the world, leaving no isolated areas or shadow areas for reception. / It is designed to ensure the immediate reception of any distress signal transmitted by a ship, in whatever area of the world the ship is navigating. 4 It became fully operational in 1999. 5 The GMDSS is based on a combination of both satellite communication systems and terrestrial radio systems. 6 A distress call can be rapidly received by ships nearby and by one of the many landbased communication and rescue stations. 7 It is the satellite constellation which is an integral part of the GMDSS. 8 The Inmarsat constellation divides the Earth into four regions: the Atlantic Ocean Regions East and West, the Indian Ocean Region and the Pacific Ocean Region.

9 There are giant antennas which can send and receive the signals from satellites. 10 There is an Italian LES which is located in Abruzzo, on the Fucino plateau. 11 All cargo ships of 300 Gross Tonnes (GT) and above are requested to carry the GMDSS mandatory equipment. 12 All passenger ships engaged on international voyages are requested to carry the GMDSS mandatory equipment. Ex 2 Fill in the gaps. (8 marks) Digital Selective Calling (DSC) is used to automate the transmission and reception of distress alerts sent via VHF, MF and HF radio. In every message the DSC transmitter-receiver automatically includes the ship’s identity with the MMSI number of the calling ship. The DSC unit stores four different types of message. These may be distress, urgency, safety or routine calls. At the coast station, ship-to-shore distress calls/alerts receive priority handling and are routed to the nearest Rescue Coordination Centre (RCC). On board ship, DSC receivers sound an alarm when a distress call is received. Ex 3 Complete the table about the GMDSS mandatory communication equipment. (4 marks) 1 The special buoy which automatically transmits the ship’s identity, position and alarm call on the satellite radio frequency. EPIRB 2 A portable Radar Transponder (receiver and transmitter) SART or designed to be used in lifeboats. AIS-SART 3 The overall term for weather reports, navigational warnings and Search and Rescue Maritime information which can be Safety transmitted by navigational Information telex (NAVTEX). (MSI) 4 This means of communication Portable is designed to operate in the VHF VHF marine band in voice transceiver / mode, allowing communications handheld between searching vessels and VHF radio survivors in lifeboats. or walkie-



talkie

Ex 4 Fill in the table with the GMDSS sea areas. (6 marks) Sea Area 1 This is the sea area which lies within the coverage of an Inmarsat

157

04_KeyTest.indd 157

25-03-2013 10:36:05

teacher’s book

geostationary satellite. 2 This is the sea area which lies above 70° N and below 70° S. 3 This is a sea area approximately within 100-150 nautical miles. 4 This is the sea area over 150 miles from the coast where ships must carry an Inmarsat earth station. 5 This is the sea area which lies within the radiotelephone coverage of at least one VHF coast station. 6 This sea area lies within the radiotelephone coverage of at least one MF coast station.

A3 A4 A2 A3 A1 A2

UNIT 32 – Integrated navigation Ex 1 Answer the questions. (6 marks) 1 An Integrated Bridge System is a combination of systems which are interconnected to allow centralised access to information or command/ control from workstations. 2 The primary computer collects, processes and integrates the incoming information and then distributes it back to all the components of the system. 3 Information about the ship’s position and speed, water depth, presence of other ships in the area, alarms and warnings. 4 Because there are many different models on the market. 5 IMO safety requirements recommend that it must be possible to operate each single instrument separately. 6 ABS is the American Bureau of Shipping and it is the US classification society. Ex 2 Fill in the table (4 marks) A gyrocompass gives gyrocompass bearings. Logs measure water surface speed. Doppler logs measure SOG. Echo sounders measure the distance between the keel and the seabed. Anemometers measure wind direction and speed. The Radar system indicates stationary or moving objects near the ship. GPS indicates the ship’s position using information from a satellite. NAVTEX Navigational telex.

Ex 3 Underline the mistakes in the following sentences and write the corrections on the dotted lines. (6 marks) 1 ARPA stands for Automatic Radar Range Plotting Aids. 2 An ARPA target is measured by range and speed from one’s bearing own ship. 3 The ARPA system sounds an echo sounder when there is any danger of collision with another alarm ship. 4 The system calculates the necessary and possible manoeuvres avoid needed to cause a collision. 5 These manoeuvres are known trial as trick manoeuvres. 6 The system chooses the most Officer on suitable manoeuvre to avoid Watch collision. Ex 4 Fill in the gaps. (6 marks) The essential task of the Officer on Watch (OOW) is to ensure the ship’s safe navigation. This means that bridge workstations display a series of audible and visual alarms. The OOW should always “acknowledge” an alarm and take action to adjust the indicated problem. The ship’s movement is also monitored by visual observation from the conning station or position, which allows the OOW a “commanding view”. Integrated Bridge Systems also have a route planning workstation which today is usually fitted with an ECDIS, specifically designed to display ENCs. Ex 5 Reorder the steps in planning a route on an ECDIS. (8 marks) 1h, 2f, 3a, 4i, 5b, 6e, 7d, 8c, 9g 1 Check that you have the necessary up-todate ENC charts. 2 Enter your own ship’s draft and establish a safety contour based on your draft. 3 Enter a safety draft. 4 Enter beam clearance. 5 Establish a safety domain. 6 Create your passage plan. 7 Check your whole route in detail. 8 Visualise your route. 9 Save your route and export it to the workstation.

158

04_KeyTest.indd 158

21-03-2013 11:12:53

Contents

Contents Struttura del corso

3

Unit 16

103

Key to unit exercises

5

Unit 17

105

Grammar – Key to exercises 68

Unit 18

107

Unit tests

Unit 19

109

73

Unit 1

73

Unit 20

111

Unit 2

75

Unit 21

113

Unit 3

77

Unit 22

115

Unit 4

79

Unit 23

116

Unit 5

81

Unit 24

118

Unit 6

83

Unit 25

120

Unit 7

85

Unit 26

122

Unit 8

87

Unit 27

124

Unit 9

89

Unit 28

126

Unit 10

91

Unit 29

128

Unit 11

93

Unit 30

130

Unit 12

95

Unit 31

132

Unit 13

97

Unit 32

134

Unit 14

99

Key to tests

Unit 15

101

136

159

04_KeyTest.indd 159

21-03-2013 11:12:53